Anti-pd-l1 antibodies and their use to enhance t-cell function.
Abstract
The present application relates to anti-PD-L1 antibodies, nucleic acid encoding the same, therapeutic compositions thereof, and their use enhance T-cell function to upregulate cell-mediated immune responses and for the treatment of T cell dysfunctional disorders, including infection (e.g., acute and chronic) and tumor immunity.

Term
3.2 yearsleft in the term
Expires 8 December 2029.
- Priority
- Filed
- Granted
- Today
- Expires
60 claims: 20 independent, 40 dependent
- 1REIVINDICACIONES 1. Un anticuerpo anti-PD-Ll aislado o enlace a antígenos, en donde el anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos comprende una región variable de cadena 5 pesada y una región variable de cadena ligera, en donde:(a) la región variable de cadena pesada comprende HVRHl, HVR-H2 y HVR-H3, en donde: ID NO: 3;(b) la región variable de cadena ligera comprende HVR15 Ll, HVR-L2 y HVR-L3, en donde: (iv) el HVR-L1 comprende la secuencia de aminoácidos de SEQ ID NO: 17;(v) el HVR-L2 comprende la secuencia de aminoácidos de SEQ ID NO: 18;345 (vi) el HVR-L3 comprende la secuencia de aminoácidos de SEQ ID NO: 19;(o) la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada tiene al menos 90% de identidad de secuencia a 5 la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada de SEQ ID NO: 20;y (d) la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera tiene al menos 90% de identidad de secuencia papa la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena 10 ligera de SEQ ID NO: 21.
- 2El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 1, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de A región variable de cadena ligera tiene al menos 95% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de 15 región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO:21.
- 3El ^anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 1, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera tiene al menos 99% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de 20 región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO:21. IMPI INSTITUTO MtUCAMo _ DE LA FROHEDAD 346 ¡NUUST.’UAL '<
- 4El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 1, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera comprende la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO:
- 55 21. 5. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-4, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada tiene al menos 95% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de 10 aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada de SEQ ID NO:20.
- 6El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-4, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada tiene al 15 menos 99% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada de SEQ ID NO:20.
- 7Un anticuerpo anti-PD-Ll aislado o su fragmento de enlace a antígenos, en donde el anticuerpo o fragmento de 20 enlace a antígenos comprende una secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada y una secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera, en donde:(a) la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada tiene al menos 90% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada de SEQ ID NO: 20;y 5 (b) la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera tiene al menos 90% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO: 21. región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO: 21.
- 89. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la 15 reivindicación 7, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera tiene al menos 99% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO:21.
- 910. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de 20 la reivindicación 7, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera comprende la secuencia de 348 INSTITUTO MMCaNO Di LA PRJPIÍDA· INDIPD'RIM. aminoácidos de región variable de cadena ligera de SEQ ID NO:21.
- 1011. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antigenos de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 7-10, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada tiene al menos 95% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada de SEQ ID NO:20.
- 1112. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antigenos de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 7-10, en donde la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada tiene al menos 99% de identidad de secuencia a la secuencia de aminoácidos de región variable de cadena pesada de SEQ ID NO:20.
- 1213. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antigenos de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-12, que además comprende IgG4. 349
- 1315. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 14, en donde la región constante es IgGl.
- 1416. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-15, que tiene función 5 efectora reducida o mínima.
- 1517. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 16, en donde la función efectora mínima resulta de una mutación Fc de menor efector.
- 1618. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de 10 la reivindicación 17, en donde la mutación Fc de menor efector es N297A.
- 1719. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 17, en donde la mutación Fc de menor efector es D265A/N297A. 15 20. El anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de la reivindicación 16, en donde la función efectora mínima resulta de la aglicosilación. 21. Una composición que comprende el anticuerpo anti-PDLl o fragmento de enlace a antígenos de cualquiera de las
- 1820 reivindicaciones 1-20, y al menos un portador farmacéuticamente aceptable. 350 IMPI INSTITUTO MÍXICANO DE LA PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL
- 1922. Un ácido nucleico aislado que codifica al anticuerpo de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-20.
- 2023. Un vector que comprende el ácido nucleico de la reivindicación 22. 5
- 2124. Una célula huésped que comprende el vector de la reivindicación 23.
- 2225. La célula huésped de la reivindicación 24, misma que es eucariótica.
- 2326. La célula huésped de la reivindicación 25, misma que 10 es de mamífero.
- 2427. La célula huésped de la reivindicación 26, misma que es una célula de Ovario de Hámster Chino (CHO).
- 2528. Un proceso para hacer un anticuerpo anti-PD-Ll, o un fragmento de enlace a antigenos del mismo, que comprende 15 cultivar la célula huésped de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 24-27 bajo condiciones adecuadas para la expresión del vector que codifica el anticuerpo anti-PD-Ll o fragmento de enlace a antígenos, y recuperar el anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígeno. IMPI INSTITUTO de la propiedad INUUS rRIAL 351
- 2629. Un artículo de manufactura que comprende el anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antigeno de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-20.
- 2730. Un artículo de manufactura que comprende la 5 composición de la reivindicación 21.
- 2831. El artículo de manufactura de la reivindicación 29 o reivindicación 31, en donde el agente quimioterapéutico es un anticuerpo anti-VEGF. 15 34. El artículo de manufactura de la reivindicación 33, en donde el anticuerpo anti-VEGF es bevacizumab.
- 2935. El artículo de manufactura de la reivindicación 29 o 30, que además comprende al menos un agonista para una molécula coestimuladora positiva. IMPIg INSTITUTO MEXICANO Vt* Df !a RROFB»AD CV ÍNI,h$TWAE W
- 3036. El artículo de manufactura de la reivindicación 29 o 30, que además comprende un antagonista coestimulador B7negativo.
- 3137. El artículo de manufactura de la reivindicación 29 o 5 30, que además comprende al menos una molécula coestimuladora de la familia B7.
- 3238. El artículo de manufactura de la reivindicación 29 o 30, que además comprende al menos una vacuna.
- 3339. Uso del anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígeno 10 de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-20 para la manufactura de un medicamento para tratar cáncer.
- 3440. Uso de la composición de la reivindicación 21, para la manufactura de un medicamento para tratar cáncer.
- 3541. El uso de la reivindicación 39 o 40, en donde el 15 cáncer es seleccionado del grupo que consiste de mama, pulmón, colon, ovario, melanoma, vejiga, riñón, hígado, glándulas salivales, estómago, gliomas, tiroides, timo, epitelial, cabeza y cuello, gástrico y pancreático.
- 3642. El uso de la reivindicación 39 o 40, en donde el 20 medicamento es para usarse en combinación con un agente quimioterapéutico. ΙΜΡΙ* INi-TtTl'ΤΟ MBUCANO γΤ OE CA MOREUAO C INPUSTRIA1.
- 3743. El uso de la reivindicación 42, es seleccionado del grupo que consiste colon, ovario, melañoma, vejiga, riñón, salivales, estómago, gliomas, tiroides, cabeza y cuello, gástrico y pancreático. en donde el cáncer de mama, pulmón, hígado, glándulas timo, epitelial,
- 3844. El uso de la reivindicación 42 agente quimioterapéutico es un anticuerpo
- 3945. El uso de la reivindicación anticuerpo anti-VEGF es bevacizumab. o 43, en anti-VEGF. donde 44, en donde
- 4046. El uso de la reivindicación 42 o 43 agente quimioterapéutico es FOLFOX. una
- 4147. El uso de la reivindicación 46, en combinación de oxaliplatin, 5-fluorouracil el el en donde el donde FOLFOX es y leucovorin.
- 4248. El uso de la reivindicación 42 o 43, en donde el 15 agente quimioterapéutico es oxaliplatin.
- 4349. El uso de la reivindicación 42 o 43, en donde el agente quimioterapéutico es un inhibidor de RAF.
- 4450. Uso del anticuerpo o fragmento de enlace a antígeno de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 1-20 para la 20 manufactura de un medicamento para tratar la infección. IMPI 354
- 4551. Uso de la composición de la reivindicación 21 para la manufactura de un medicamento para tratar la infección.
- 4652. El uso de la reivindicación 50 o 51, en donde el medicamento es para su uso en combinación con un antibiótico.
- 4753. El uso de la reivindicación 52, en donde el antibiótico es un agente anti-viral.
- 4854. El uso de la reivindicación 53, en donde el agente anti-viral es un inhibidor de transcriptasa inversa.
- 4955. El uso de la reivindicación 54, en donde el inhibidor de transcriptasa inversa es un inhibidor de polimerasa.
- 5056. El uso de la reivindicación 53, en donde el agente anti-viral es un inhibidor de proteasa.
- 5157. El uso de la reivindicación 50 o 51, en donde el medicamento es para su uso en combinación con al menos una vacuna.
- 5258. El uso de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 50-57, en donde la infección es crónica.
- 5359. El uso de la reivindicación 58, en donde la infección crónica es persistente. IMPI 355
- 5460. El uso de la reivindicación 58, en donde la infección crónica es latente.
- 5561. El uso de la reivindicación 58, en donde la infección crónica es lenta.
- 5662. El uso de cualquiera de las reivindicaciones 50-61, en donde la infección resulta de un patógeno seleccionado del grupo que consiste en bacterias, virus, hongos y protozoos.
- 5763. El uso de la reivindicación 62 en donde el patógeno es una bacteria, y el medicamento es para usarse en combinación con un agente anti-bacteriano.
- 5864. El uso de la reivindicación 62, en donde el patógeno es un virus, y el medicamento es para usarse en combinación con un agente anti-viral.
- 5965. El uso de la reivindicación 62, en donde el patógeno es un hongo, y el medicamento es para usarse en combinación con un agente anti-fúngico.
- 6066. El uso de la reivindicación 62, en donde el patógeno es un protozoario, y el medicamento es para usarse en combinación con un agente anti-protozoario. IMPI ΙΜίΤΠυΤΟ MBUCANO occ Cí LA rkuíllLiA» OJO INDUmiAi *
Independent claims60
2,296 paragraphs in 190 sections, as filed
(54) Title: ANTI-PD-L1 ANTIBODIES AND THEIR USE TO IMPROVE T-CELL FUNCTION. (54) Title: ANTI-PD-L1 ANTIBODIES AND THEIR USE TO ENHANCE T-CELL FUNCTION.
(57) Summary
The present invention relates to an isolated anti-PD-L1 antibody or its antigen binding fragment, wherein the antibody or antigen binding fragment comprises a heavy chain variable region and a light chain variable region, wherein: (a) the heavy chain variable region comprises HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and HVR-H3, wherein: (i) HVR-H1 comprises the amino acid sequences of SEQ ID NO: 15; (ii) HVR-H2 comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 16; (iii) HVR-H3 comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3; (b) the light chain variable region comprises HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-3, wherein: (iv) HVR-L1 comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 17; (v) elHVR-L2 comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 18; (vi) HVR-L3 comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 19, (c) the heavy chain variable region amino acid sequence has at least 90% sequence identity to the variable region amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 20 heavy chain; and (d) the light chain variable region amino acid sequence has at least 90% sequence identity for the light chain variable region amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 21.
(57) Abstract
The present application relates to anti-PD-L1 antibodies, nucleic acid encoding the same, therapeutic compositions thereof, and their use enhance T-cell function to upregulate cell-mediated immune responses and for the treatment of T cell dysfunctional disorders, including infection ( eg, acute and chronic) and tumor immunity.
ί
I.
IMPI • 'ι ι ι; • AS 'η, ή
<img file="MX356367B_D0001.tif" />
PATENT TITLE No. 356367
Headlines):
Home:
Denomination:
Classification:
Inventor (s):
GENENTECH, INC.
DNAWay, South San Francisco, California, 94080, USA
ANTI-PD-L1 AND ITS USE TO IMPROVE THE FUNCTION OF
T-CELL ANTIBODIES
CIP: A61K39 / ^ 95; <sup>1</sup> A61K34 / 7Q6 ^<sup>;</sup>
C07K16 / 2> 4 £ 07KÍ6 / 3Cr ''
CPC: A61K39 / 39558; A61K31 / 7068;
-, C07kl6 / 28; C07K16Ó
BRYANTRVING; JEAN MAEÓKER; SANJEEV.
- i
A61K45 / 06; C07K16 / 10;
C07K16 / 22;
C07K16 / 22;
Number:
MX / a / 2016/009486
A61 ^ 39/3955; A61K45 / 06;
16/2827* 007*16/3046
HIU; & ÍPHfE M. LEHAR; HEATHER nter <»<ptional:
009 '* V. 9, deóío7
<img file="MX356367B_D0002.tif" />
'VivV<sup>1</sup>'
Country:
US
Validity: Twenty years Date of
Date-"
The patent of reference ^ ^ S ^ a with fundamet ^ túw ^ leMrtiijilos 1 ° 8 »fE # cc ^ ¡TíR fteccK φ and * 59 defcUtey * of the industrial pioflsitarir ^ 4e the LeyJJ ^ yoeiedi <ilndustnaWírfÍBé summers · • 'MV.V'aAW'
Expiration: 8'de<sup>;</sup>'I ^ * hfe from 2029 -Μ'? · 'XJ ··' Exnfl ^ ón: 25'óan | byo * 2ΛΤ '· \ ~ <
from the date of presentiK ^^ fes ^^ itolicitud l »em ^ esMwM | A
<img file="MX356367B_D0003.tif" />
Who subscribes to the present title lolM¡1 (fe'0re fundament M> disuestol - · -....... “'··“ -' · »---------. H-wfc ijoj artíci (Official Gazette 'of the Federation (ffijSjjlD | J ^ / Q6 / 1 <sup>and</sup>l 02 ^^ 1994,
01/25/2006, 06/05/2009, 06/06/2010, We ^ j0.4n / 06aÍMto, T7f (4e012 and «^ 4 /? 0 Regulations of the Mexican Institute of PrwjiWad l <t0USMal (DOf ^ ' WteáteWÍ refoi articles 1st, 3rd, 4th, 5th fraction V subsection a) * Bfa) KhÍ¡¡ \ lr »ti * y3fr4d Statute. Ol 12/27/1999, amended on 10/10/2002, 07/29/20dW ^^^^ rW & e®):
Deputy Generals, Coordinator, Divisford Directors ^ JmWraM ^^ ljSjaticini Departmental and other subordinates of the Mexican Institute of Jffi ^ É ^^ jMbstrial
At the rate
<img file="MX356367B_D0004.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0005.tif" />
iavi ^ efa from veirtfc to A> * extendable, counted to will keep vjgenteVregjjerechos.
ones III yí ^ üe ^ e the Industrial Property Law 26 «2 / fef<sub>í #</sub>^ e§ / 1999, 01/26/2004, 06/16/2005,
I<sup>or</sup>, 3®raójííni # to <fso a), 4 ° and 12 fractions I and III del 0®) 9ÉM5 / O7 / 2OO4. 07/28/2004 and 09/07/2007); [Mexican Industrial Property (DOF Agreement that delegates powers to the Directors, Divisional Deputy Directors, Coordinators F. 12/15/1999, amended on 02/04/2000, 07/29/2004,
08/04/2004 and 09/13/2007).
This letter is signed with an advanced electronic signature (FIEL), based on articles 7 BIS 2 of the Industrial Property Law; 3 of its Regulations, and 1 section III, 2 section V, 26 BIS and 26 TER of the Agreement establishing the guidelines for the use of the Electronic Payment and Services Portal (PASE) of the Mexican Institute of Industrial Property, in the procedures indicated.
THE PATENTES DIVISIONAL DIRECTOR
NAHANNY CANAL REYES
<img file="MX356367B_D0006.tif" />
Original string:
NAHANNY MARISOL CANAL REYES | 00001000000403252793 | Tax Administration Service | 1695 || MX / 2018/43787 | MX / a / 2016/009486 | Normal patent title with divisional PCT | 1220 | RRGO | Pág (s) 1 | Fn11AnZfZtgBDBnUsH0n
Digital stamp:
Emalkv¡qDi¡XmlNySnMXWhjqSUC116Jsz9AHVsuAEu1OIJHp5UUelqG3a qjrHZ9OWí8RXoAKFD1rKnCR6Hn8 + + + P2dlZF6luqLEgRUNZyqBc5Dwj8 9Z3p dl0gFQ + + ++ 2fO4tTDOo1ge8dRefshdFYONKÍKpvS3zukPodveV3akdj IGHQP8zK
8S6zoTBiwGj * awtxFI46XVqRVmnNwkipe9pipGqf * C * CUIgh3iTk81k8VW8fWSL7dF6Zunq9vlhsSAu / MwgY19HVtw
7j36IUJYZyv8P0dv9 + ZRGuW7fkLX / 6N + EuFg / OLQHswUPVh6cC20l1gMaKTCsfGpxb4tejxA ==
Arenai No 550. Piso 1, Pueblo Santa María Tepepan, Xochímilco, 16020, Mexico City (55) 53340700 www.gob.mx/iinpi
<img file="MX356367B_D0007.tif" />
MX / 2018/43787
3533/7
20/6 / Ρ
<img file="MX356367B_D0008.tif" />
OF U INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY I
ANTI-PD-Ll ANTIBODIES AND THEIR USE TO IMPROVE
T CELLS
Related Requests
This application claims the priority benefit under 35 USC 119 (e) of US Provisional Application No. 61/121092, filed on December 9, 2008, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Field of the Invention
This invention relates generally to immune function and enhancement of T-cell function, including overregulation of cell-mediated immune responses and treatment of dysfunctional T-cell disorders.
Background of the Invention
Co-stimulation or provision of two distinct signals in T cells is a widely accepted model of resting T cell lymphocyte activation by antigen presenting cells (APCs). Lafferty et al., Aust. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 53: 27-42 (1975). This model also provides discrimination of autonomous tolerance from non-autonomous and immune tolerance. Bretscher et al.,
Science 169: 1042-1049 (1970); Bretscher, PA, PNAS USA
96: 185-190 (1999); Jenkins et al., J. Exp. Med. 165: 302-319 (1987). The primary signal, or antigen-specific signal,
IMPI
INSTITUTO MiXKANO D »LA FROPIMAO
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0009.tif" />
it is transduced through the T cell receptor (TCR) after recognition of the external antigen peptide presented in the context of the higher histocompatibility complex (MHC). The second signal or co-stimulator is delivered to T cells via co-stimulatory molecules expressed in antigen presenting cells (APCs) and induces T cells to promote clonal expansion, cytosine secretion, and effector function. . Lenschow et al., Ann, Rev. Immunol., 14: 233 (1996). In the absence of costimulation, T cells can become refractory to antigen stimulation, do not provide an effective immune response, and can also result in exhaustion or tolerance to external antigens.
The simple two-signal model can be an oversimplification because the signal strength
TCR indeed has a quantitative influence on activation and differentiation of T. cells. Viola et al., Science 273: 104-106 (1996); Sloan-Lancaster, Nature
363: 156-159 (1993). Furthermore, T cell activation can occur even in the absence of a co-stimulatory signal if the intensity of the TCR signal is high. More importantly, T cells receive both positive and negative secondary co-stimulator signals. Regulation of such positive and negative signals is critical to maximize the host's protective immune responses, while
<img file="MX356367B_D0010.tif" />
<sub>3</sub> IMPI or «rmvTBMUüeAMo p> U WiMB BUD wrwnuAi maintains immune tolerance and prevents autoimmunity. Secondary negative signals appear necessary for induction of T cell tolerance, while positive signals promote T cell activation. Although the simple two-signal model still provides a valid explanation for previously untreated lymphocytes, a host's immune response is a dynamic process, and co-stimulatory signals can also be delivered to T cells exposed to the antigen.
The co-stimulation mechanism is of therapeutic interest because manipulation of costimulatory signals has been shown to provide a means of either enhancing or terminating the cell-based immune response. Recently, it has been discovered that T cell dysfunction or anergy occurs concurrently with an induced and sustained expression of the inhibitory receptor programmed death polypeptide 1 (PD-1). As a result, the therapeutic targeting of PD-1 and other signaling molecules through interactions with PD-1, such as ligand 1 for programmed death (PD-L1) and ligand 2 for programmed death (PD-L2) , are an area of great interest. Inhibition of PD-L1 signaling has been proposed as a means of enhancing T-cell immunity for the treatment of cancer (eg, tumor immunity) and infection, including both acute and chronic infection
ΙΜΡΪ
<img file="MX356367B_D0011.tif" />
(eg, persistent). However, since an optimal therapeutics directed to a goal in this path has yet to be commercialized, there is a significant unmet medical need.
Summary of the Invention
The present invention provides antiPD-L1 antibodies, including nucleic acid encoding and compositions containing such antibodies, and their use to enhance the function of T cells to over-regulate cell-mediated immune responses and the treatment of dysfunctional disorders of T cells, including infection (eg, acute and chronic) and tumor immunity.
In one embodiment, the invention provides an isolated heavy chain variable region polypeptide comprising an HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and HVR-H3 sequence, wherein:
(a) the HVR-Hl sequence is GFTFSXiSWIH (SEQ ID NO:
i);
(b) the HVR-H2 sequence is AWIX<sub>2</sub>PYGGSX<sub>3</sub>YYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO: 2);
(c) the HVR-H3 sequence is RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID NO:
3) ;
where in addition: Xi is D or G; X<sub>2</sub> is Sun; X<sub>3</sub> this
S.
In a specific aspect, Xi is D; X<sub>2</sub> is S and X<sub>3</sub> is
T. In another aspect, the polypeptide further comprises
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DE LA MOHRDAD INDOCTO IM
<img file="MX356367B_D0012.tif" />
Heavy chain variable region framework sequences juxtaposed between HVRs according to the formula: (HCFR1) - (HVR-H1) - (HC-FR2) - (HVR-H2) - (HC-FR3) - (HVR-H3 ) - (HC-FR4). In yet another aspect, framework sequences are derived from human consensus structure sequences. In a further aspect, framework sequences are VH subgroup III consensus structures. Still in a further aspect, at least one of the framework sequences is as follows:
HC-FR1 is EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (SEQ ID NO: 4) HC-FR2 is WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO: 5)
HC-FR3 is RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (SEQ ID
NO 6)
HC-FR4 is WGQGTLVTVSA (SEQ ID NO: 7).
In a further aspect, the heavy chain polypeptide is further combined with a variable region light chain comprising an HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3, wherein:
<td>(to)</td><td>the</td><td>sequence</td><td>HVR-L1</td><td>is</td><td>RASQXzjXsXgTXvXsA</td><td>(SEQ ID</td>
<td>(b)</td><td>the</td><td>sequence</td><td>HVR-L2</td><td>is</td><td>SASX<sub>9</sub>LX<sub>10</sub>S (SEQ</td><td>ID NO:</td>
<td>(c)</td><td>the</td><td>sequence</td><td>HVR-L3</td><td>is</td><td>QQXnXizXisXnPXisT</td><td>(I KNOW THAT</td>
ID NO: 10);
where in addition: X4 is D or V; X<sub>5</sub> is V or I; Χδ is S or
N; X<sub>7</sub> it is A or F; X<sub>8</sub> is V or L; X<sub>9</sub> is F or T; X<sub>10</sub> is Y or A; Xu is
<img file="MX356367B_D0013.tif" />
ΙΜΡΙ
INSTITUTO MUICANC DE LA PKWEDAU industrial
<td>AND,</td><td>G,</td><td>F or S; X12 is L, Y, F</td><td>0 W; X13 is</td><td>Y, N, A, T, G, F 0</td><td>I;</td><td></td>
<td>Xl4</td><td>is</td><td>Η, V, Ρ, Τ or I; X<sub>15</sub> is</td><td>A, W, R, P</td><td>0 T.</td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td></td><td>Still in one aspect</td><td>additional,</td><td>X<sub>4</sub> is D; X<sub>5</sub> is V; X<sub>6</sub></td><td>is</td><td></td>
<td>S;</td><td>X?</td><td>that; Xg is V; Xg is F</td><td>; X10 is Y;</td><td>Xn is Y; X<sub>i2</sub> is L;</td><td>Xl3</td><td></td>
<td>is</td><td>AND;</td><td>Xi4 is Η; X15 is A.</td><td>Still in a</td><td>additional aspect,</td><td>the</td><td></td>
The light chain further comprises light chain variable region framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs according to the formula: (LC-FR1) - (HVR-L1) - (LC-FR2) - (HVR-L2) (LC-FR3) - (HVR-L3) - (LC-FR4). In a further aspect, framework sequences are derived from human consensus structure sequences. In a further aspect, the framework sequences are the VL kappa I consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, at least one framework sequence is as follows:
LC-FR1 is DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (SEQ ID NO: 11)
LC-FR2 is WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO: 12)
LC-FR3 is GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID
NO: 13)
LC-FR4 is FGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO: 14).
In another embodiment, the invention provides an anti-PD-Ll antibody or antigen-binding fragment comprising a heavy chain and light chain variable region sequence wherein:
(a) the heavy chain comprises an HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and
HVR-H3, where in addition:
IMPI ^
MEXICAN INSTITUTE · ')
OF THE PROPERTY
INOUSTRIAI ^ * cZ ^ L ·>! l il I »» · »Ο— (i) the HVR-H1 sequence is GFTFSXxSWIH (SEQ ID NO:
1) (ii) the HVR-H2 sequence is AWIX<sub>2</sub>PYGGSX<sub>3</sub>YYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO: 2) (iii) the HVR-H3 sequence is RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID NO:
3) And (b) the light chain comprises an HVR-Ll, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3, where in addition:
(i) the HVR-Ll sequence is RASQX<sub>4</sub>X5X<sub>6</sub>TX<sub>7</sub>X<sub>8</sub>A (SEQ ID
NO: 8);
(ii) the HVR-L2 sequence is SASX<sub>9</sub>LXi<sub>0</sub>S (SEQ ID NO:
9); and (iii) the HVR-L3 sequence is QQXxxX<sub>12</sub>Xi<sub>3</sub>Xi4PXi5T (SEQ ID NO: 10);
<td></td><td></td><td>where in addition: Χχ is D or</td><td>G;</td><td>X<sub>2</sub> is</td><td>S 0</td><td>L; X<sub>3</sub> its T</td><td> 0</td>
<td>S;</td><td>x<sub>4</sub></td><td>it is D or V; X<sub>5</sub> is V or I; X<sub>6</sub> is S</td><td>or</td><td>N; X<sub>7</sub></td><td>that</td><td>0 F; X<sub>8</sub> is</td><td>V</td>
<td>or:</td><td>L;</td><td>X<sub>9</sub> is F or Τ; X<sub>the</sub> is Y or A; Χχχ</td><td>is</td><td>And, G,</td><td>F 0</td><td>S; X12 is</td><td>L,</td>
<td>and,</td><td>F</td><td>or Q; X13 is Y, N, A, T, G, F or</td><td>I;</td><td colspan="2">X14 is H<sub>r</sub></td><td>V, P, T 0</td><td>i;</td>
<td>Xl5</td><td>is</td><td>; A, W, R, P or T.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td></td><td>In a specific aspect,</td><td>Xi</td><td>is D;</td><td>X<sub>2</sub></td><td>is S and X<sub>3</sub></td><td>is</td>
<td>T.</td><td>AND</td><td>n another aspect, X<sub>4</sub> is D; X<sub>5</sub> is</td><td>V;</td><td>X (5 is</td><td>S; X</td><td><sub>7</sub> that; Xg</td><td>is</td>
<td>V;</td><td>X<sub>9</sub></td><td>is F;</td><td>X10</td><td>is Y</td><td>; Xn is Y; X<sub>12</sub> is L;</td><td>X13</td><td>is</td><td>AND; Xn</td><td>is</td><td>H;</td><td>Xl5</td>
<td>is</td><td>TO.</td><td>Yet</td><td>in</td><td>other</td><td>aspect, Χχ is D; X<sub>2</sub></td><td>is</td><td>S</td><td>and X<sub>3</sub> is</td><td>T,</td><td>X<sub>4</sub></td><td>is</td>
<td>D;</td><td>Xs</td><td>is V;</td><td>Xe</td><td>is S;</td><td>X<sub>7</sub> is A, X<sub>8</sub> is V; X<sub>9</sub></td><td>is</td><td>F;</td><td>Xxo is</td><td>AND;</td><td>Xxx</td><td>is</td>
AND; X12 is L; X<sub>i3</sub> is Y; Χχ<sub>4</sub> is H and X<sub>15</sub> that.
IMPI
M KWCANO INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0014.tif" />
In a further aspect, the region <sup>1</sup> va'riábTé<sup>4</sup>'”' Dé“ 'heavy chain comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between HVRs such as: (HC-FR1) - (HVR-H1) - (HC-FR2) (HVR-H2) - (HC-FR3) - ( HVR-H3) - (HC-FR4) and the light chain variable region comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs such as: (LC-FR1) - (HVR-L1) - (LC-FR2) (HVR-L2 ) - (LC-FR3) - (HVR-L3) - (LC-FR4). In a further aspect, framework sequences are derived from human consensus structure sequences. In yet another aspect, heavy chain framework sequences are derived from the sequence of the Kabat I, II, or III subgroup. In a further aspect, the heavy chain framework sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework sequences is as follows:
HC-FR1 is EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (SEQ ID NO: 4) HC-FR2 is WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO: 5)
HC-FR3 is RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (SEQ ID
NO 6)
HC-FR4 is WGQGTLVTVSA (SEQ ID NO: 7).
In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are derived from a subgroup I sequence,
II, III or IV Kabat kappa. In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are the VL kappa I consensus structure. Even in an additional aspect, one or
<img file="MX356367B_D0015.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0016.tif" />
more of the light chain framework sequences ~ eTTa sTguieñ'té ':'
LC-FRl is DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (SEQ ID NO: 11)
LC-FR2 is WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO: 12)
LC-FR3 is GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID
NO: 13)
LC-FR4 is FGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO: 14).
In still a further specific aspect, the antibody further comprises a human or murine constant region. In still a further aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. Even in a specific additional aspect, the human constant region is IgGl. Still in a further aspect, the murine constant region is IgGl. In still a further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. Still in a further aspect, the murine constant region is IgG2A. Even in a specific additional aspect, the antibody has a reduced or minimal effector function. Even in a specific additional aspect the minimal effector function results from a non-effector Fe mutation or aglycosylation. In a further embodiment, the non-effector Fe mutation is an N297A or D265A / N297A substitution in the constant region.
In yet another embodiment, the invention provides an anti-PD-Ll antibody comprising a heavy chain and light chain variable region sequence, wherein:
<img file="MX356367B_D0017.tif" />
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO OE LA PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL (a) the heavy chain further comprises an HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and an HVR-H3 sequence having a sequence identity of at least 85% for GFTFSDSWIH (SEQ ID NO: 15), AWISPYGGSTYYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO: 16) and RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID NO: 3), respectively, or (b) the light chain further comprises an HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3 sequence having a sequence identity of at least 85% for RASQDVSTAVA (SEQ ID NO: 17), SASFLYS (SEQ ID NO: 18) and QQYLYHPAT (SEQ ID NO: 19), respectively.
In a specific aspect, the sequence identity is 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%. In another aspect, the heavy chain variable region comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between HVRs such as: (HC-FR1) - (HVR-H1) - (HC-FR2) (HVR-H2) - (HC-FR3) - (HVR-H3) - (HC-FR4) and the light chain variable region comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs such as: (LC-FR1) - (HVR-L1) - (LC-FR2) (HVR -L2) - (LC-FR3) - (HVR-L3) - (LC-FR4). Still in one aspect, framework sequences are derived from human consensus structure sequences. In a further aspect, the heavy chain framework sequences are derived from the sequence of the Kabat I, II or III subgroup. In a further aspect, the heavy chain framework sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework sequences
<img file="MX356367B_D0018.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0019.tif" />
INSTITUTO MK1CANO DiU PKÜPIEDAD
INDUSTRIAL is as follows:
HC-FR1 is EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (SEQ ID NO: 4)
HC-FR2 is WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO: 5)
HC-FR3 is RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (SEQ ID
NO 6)
HC-FR4 is WGQGTLVTVSA (SEQ ID NO: 7).
In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa subgroup I, II, III or IV sequence. In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are the VL kappa I consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, one or more of the light chain framework sequences is as follows:
LC-FR1 is DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (SEQ ID NO: 11)
LC-FR2 is WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO: 12)
LC-FR3 is GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID
NO: 13)
LC-FR4 is FGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO: 14).
In still a further specific aspect, the antibody further comprises a human or murine constant region. In still a further aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. Even in a further specific aspect, the human constant region is IgGl. In still a further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. Still in one aspect τ
§
Β and
IM Mexican institute I heard. ?
I> E IA PROPERTY v -V · '., Ι>! Π, Ι \ · ΤΙ <ΙΑΙ. '-ts _—— additional, the murine constant region is IgGXA, ------ Αύ-η— ^ ττ ^ ηη--? · 'Specific additional aspect, the antibody has a reduced or minimal effector function. Even in a specific additional aspect the minimal effector function results from a non-effector Fe mutation or aglycosylation. In a further embodiment, the non-effector Fe mutation is an N297A or D265A / N297A substitution in the constant region.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides an isolated anti-PD-Ll antibody comprising a heavy chain and light chain variable region sequence, wherein:
(a) the heavy chain sequence has a sequence identity of at least 85% for the heavy chain sequence:
EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAASGFTFSDSWIHWVRQAPGKGLEWVAWISPYGGSTYYA
DSVKGRFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCARRHWPGGFDYWGQGTLVTVSA (SEQ ID NO: 20) or (b) the light chain sequence has a sequence identity of at least 85% for the light chain sequence:
DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITCRASQDVSTAVAWYQQKPGKAPKLLIY
SASFLYSGVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYCQQYLYHPATFGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO: 21).
In a specific aspect, the sequence identity is 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%,
<img file="MX356367B_D0020.tif" />
97%, 98%, 99% or 100%. In another aspect, the heavy chain variable region comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between HVRs such as: (HC-FR1) - (HVR-H1) - (HC-FR2) (HVR-H2) - (HC-FR3) - (HVR-H3) - (HC-FR4) and the light chain variable region comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs such as: (LC-FR1) - (HVR-L1) - (LC-FR2) (HVR -L2) - (LC-FR3) - (HVR-L3) - (LC-FR4). In yet another aspect, framework sequences are derived from human consensus structure sequences. In a further aspect, the heavy chain framework sequences are derived from the sequence of the Kabat I, II or III subgroup. In a further aspect, the heavy chain framework sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework sequences is as follows:
HC-FR1 is EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (SEQ ID NO: 4)
HC-FR2 is WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO: 5)
HC-FR3 is RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (SEQ ID
NO 6)
HC-FR4 is WGQGTLVTVSA (SEQ ID NO: 7).
In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa subgroup I, II, III or IV sequence. In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are the VL kappa I consensus structure. Even in an additional aspect, one or
<img file="MX356367B_D0021.tif" />
IMPI rwsnujTo mwicano OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY more than light chain framework sequences is as follows:
LC-FR1 is DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (SEQ ID NO: 11)
LC-FR2 is WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO: 12)
LC-FR3 is GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID
NO: 13)
LC-FR4 is FGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO: 14).
In still a further specific aspect, the antibody further comprises a human or murine constant region. In still a further aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. Even in a specific additional aspect, the human constant region is IgGl. In still a further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. Still in a further aspect, the murine constant region is IgG2A. Even in a specific additional aspect, the antibody has a reduced or minimal effector function. Even in a specific additional aspect, the minimal effector function results from the production in prokaryotic cells. Even in a specific additional aspect, the minimal effector function results from a non-effector Fe mutation or aglycosylation. In a further embodiment, the non-effector Fe mutation is an N297A or D265A / N297A substitution in the constant region.
Still in a further embodiment, the invention provides compositions comprising any of the .Τ *** '...
with
IJML ΡI
INDUJTRIAh 1 at least anti-PD-Ll antibodies in pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle combination.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides an isolated nucleic acid encoding a heavy chain and light chain variable region sequence of an anti-PD-Ll antibody, wherein:
(a) The heavy chain sequence further comprises an HVR-Hl, HVR-H2 and an HVR-H3 sequence having a sequence identity of at least 85% for GFTFSDSWIH (SEQ
ID NO: 15), AWISPYGGSTYYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO: 16), and RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID NO: 3), respectively, or (b) the light chain further comprises an HVR-L1, HVR-L2, and HVR-L3 sequence that has a sequence identity of at least 85% for RASQDVSTAVA (SEQ ID NO: 17), SASFLYS (SEQ ID NO: 18), and QQYLYHPAT (SEQ ID NO: 19), respectively.
In a specific aspect, the sequence identity is 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%. In another aspect, the heavy chain variable region comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs such as: (HC-FR1) - (HVR-Hl) - (HC-FR2) (HVR-H2) - (HC-FR3) - (HVR-H3) - (HC-FR4) and the light chain variable region comprises one or more s framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs such as: (LC-FR1) - (HVR-L1) - (LC-FR2) ( HVR-L2) - (LC-FR3) - (HVR-L3) - (LC-FR4). In yet another aspect, framework sequences are derived from human sequences of a
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0022.tif" />
consensus structure. In an additional aspect, 'heavy chain framework sequences are derived from the sequence of the Kabat I, II or III subgroup. In a further aspect, the heavy chain framework sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework sequences
<td colspan="5">is the next:</td>
<td>HC-FR1</td><td>is</td><td>EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS</td><td>(SEQ ID</td><td>NO: 4)</td>
<td>HC-FR2</td><td>is</td><td>WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO:</td><td> 5)</td><td></td>
<td>HC-FR3</td><td>is</td><td colspan="2">RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR</td><td>(SEQ ID</td>
NO 6)
HC-FR4 is WGQGTLVTVSA (SEQ ID NO: 7).
In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa subgroup I, II, III or IV sequence. In a further aspect, the light chain framework sequences are the VL kappa I consensus structure. Still in a further aspect, one or more of the light chain framework sequences is as follows:
LC-FR1 is DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (SEQ ID NO: 11) LC-FR2 is WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO: 12)
LC-FR3 is GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID
NO: 13)
LC-FR4 is FGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO: 14).
In still a further specific aspect, the antibody further comprises a human constant region or
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0023.tif" />
INDUSTRIAL murine. In still a further aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. Even in a specific additional aspect, the human constant region is IgGl. In still a further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the group consisting of IgGl, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. Still in a further aspect, the murine constant region is IgG2A. Even in a specific additional aspect, the antibody has a reduced or minimal effector function. Still in. a specific additional aspect, the minimal effector function results from the production in prokaryotic cells. Even in a specific additional aspect the minimal effector function results from a non-effector Fc mutation or aglycosylation. In a further aspect, the non-effector Fc mutation is an N297A or D265A / N297A substitution in the constant region.
In a further aspect, the nucleic acid further comprises a vector suitable for expression of the nucleic acid encoding any of the previously described anti-PD-Ll antibodies. In a further aspect, the vector further comprises a host cell suitable for expression of the nucleic acid. Even in a specific aspect, the host cell is a eukaryotic cell or a prokaryotic cell. Still in a further specific aspect, the eukaryotic cell is a mammalian cell, such as a Chinese hamster ovary (CHO).
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0024.tif" />
Still in a further embodiment, - · lar ^ d'nvgiTCTSTr provides a process for producing an anti-PD-Ll antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof, comprising culturing a host cell containing a nucleic acid encoding any of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies or antigen-binding fragment previously described in a form suitable for expression, under conditions suitable for producing such an antibody or fragment, and recovering the antibody or fragment.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides a composition comprising an antiPD-Ll antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof as provided herein and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides an article of manufacture comprising a container containing a therapeutically effective amount of a composition described herein and a packaging insert indicating use for the treatment of a dysfunctional T-cell disorder.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides an article of manufacture comprising any of the above-described anti-PD-Ll compositions in combination with at least one BNCA molecule. In one aspect, the BNCA molecule is an antibody, an antibody fragment of
<img file="MX356367B_D0025.tif" />
binding to antigen, oligopeptide BNCA, RNAi 'B'Ñ ^ Á' or mbré'cúlá 'small BNCA. In another aspect, the B7 negative co-stimulator molecule is selected from the group consisting of: CTLA-4, PD-1, PD-L1, PD-L2, B7.1, B7-H3, and B7-H4.
Still in a further embodiment, the article of manufacture comprises any of the above-described antiPD-L1 compositions in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent. In one aspect, the chemotherapeutic agent is gemcitabine.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides an article of manufacture comprising any of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described above in combination with one or more agonists of a positive costimulatory molecule. In one aspect, a positive costimulatory molecule is a B7 family co-stimulator molecule. In another aspect, the positive co-stimulatory molecule is selected from the group consisting of: CD28, CD80, CD86, ICOS / ICOSL. In yet another aspect, the positive costimulatory molecule is a co-stimulatory molecule of the TNFR family. In a further aspect, the TNFR costimulatory molecule is selected from the group consisting of: OX40 / OX40L, 4-1BB / 4-1BBL, CD27 / CD27L, CD30 / CD30L and HVEM / LIGHT and soluble agonist fragments, constructs, and antibodies of the themselves.
Still in a further embodiment, the invention
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0026.tif" />
provides an article of manufacture ίδήϊ ^ ΥδΜδ 'any of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described above in combination with one or more antibiotics. In one aspect, the antibiotic is selected from the group consisting of an anti-viral agent, an anti-bacterial agent, an anti-fungal agent, an anti-protozoal agent.
In another aspect, the antiviral agent is selected from the group consisting of reverse transcriptase inhibitors, protease inhibitors, integrase inhibitors, entry or fusion inhibitors, maturation inhibitors, viral release inhibitors, immune response enhancers, synergistic enhancers. antivirals, vaccines, liver agonists, and herbal therapies. In yet another aspect, the combination comprises one or more categories of antiviral agents.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides an article of manufacture comprising any of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described above in combination with one or more vaccines.
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides a method of improving T cell function which comprises administering an effective amount of any of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies or compositions described above. In one aspect, the anti-PD-Ll antibody or composition makes T cells dysfunctional, not
<img file="MX356367B_D0027.tif" />
ΙΜΡΓ dysfunctional. „
In still a further embodiment, the invention provides a method of treating a dysfunctional T-cell disorder comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of any of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies or compositions described above. In a specific aspect, the dysfunctional T-cell disorder is infection or tumor immunity. In another aspect the infection is acute or chronic. In another aspect, the chronic infection is persistent, latent, or slow. In yet another aspect, chronic infection results from a pathogen selected from the group consisting of bacteria, viruses, fungi, and protozoa. In a further aspect, the level of the pathogen in the host is reduced. Still in a further aspect, the method further comprises treatment with a vaccine. Still in a further aspect, the method further comprises antibiotic treatment. In a further aspect, the pathogen is a bacterium, and the method further comprises administering an antibacterial agent. In a further aspect, the bacteria is selected from the group consisting of: Mycobacterium spp., Salmonella spp., Listeria spp. , Streptococcus spp., Haemophilus spp., Neisseria spp. , klebsiella spp., Borrelia spp., Bacterioides fragillis, Treponema spp., and Helicobacter pylori. In a further aspect, the pathogen is a virus, and the method comprises
<img file="MX356367B_D0028.tif" />
in addition the administration of an antiviral agent. In a further aspect, the virus is selected from the group consisting of: hepatitis B, C, herpes simplex virus I and II, human immunodeficiency virus I and II, cytomegalovirus, Eppstein Barr virus, human papilloma virus, virus I and II human lymphotrophic T, varicalla zoster. In a further aspect, the pathogen is a fungus, and the method further comprises administering an anti-fungal agent. In a further aspect, the disorder is selected from the group consisting of: aspergillosis, albicans, coccidioiodmicosis, paracoccidioiomycosis, microsporidiosis. In a further aspect, the pathogen is a protozoan and the method further comprises administering an antiprotozoal agent. In a further aspect, the disorder is selected from the group consisting of: leishmaniasis, (ie, malaria), cryptosporidiosis, trypanosomiasis and helminth infections, blastomycosis, candidiasis immitis, histoplasmosis, plasmodiosis toxoplasmosis, including those resulting from trematodes (eg
schistosomiasis), cestodes (eg, eg, echinococcosis) and nematodes (eg, trichinosis, ascariasis, filariasis, and strongyloodiosis).
Still in a further aspect, the dysfunctional T cell disorder is tumor immunity. Still in a further aspect, the PD-L1 antibody or composition is
MDUCANO INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
XDD5TRIAL combines with a treatment regimen that further comprises a traditional therapy selected from the group consisting of radiation therapy, chemotherapy, targeted therapy, immunotherapy, hormonal therapy, angiogenesis inhibition, and palliative care. In a further specific aspect, the chemotherapy treatment is selected from the group consisting of: gemcitabine, cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, paclitaxel, cisplatin. Still in a specific additional aspect, tumor immunity results from a cancer selected from the group consisting of: breast, lung, colon, ovarian, melanoma, bladder, kidney, liver, salivary, stomach cancer, gliomas, thyroid, thymic, epithelial , head and neck, gastric and pancreatic cancers.
Brief Description of the Drawings Figure 1 is a graphic illustration representing the co-stimulation of T cells by means of the B7 family of cell surface molecules.
Figure 2 is a schematic showing the experimental design of the PMEL / B16 T-cell stimulation assay.
Figure 3 is a bar graph showing the effect of an anti-PD-Ll antibody on antigen-specific T cell function through enhanced production of IFN-γ in PMEL CD8 + T cells in response to the peptide of gplOO melanocyte. Both the percentage of cells
<img file="MX356367B_D0029.tif" />
ΙΜΡΙ
M.'MiCANO INSTITUTE
CD8 + T producing IFN-γ as their IFN-γ production levels are increased during stimulation in the presence of the anti-PD-Ll antibody.
Figure 4 is a bar graph showing the effect of anti-PD-Ll antibody on antigen-specific T cell function through enhancement in proliferation of Ova-specific CD4 + T cells by anti-PD-antibody. Ll YW243.55.S1 in secondary stimulation with 20 A20 cells driven by Ova / APCs mPD-Ll.
Figure 5 is a series of FACS diagrams showing improvement in proliferation of human CD8 T cells by anti-PD-Ll antibody YW243.55.S1 in a mixed lymphocyte reaction. The percentage of cells that proliferate is also reported, measured by dilution in intensity of CFSE.
Figure 6 is a schematic of the experimental design of treating chronic LCMV with the chimeric form of the anti-PD-Ll antibody YW243.55.S70. The arrows designate the timing of the 6 doses of anti-PD-Ll started 14 days after infection with 2 x 10<sup>5</sup> of pfu Clone 13 LCMV.
Figures 7A and 7B are graphs showing the enhanced effector function of CD8 in ex vivo cells after in vivo treatment of chronic LCMV infection by the anti-PD-Ll antibody YW243.55.S70. Blocking
<img file="MX356367B_D0030.tif" />
PD-Ll by YW243.55.S70 increased CD8 + T cell cC granulation (measured by the increase in surface CD107A) (Figure 7A) and increased the% of IFN-gamma producing cells in response to the LCMV gp33 peptide ( Figure 7B). The frequency of gp33-specific cells is revealed by staining with gp33 H2Db pentamers.
Figures 8A and 8B show the reduction in blood and tissue LCMV titers in chronic LCMV infection after in vivo treatment with anti-PD-Ll antibody. In Figure 8A, the viral titers of the various tissues indicated are analyzed on days 21 and 28, one and two weeks after antibody treatment, respectively. In Figure 8B, serum viral titers are analyzed on days 0, 7, 14, 21, and 28, with LCMV inoculation occurring on day 0 and treatment beginning on day 14.
Figure 9A shows a significant reduction in the growth of the MC38 colon carcinoma tumor as a result of the application of the anti-PD-Ll antibody after the therapeutic treatment of established tumors (the treatment started on day 14, when the tumor was 250 mm<sup>3</sup>). Figure 9B is a histogram showing the surface levels of PD-Ll expression in MC38.Ova cells in cell culture, measured by flow cytometry. PD-L2
<img file="MX356367B_D0031.tif" />
IMPI
INSTITUTO MBUCAN1 ->
DF. THE PROMISE L · INDUSTRY!
it is not expressed by MC38.Ova cells. __
Figure 10 is a graph showing the effect of PD-Ll blocking treatment alone and in combination with either anti-VEGF or gemcitabine on the growth of MC38.Ova tumors in C57BL / 6 mice.
Figures 11A-B are the light chain variable region sequences, respectively, of 11 anti-PD-Ll antibodies identified by phage display. The shaded bars show the CDRs with various definitions, while the boxed areas show the extent of the HVRs.
Detailed Description of the Preferred Modality
All references mentioned herein are specifically incorporated by reference.
General techniques.
The practice of the present invention will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of molecular biology (including recombinant techniques), microbiology, cell biology, biochemistry, and immunology, which are within the skill of the art. Such techniques are fully explained in the literature, such as, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, second edition (Sambrook et al., 1989); Oligonucleotide Synthesis (MJ Gaite d., 1984); Animal Cell Culture
<img file="MX356367B_D0032.tif" />
(Animal Cell Culture) (RI Freshney ed., 1987); Methods in Enzymology (Academic Press, Inc.); Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (FM Ausubel et al., Eds., 1987, and periodic updates); PCR: The Polymerase Chain Reaction (Mullís et al., Ed., 1994); A Practical Guide to Molecular
Cloning (A Practical Guide to Molecular Cloning) (Perbal Bernard V., 1988); Phage Display: A Laboratory Manual (Barbas et al., 2001).
I. Immunity to the Guest
A. Lymphocyte development and activation
The two main types of lymphocytes in humans are T (derived from the thymus) and B (derived from bone marrow). These cells are derived from hematopoietic precursor cells in the bone marrow and in the fetal liver that have entered the path of lymphoid development. The progeny of these precursor cells follow different pathways to mature in either Β or T lymphocytes. Development in human B lymphocytes occurs entirely within the bone marrow. T cells, on the other hand, develop from immature precursors that leave the marrow and travel through the bloodstream to the thymus, where they proliferate and differentiate into T lymphocytes.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0033.tif" />
ripe.
The mature lymphocytes emerging from the thymus or bone marrow are in a still or resting state, ie, they are mitotically inactive. When dispersed into the blood stream, these untreated or virgin lymphocytes travel to various secondary or peripheral lymphoid organs, such as the spleen, lymph nodes, or tonsils. Most virgin lymphocytes have an inherently short life span and die within a few days after leaving the marrow or thymus. However, if such cells receive signals indicating the presence of an antigen, they can be activated and undergo successive rounds of cell division. Some of the resulting progeny cells are then reverted to the resting state to become memory B cells and T cells, essentially preparing for the next encounter with the stimulating allergen. The other progeny of activated virgin lymphocytes are effector cells that survive only a few days, but carry out specific defensive activities.
Lymphocyte activation refers to a series of ordered events through which a resting lymphocyte passes as it is stimulated to divide and produce progeny, some of which become effector cells. A total response includes both induction of
<img file="MX356367B_D0034.tif" />
cell proliferation (mitogenesis) as expression cTe immunological functions. Lymphocytes are inactivated when specific ligands bind to receptors on their surfaces. Ligands are different for T cells and B cells, but the resulting intracellular physiological mechanisms are similar.
Some external antigens by themselves can induce lymphocyte activation, especially large polymeric antigens that cross-link surface immunoglobulins in B cells, or other glycoproteins in T cells. However, most antigens are not polymeric and even direct binding to B cells in large numbers fail to result in activation. These more common antigens activate B cells when they are costimulated with nearby activated helper T cells.
Such stimulation can occur from lymphosines secreted by the T cell, but is transmitted more efficiently by direct contact of the B cell with T cell surface proteins that interact with certain B cell surface receptors to generate a secondary signal.
B. T cells
The but, in their external by T lymphocytes do not express immunoglobulins, instead, they detect the presence of substances called surface protein medium
<img file="MX356367B_D0035.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0036.tif" />
antigens either through direct contact or through the influence of the activity of other immune cells. Along with macrophages, T cells are of the primary cell type involved in cell mediated immunity.
Unlike B cells, T cells can detect external substances only in specific contexts. In particular, T lymphocytes will recognize an external protein only if it first breaks down into small peptides that then unfold on the surface of a second host cell, called an antigen presenting cell (APC). Many types of host cells can present antigens under some conditions, but certain types are more specifically adapted for this purpose and are particularly important in controlling the activity of T cells, including macrophages and other B cells. Antigen presentation depends on part of the specific proteins, called major histocompatibility complex (MHC) proteins, on the surface of the cells that appear. Thus, to stimulate cell-mediated immunity, external peptides must be presented to T cells in combination with MHC peptides, and this combination must be recognized by a T-cell receptor.
There are two significant subsets of cells
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0037.tif" />
T: cytotoxic T lymphocytes (T cells<sub>c</sub> or CTLs) and cells'5 — T auxiliaries (T<sub>H</sub>) that can be approximately identified based on the cell surface expression of the CD8 and CD4 marker. T cells<sub>c</sub> they are important in viral defense and can directly destroy viruses by recognizing certain viral peptides expressed from the cell surface. T cells<sub>H</sub> they promote the proliferation, maturation, and immune function of other cell types, eg, the secretion of lymphosine to control the activities of B cells, macrophages, and cytotoxic T cells. Both virgin and memory T lymphocytes ordinarily remain in the resting state and in this state do not exhibit significant helper or cytotoxic activity. When activated, these cells undergo several rounds of mitotic division to produce daughter cells. Some of these daughter cells return to the resting state like memory cells, but others become effector cells that actively express helper or cytotoxic activity. These daughter cells resemble their progenitors: CD4 + cells can only produce CD4 + progeny, while CD8 + cells produce only CD8 + progeny. Effector T cells express cell surface markers that are not expressed on resting T cells, such as CD25, CD28, CD29, CD40L, transfer receptors, and MHC class II proteins. When stimuli are removed from
<img file="MX356367B_D0038.tif" />
activation, cytotoxic or helper activity gradually decreases over a period of several days as effector cells either die or revert to the resting state.
Similar to B cell activation, T cell responses to most antigens also require two types of simultaneous stimuli. The first is the antigen that, if properly deployed by MHC proteins in an antigen-presenting cell, can be recognized and linked by T-cell receptors. Although this MHC-antigen complex sends a signal into the cell, it is commonly insufficient to result in T cell activation. Total activation, such as occurs with helper T cells, requires co -stimulation with other specific ligands called co-stimulators that are expressed on the surface of the cell that presents the antigen. Activation of a cytotoxic T cell, on the other hand, generally requires IL-2, a cytosine secreted by activated helper T cells.
C. The Immune Response
The three primary functional properties of the mammalian immune system that distinguish it from the body's other defenses include: (1) specificity - the ability to recognize and respond or not respond
<img file="MX356367B_D0039.tif" />
individually among a vast number of target molecules, (2) discrimination - the ability to determine autonomous from non-autonomous in order to coexist peacefully with all the myriad proteins and other organic material, and still respond vigorously against external material introduced into the body, and (3) memory - the ability to shape yourself by experience such that subsequent encounters with a particular external pathogen will elicit a more rapid and vigorous response than that presented in the initial encounter. When one or more of these functions are thwarted, a pathological condition results.
Virgin lymphocytes are continuously released from the primary lymphoid organs to the periphery, each carrying surface receptors that allow binding to the antigen. Binding to the antigen in B cells is mediated through immunoglobulins bound to the surface, whereas in T cells it is mediated by T cell receptors. When virgin lymphocytes are activated, they proliferate, producing daughter cells that can then undergo additional activation and proliferation cycles. The speed and intensity of response of a given antigen is largely determined by clonal selection: the larger the population of daughter cells or clones specific to a particular antigen, the greater the number of cells that can
<img file="MX356367B_D0040.tif" />
recognizing and participating in the immune response Each immune response is a complex and intricately regulated sequence of events that involves various types of cells. It is activated when an immunogen enters the body and finds a specialized class of cells called antigen presenting cells (APCs). These APCs capture a small amount of the immunogen and display it in a way that can be recognized by antigen-specific helper T cells. The helper T cells are then activated and, in turn, promote the activation of other classes of lymphocytes, such as B cells or cytotoxic T cells. The activated lymphocytes then proliferate and carry out specific effector functions. At each stage in this process, lymphocytes and APCs communicate with each other through direct contact or by secreting regulatory cytosines.
Exogenous antigens that are captured by an APC undergo a series of alterations called antigen processing. Such processing, especially of proteinaceous immunogens involves denaturation and partial proteolytic digestions, such that the immunogen breaks down into short peptides. A limited number of the resulting peptides are then non-covalently associated with MHC class II proteins and transported to the surface of the APC, a process known as presentation
<img file="MX356367B_D0041.tif" />
of the antigen. A CD4 + helper T cell that contacts an APC can be activated, but will only do so if it expresses a T-cell receptor protein that can recognize and bind to the particular peptide-MHC complex presented by the APC.
Auxiliary T cells (T<sub>H</sub>) are the main orchestrators of the immune response because they are necessary for the activation of the other two lymphatic effector cells: cytotoxic T cells (Te) and plasma cells that secrete antibody. T activation<sub>H</sub> it occurs early in an immune response and requires at least two signals. One signal is provided by binding the T cell antigen receptor to the peptide-MHC antigenic complex on the surface of the APC that is transmitted through the CD3 protein complex, while the second co-stimulatory signal through the APC, it is believed to result from the binding of a separate protein that transmits the signal on the surface of the T cell with a specific ligand in the APC. One such known interaction is CD28 T-cell protein and that of the APC family of surface proteins known as B7. Other pairs of surface proteins can also mediate co-stimulation. The co-stimulation process is described in greater detail subsequently. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention are believed to improve co-stimulation through
OF INDUSTRY PROPERTY!
antagonism of a negative co-stimulatory signal provided by signaling through PD-L1.
Together, the two signals induce the helper T cell to begin secreting cytosine interleukin-2 (IL-2) and also to begin to express specific high-affinity IL-2 receptors on its surface. IL-2 is a highly potent mitogenic factor for T lymphocytes and is essential for the proliferative response of activated T cells. The effect of IL-2 on the cell from which it is secreted is a phenomenon known as the autocrine effect.
Furthermore, it has been shown that even if a T cell has received both signals, it will not proliferate if its own surface IL-2 receptors are blocked. IL-2 can also act on cells in close proximity, in a so-called paracrine effect. This effect is especially important for activating Te cells, which are generally not sufficient to stimulate their own. In addition to IL-2, T cells<sub>H</sub> Activated cells secrete other cytosines and promote the growth, differentiation, and functions of B cells, macrophages, and other cell types.
The contact between an APC and a T cell<sub>H</sub> they produce IL-2 proliferation.
Antigen-specific also has effects on APC - of which one of the most important is IL1 release. This cytosine is believed to act in an autocrine manner.
<img file="MX356367B_D0042.tif" />
to increase the surface expression of MHC class II proteins and various adhesion molecules thereby strengthening T cell binding<sub>H</sub> and improving the presentation of the antigen. At the same time, IL-1 works paracrinically in the T cell.<sub>H</sub> to promote IL-2 secretion and IL-2 receptor expression.
During T cell activation<sub>H</sub> In the manner previously described, some B cells may also have coupled to the immunogen through their antigen receptors, which are membrane-bound forms of the antibodies that they will later secrete. Unlike T cells, B cells recognize an immunogen in its unprocessed free form. Binding to the specific antigen provides one type of signal that can lead to activation of B cell. A second type is provided by T cells.<sub>H</sub> activated, which express proteins that help activate the B cell by binding to non-immunoglobulin receptors on its surface. These signals derived from T<sub>H</sub>, which act on any B cell regardless of its antigen specificity, are known as auxiliary factors. These auxiliary factors include IL-2, IL-4, and IL-6. However, aid is most efficiently achieved through cell-to-cell contact, which allows proteins on the surface of T cell to come in direct contact with those in cell B.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0043.tif" />
A more effective form of contact mediated support resents when a protein called CD40 ligand (CD40L), which is expressed in T cells<sub>H</sub> only after these are activated does it bind to a protein called CD40 in B cells. In a process known as activation by placement, contact with an activated B cell may even be sufficient to activate resting B cells, although their immunoglobulins from surface have not been coupled to the antigen.
T lymphocytes<sub>c</sub> They work to eradicate cells that express external antigens on their surfaces, such as virus-infected host cells. Most T cells<sub>c</sub> they express CD8 more than CD4 and therefore recognize antigens in association with MHC class I rather than class II proteins. When a somatic cell is infected by a virus, some immunogenic viral proteins may undergo processing within the cell, and the resulting peptides may then appear as surface complexes with MHC class I molecules. These peptide-MHC complexes can then be recognized by the T cell receptor of an antigen-specific clone, providing one of the two signals necessary for T cell activation.<sub>c</sub>. This first signal alone - induces high affinity IL-2 receptors on the T cell<sub>c</sub>. The second signal is formed by IL-2 secreted from a T lymphocyte<sub>H</sub> activated nearby. To the
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0044.tif" />
receive both signals, the T cell<sub>c</sub> a & fc-iva cytotoxic damage, which allows it to destroy the cell to which it is linked, as well as many other cells that contain the same class I peptide-MHC complexes. In some cases, destruction occurs because the T<sub>c </sub>releases specific toxins on the target cell; in others, the T<sub>c</sub> induces the target cell to commit suicide by apoptosis. The T cell<sub>c</sub> activated it also proliferates, giving rise to T cells<sub>c</sub> additional with the same specificity to the antigen.
D. Co-stimulation by means of the Immunoglobulin Superfamily:
one. B7.1 / B7.2 - CD28 / CTLA-4
Perhaps the best characterized T-cell co-stimulatory pathway is that indicated by B7.1 (CD80) /B7.2 (CD86) - CD28 / CTLA-4 (CD152). This signaling path is critical for activation and tolerance of T. Karandikar et al., J. Neuroimmunol. Cells, 89: 10-18 (1998); Oosterwegal et al., Curr. Opin. Immunol.,
11: 294-300 (1999); Solomon et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol.,
19: 225-252 (2001); Sansom, DM Immunol., 101: 169-177 (2000);
Chambers et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol., 19: 565-592 (2001).
B7.1 [Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med., 174: 625-631 (1991); Freeman et al., J. Immunol. 137: 3260-3267 (1987);
Yokochi et al., J. Immunol. 128: 823-827 (1982)] and B7.2
<img file="MX356367B_D0045.tif" />
IMPI [Freeman et al., Science 262: 909-911 (1993); Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med., 178: 2185-2192 (1993); Azuma et al., Nature 366: 76.79 (1993)] have double specificity for both stimulatory receptors CD28 and CTLA-4. Aruffo et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 84: 8573-8577 (1987); Gross et al., J. Immunol., 144: 3201-3210 (1990). CD28 is constitutively expressed on the surface of T cells [Gross et al., J. Immunol., 149: 380-388 (1992)], while CTLA-4, the receptor with the highest affinity, has an expression that is rapidly up-regulated after activation of the T cell. Peach et al., J . Exp. Med., 180: 2049-2058 (1994); Linsley et al., J. Exp. Med., 176: 1595-1604 (1992); Kinsley et al., Immunity 1: 793-801 (1994); Linsley et al., Immunity 4: 535-543 (1996). Most APC populations express B7.2 constitutively at low levels, which is rapidly up-regulated, while B7.1 is expressed inducibly later after activation. Freeman et al., Science 262: 909-911 (1993); Hathcock et al., J. Exp. Med. 180: 631-640 (1994). Previous B7.2 expression and mouse knock-out data suggest that B7.2 is the most important costimulatory molecule for initiating immune responses, but otherwise the two molecules have extensively overlapping functions. McAdam et al., Immuno.
Rev. 165: 631-640 (1994).
CD28 interacts with B7.1 and B7.2 to transmit a
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0046.tif" />
<td colspan="3">al., Annu. Rev.</td>
<td>et</td><td>al., Cell 96:</td><td> 1-</td>
<td>the</td><td>signaling</td><td>of</td>
<td>The</td><td>signaling</td><td>of</td>
signal that is synergized with the TCR signal for 'proiñóvér' Ta<sup>; </sup>T. Lenschow cell activation
Immunol., 165: 233-258 (1996); Lanzavecch:
(1999) . In the absence of a TCR signal
CD28 has no physiological significance. CD28 signaling regulates the threshold for T cell activation and significantly decreases the number of TCR couplings required for T cell activation. Viola et al., Science 273: 104-106 (1996). CD28 activation supports T cell responses by promoting T cell survival, thus allowing cytosines to initiate clonal expansion and differentiation of T cells. Thompson et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 86: 1333-1337 (1989); Lucas et al., J. Immunol., 154: 5757-5768 (1995);
Shahinian et al., Science 261: 609-612 (1993); Sperling et al., J. Immunol., 157: 3909-3917 (1996); Boise et al.,
Immunity 3: 87-98 (1995). CD28 also optimizes the responses of previously activated cells, promoting the production of interleukin 2 (IL-2) and the survival of T cells. Although some responses are independent of CD28, it is not yet clear if this independence of co-stimulation results of strong antigenic stimuli or is the result of dependence on other unknown co-stimulatory pathways.
Activation of CTLA-4 causes a negative signal
<img file="MX356367B_D0047.tif" />
it inhibits TCR and CD28 mediated signal transduction. CTLA-4 coupling results in inhibition of IL-2 synthesis and progression through the cell cycle and termination of T cell responses. Walunas et al., Immunity 1: 405-413 (1994 ); Walunas et al., J. Exp. Med., 183: 2541-2550 (1996); Krummel et al., J. Exp. Med., 182: 459-466 (1995); Brunner et al., J. Immunol., 162: 58135820 (1999); Greenwald et al., Immunity 14: 145-155 (2001). CTLA-4 plays an important role in regulating T cell responses, including peripheral T cell tolerance. Although it is unclear how signaling through CTLA-4 and CD28 is coordinated, some possibilities include competing CD28 for binding to B7, by inducing immunosuppressive cytosines, direct antagonism of CD28 signaling and / or TCR-mediated signaling.
As a result, CTLA-4 antagonism (eg, anti-CTLA antagonist antibodies) and / or B7.1 / B7.2 / CD28 agonism may be useful in improving the immune response in the treatment of infection (eg, acute and chronic ) and tumor immunity.
2. ICOS / ICOSL signaling:
Another path of interaction between APCs and T cells is presented through ICOS (CD278) and ICOSL (B7-H2, CD275). ICOS / ICOSL signage promotes
<img file="MX356367B_D0048.tif" />
differentiation and effector function of helper T cell and is particularly important for the production of interleukin-10 (IL-10), but it plays a more modest role in regulating T cell expansion and in the production of IL- 2 including regulatory T cells, T cell tolerance and autoimmunity.
In contrast to CD28, ICOS is not constitutively expressed in untreated T cells, but is rapidly induced in T cells after TCR coupling. Hutloff et al., Nature 397: 263-266 (1999); Yoshinaga et al., Nature 402: 827-832 (1999); Beier et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 30: 3707-3717 (2000); Coyle et al., Immunity 13: 95-105 (2000); Mages et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 30: 1040-1047 (2000); McAdam et al., J. Immunol. 165: 5035-5040 (2000). This suggests that ICOS provides a co-stimulatory signal to activated T cells. Although co-stimulation by CD28 improves ICOS expression, and ICOS expression is reduced in the absence of B7.1 and B7.2, ICOS is not entirely dependent on CD28 signals. McAdam et al., J. Immunol., 165: 5035-5040 (2000); Aicher et al., J. Immunol., 164: 4689-4696 (2000); Kopf et al., J. Exp. Med. 192: 53-61 (2000). ICOS is up-regulated in both type 1 and 2 auxiliary T cells (T<sub>H</sub>one and Th2) during the initial differentiation phase, but levels remain high in T cells<sub>h</sub>2 and decrease in T cells<sub>H</sub>one The expression pattern of
<img file="MX356367B_D0049.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0050.tif" />
ICOS on T cells at the terminal centers, (Beier et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 30: 3707-3717 (2000); Mages et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 30: 1040-1047 (2000 )), indicates a role for ICOS in aiding T cells for B cells. Functional studies have confirmed this and even ICOS expression has been confirmed in rat B cells, although not in other species. Tezuka et al., Biochem. Biophys. Beef. Commun., 276: 335-345 (2000); McAdam et al., Nature 409; 102105 (2001); Dong et al., Nature 409: 97-101 (2001); Dong et al., J. Immunol., 166: 3659-3662 (2001); Tafuri et al.,
Nature 409: 105-109 (2001).
One role of ICOS / ICOSL signaling appears to be to regulate cytosine production (eg, IL-4, IL3) by recently activated as well as effector T cells. Hutloff et al., Nature 397: 263-266 (1999); Coyle et al., Immunity 13: 95-105 (2000); Dong et al., Nature 409: 97-101 (2001). In studies of allergic air disease, the effector function of T<sub>H</sub>2, but not the differentiation of T<sub>H</sub>2, It is provided by ICOS blocking. Tesciuba et al., J.
Immunol., 167: 1996-2003 (2001). Indicating that ICOS can also regulate the effector function of T<sub>H</sub>1, the production of cytosines both T<sub>H</sub>one like T<sub>H</sub>2 can be suppressed by ICOS-Ig fusion protein upon in vitro reactivation. Kopf et al., J. Exp. Med., 192: 53-61 (2000).
Another potential role for ICOS concerns
<img file="MX356367B_D0051.tif" />
hold T's responses<sub>H</sub>one. In an experimental model of 'autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) for multiple sclerosis, a disease of T<sub>H</sub>one mediated by myelin-specific CD4 + T cells, shows that the result of ICOS blockade may be different when co-stimulation is blocked during T-cell preparation, then during the EAE effector phase. Dong et al., Nature 409: 97-101 (2001); Rottman et al., Nature Immunol., 2: 605-611 (2001); Sporici et al., Clin. Immunol., 100: 277-288 (2001). EAE induced by myelin oligodendrocyte glycoprotein (MOG) is greatly exacerbated in ICOS knockout mice<sup>-1-</sup>, with increased production of IFN-γ compared to wild type. Similarly, ICOS blockade during EAE induction exacerbated the disease also resulting in increased IFN-γ production. Consequently, blocking ICOS during preparation leads to a polarization of the T response.<sub>H</sub>one. Interestingly, the preparation of myelin-specific TCR transgenic T cells in vitro in the presence of ICOS-Ig inhibited their ability to induce EAE, in stark contrast to the results of ICOS-Ig blocking observed in vivo. Sporici et al., Supra. The difference between the opposite results in vitro and in vivo is not clear, but could reflect a role of ICOS in regulatory T cells that produce IL-10, as well as in effector T cells during blockade.
<img file="MX356367B_D0052.tif" />
IMPI of ICOS in vivo. Co-stimulation through IL-10 is. very effective in improving IL-10 production and is more effective than co-stimulation through CD28. Hutloff et al., Supra. The regulatory circuit for IL-10, IL12 is critical in the regulation of EAE because IL-10 but not IL-4 - / - mice develop exacerbated EAE. Segal et al., J. Exp. Med., 187: 537-546 (1998).
Still another potential role for ICOS is the enhancement of the humoral responses of T cell-dependent B cells. ICOS mice<sup>_/_</sup> and ICOSL<sup>_/</sup>~ have shown that ICOS is required for T cell dependent B cell responses. Hutloff et al., Nature 397: 263-66 (1999); Chapoval et al., Nat. Immunol., 2: 269-74 (2001); Coyle et al., Immunity 13: 95-105 (2000); MaAdam et al., Nature 409: 102-5 (2001); Tafuri et al., Nature 409: 105-9 (2001); Suh et al., Nat. Immunol., 4: 899-906 (2003). ICOS mice<sup>_/_</sup> they also show reduced germ centers in response to primary immunization, profound defects in germ center formation in response to secondary challenge, and defects in IgG class exchange. The role of ICOS in T: B cell interaction was further validated by identifying the homozygous loss of ICOS in T cells in patients with adult-onset common variable immunodeficiency disease.
Grimbacher et al., Nat. Immunol., 4: 261-68 (2003).
ΪΜΡΙ 'X
MEXICAN INSTITUTE \,
OF FUCFlEDAD V • NDUSTÍUAl.
As a result, ICOS / ICOSL agonism (eg, anti-ICOS agonist antibodies, soluble ICOS / ICOSL ligand) may be useful in improving the immune response in the treatment of infection (eg, acute and chronic) and / or tumor immunity .
3. PD-1 trajectory:
Important regulatory T cell activation of the negative co-stimulatory signal is provided by programmed death receptor 1 (PD-1) (CD279) and its ligand binding partners PD-L1 (B7-H1, CD274) and PD -L2 (B7-DC,
CD273). The negative regulatory role of PD-1 was revealed by PD-1 knockouts (Pdcdl '<sup>7</sup>') who are prone to autoimmunity. Nishimura et al., Immunity 11: 141-51 (1999); Nishimura et al., Science 291: 319-22 (2001). PD-1 is related to CD28 and CTLA-4, but lacks the proximal membrane cysteine that allows homodimerization. The PD-1 cytoplasmic domain contains an inhibitory motif based on the immunoreceptor tyrosine (ITIM, V / IxYxxL / V). PD-1 binds only to PD-L1 and PD-L2. Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med., 192: 1-9 (2000); Dong et al., Nature Med. 5: 13651369 (1999); Latchman et al., Nature Immunol., 2: 261-268 (2001); Tseng et al., J. Exp. Med., 193: 839-846 (2001).
PD-1 can be expressed in T cells, B cells, natural killer T cells, activated monocytes, and dendritic cells (DCs). PD-1 is expressed by cells
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0053.tif" />
CD4 + and CD8 + T, B cells and activated human myeloid cells, but not by non-stimulated ones. This is taken in contrast to the more restricted expression of CD28 and CTLA-4. Nishimura et al., Int. Immunol., 8: 773-80 (1996); Boettlet et al., J. Virol. 80: 3532-40 (2006). There are at least 4 PD-1 variants that have been cloned from activated human T cells, including transcripts that lack (i) exon 2, (ii) exon 3, (iii) exons 2 and 3, or (iv) exons. 2 a
Four. Nielsen et al., Cell. Immunol., 235: 109-16 (2005). With the exception of PD-lAex3, all variants are expressed at similar levels as full-length PD-1 in resting peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs). The expression of all variants is significantly induced to activate human T cells with anti-CD3 and antiCD28. The PD-lAex3 variant lacks a transmembrane domain and resembles soluble CTLA-4, which plays an important role in autoimmunity. Ueda et al., Nature 432: 506-11 (2003). This variant is enriched in synovial fluid and serum from patients with rheumatoid arthritis. Wan et al., J. Immunol ·., 177: 8844-50 (2006).
The two PD-1 ligands differ in their expression patterns. PD-Ll is constitutively expressed in mouse T and B cells, CDs, macrophages, mesenchymal precursor cells, and bone marrow-derived mast cells. Yamazaki et al., J. Immunol., 169: 5538-45 (2002). PD-Ll is
<img file="MX356367B_D0054.tif" />
ΙΜΡϊ.
INSTITUTE ΜβϋόΑΝΟ V, οε the 'ofiedaij expresses in a wide range of non-TeinaTopoyeTTCfa'S' cells · (eg, cornea, lung, vascular epithelium, non-parenchymal stem cells, pancreatic islets, placenta syncytiotrophoblasts, etc. ) [Keir et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol., 26: 677-704 (2008)], and is up-regulated in a number of cell types after activation. Both type I and type II interferons (IFNs) upregulate PD-L1, Eppihimer et al., Microcirculation 9: 133-45 (2002);
Schreiner et al., J. Neuroimmunol., 155: 172-82 (2004). PD-L1 expression in cell lines decreases when MyD88, TRAF6 and MEK are inhibited. Liu et al., Blood 110: 296-304 (2007). JAK2 has also been implicated in the induction of PD-L1. Lee et al., FEBS Lett., 580: 755-62 (2006); Liu et al., Blood 110: 296-304 (2007). Loss of inhibition of the phosphatase and tensin homolog (PTEN), a cellular phosphatase that changed the signaling of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (PI3K) and Akt, increased post-transcriptional PD-L1 expression in cancers. Parsa et al., Nat. Med. 13: 8488 (2007).
PD-L2 expression is more restricted than PD-L1. PD-L2 is inducibly expressed in DCs, macrophages, and bone marrow-derived mast cells. PD-L2 is also expressed in approximately one-half to two-thirds of resting peripheral B1 cells, but not in
<img file="MX356367B_D0055.tif" />
ΪΜΡΙ
INSTITUTE M £ BCAMO Say INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY conventional Β B2 cells. Zhong et al., Eiür. “'¿Rt Immunol., 37: 2405-10 (2007). Bl PD-L2 + cells bind to phosphatidylcholine and may be important for innate immune responses against bacterial antigens. The induction of PD-L2 by IFN-γ is partially dependent on NF-κΒ. Liang et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 33: 2706-16 (2003). PD-L2 can also be induced in monocytes and macrophages by GM-CF, IL4 and IFN-γ. Yamazaki et al., J. Immunol., 169: 5538-45 (2Ü02); Loke et al., PNAS 100: 5336-41 (2003).
PD-1 signaling typically has a greater effect on cytosine production than on cell proliferation, with significant effects on IFNy, TNF-α, and IL-2 production. Inhibitory signaling mediated by PD-1 also depends on the intensity of TCR signaling, with increased inhibition delivered at low levels of TCR stimulation. This reduction can be overcome by co-stimulation through CD28 [Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med. 192: 1027-34 (2000)] or through the presence of IL-2 [Carter et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 32: 634-43 (2002)].
Evidence is placed that signaling through PD-L1 and PD-L2 can be bidirectional. That is, in addition to modifying TCR or BCR signaling, the signaling can also be delivered back to cells expressing PD-Ll and PD-L2. Although it was not found that treating dendritic cells with a
<img file="MX356367B_D0056.tif" />
Naturally human anti-PD-L2 antibody isolated from a patient with Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia would sub-regulate the MHC II or B7 co-stimulatory molecules, such cells produced increased amounts of pro-inflammatory cytosines, particularly TNF-α and IL-6, and stimulated the proliferation of T. cells. Nguyen et al., J. Exp. Med. 196: 1393-98 (2002). Treatment of mice with this antibody also (1) improved resistance to transplanted bl6 melanoma and rapidly induced tumor-specific CTL (Radhakrishnan et al., J. Immunol., 170: 1830-38 (2003);
Radhakrishnan et al., Cancer Res. 64: 4965-72 (2004); Heckman et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 37: 1827-35 (2007)); (2) blocked the development of inflammatory air disease in a mouse model of allergic asthma. Radhakrishnan et al., J.
Immunol., 173: 1360-65 (2004); Radhakrishnan et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol., 116: 668-74 (2005).
Additional evidence of reverse signaling in dendritic cells (DCs) results from studies of bone marrow-derived DCs cultured with soluble PD-1 (EC domain of PD-1 fused to the constant region of Ig-s-PD-1). Kuipers et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 36: 2472-82 (2006). This s-PD-1 inhibited DC activation and increased IL-10 production, reversibly through administration of anti-PD-1.
Additionally, several studies show a
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0057.tif" />
receiver for PD-Ll and PD-L2 that is independent of Pu-i. B7.1 has also been identified as a liaison partner for PD-Ll. Butte et al., Immunity 27: 111-22 (2007). Chemical crosslinking studies suggest that PD-Ll and B7.1 may interact through their IgV-like domains. B7.1: Pd-Ll interactions can induce an inhibitory signal to T cells. ligation of PD-Ll into CD4 + T cells by B7.1, or ligation of B7.1 into CD4 + T cells by PD-Ll supplies an inhibitory signal. T cells lacking CD28 and CTLA-4 show decreased cytosine production and proliferation when stimulated by granules coated with anti-CD3 plus B7.1. In T cells lacking all B7.1 receptors (ie, CD28, CTLA-4 and PD-Ll), T cell proliferation and cytosine production were no longer inhibited by anti-CD3 coated granules. more B7.1. This indicates that B7.1 acts specifically through PD-Ll on the T cell in the absence of CD28 and CTLA-4. Similarly, T cells lacking PD-1 showed decreased proliferation and cytosine production when stimulated in the presence of granules coated with anti-CD3 plus PD-Ll, demonstrating the inhibitory effect of PD-Ll ligation. in B7.1 in T cells. When T cells lacked all known receptors for PD-Ll (ie, without PD-1 or B7.1), the
<img file="MX356367B_D0058.tif" />
IMPI T-cell proliferation was no longer damaged by granules coated with anti-CD3 plus PD-Ll. Therefore, PD-L1 can exert an inhibitory effect on T cells either through B7.1 or PD-1.
The direct interaction between B7.1 and PD-L1 suggests that what is currently understood as co-stimulation is incomplete and underestimates the significance of the expression of these molecules in T cells. Studies of T cells PDL1<sup>_/</sup>'indicate that PD-L1 in T cells can sub-regulate cytosine production of T cells. Latchman et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 101: 10691-96 (2004). Because both PD-L1 and B7.1 are expressed on T cells, B cells, CDs, and macrophages, there is the potential for directional interactions between B7.1 and PD.L1 in these cell types. Additionally, PD-L1 in non-hematopoietic cells can interact with B7.1 as well as PD-1 in T cells, raising the question of whether PD-L1 is involved in its regulation. A possible explanation for the inhibitory effect of B7.1: PD-Ll interaction is that PD-L1 from T cells can trap or secrete APC B7.1 from interaction with CD28.
As a result, PD-L1 signaling antagonism, including blocking PD-Ll from interaction with either PD-1, B7.1, or both, is likely to prevent PD-Ll from sending a co-stimulating signal
<img file="MX356367B_D0059.tif" />
negative to T cells and other cells that present the antigen, improve immunity in response to infection (eg, acute and chronic) and tumor immunity. In addition, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention can be combined with antagonists of other PD-1 signaling components: PD-L1, eg, anti-PD-1 antagonist and anti-PD-L2 antibodies.
Four. B7-H3
Co-stimulatory signals are also provided through B7-H3 (B7RP-2, CD276, PRO352), which is widely expressed in lymphoid and non-lymphoid tissues. Chapoval et al., Nat. Immunol. 2: 269-74 (2001). In humans, B7-H3 has both a 41g and a 21g variant, with the 41g form dominating, while the 21g variant predominates in the mouse. Sun et al., J. Immunol. 168: 6294-97 (2002); Steinberger et al., J. Immunol. 172: 2352-59 (2004); Ling et al., Genomics 82: 365-77 (2003).
Recent studies have shown that B7-H3 is both a stimulator and an inhibitor of T cell responses. Evidence of stimulatory activation is provided by the following: (1) In combination with antiCD3, B7-H3 / Ig co fusions -stimulated the proliferation of CD4 + and Cd8 + T cells and stimulated the lytic activity of IFN-γ and CD8. Chapoval et al., Nat. Immunol., 2: 269-74 (2001); and (2) Injection of the expression plasmid B7-H3 into
<img file="MX356367B_D0060.tif" />
Tumors from an EL-4 lymphoma model resulted in a complete regression of 50% of the tumors, which was dependent on CD8 + cells and NK cells. However, several recent studies have shown an inhibitory role for this molecule. The APC B7-H3 knockouts<sup>_/</sup>"They show a two-fold increase in alloreactive T-cell proliferation in an MLR response. Activation of CD4 T cells by anti-CD3 and anti-CD28 was inhibited in HLA-DR2 transfected with any form of B7H3. Ling et al., Genomics 82: 365-77 (2003). The result was reduced proliferation and production of IFN-γ, TNF-α, IL10, and GM-CSF. Reconciliation of these studies could be based on the existence of two receptors for B7-H3 with opposite functions, similar to how CD28 and CTLA-4 regulate signaling through B7.1 and B7.2.
As a result, blocking B7-H3 signaling can contribute to enhance the immune response to infection and tumor immunity when combined with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention.
5. B7-H4
The newest addition to the B7 family is B7-H4 (B7x, B7-S1, B7-H5, VTCN1, PRO1291), which is a negative regulator of T cell responses. Zang et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 100 (18), 10388-10392 (2003); Watanabe et al., Nat. Immunol., 4 (7), 670.679 (2003); Prasad et al.,
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0061.tif" />
Immunity 18 (6), 863-873 (2003); Sica et al., Limriunity It) (é) 7 849-861 (2003). Both human and mouse B7-H4 is widely expressed in both lymphoid (spleen and thymus) and non-lymphoid organs (including lung, liver, testis, ovary, placenta, skeletal muscle, pancreas, and small intestine). B7-H4 is not detected in normal human tissues by IHC or regulation of B7-H4 at the translational level. The IHC shows that B7-H4 is highly expressed in lung and ovarian tumors, and real-time polymerase chain reaction (PCR) analysis indicates that mouse B7-H4 is also highly expressed in carcinoma cell lines. prostate, lung and colon. B7-H4 binds to an as yet unknown receptor upon activation, but not to untreated T cells that are distinct from CTLA-4, ICOS, PD-1, and the receptor for B7-H3. Although BTLA was initially reported as the ligand for B7-H4, the reported binding of B7-H4 / Ig fusions to wild-type cells, but not BTLA "<sup>/</sup>~ forces the conclusion that HVEM, and not BTLA, is the only ligand for B7-H4. Sedy et al., Nat. Immunol., 6: 90-98 (2004).
Studies with B7-H4 transectants and immobilized B7-H4 / Ig fusions demonstrate that B7-H4 supplies a signal that inhibits TCR-mediated CD4 + and CD8 + T cell proliferation, cell cycle progression in the G0 / G1 phase, and production IL-2. Sica et al., Immunity 18: 849-61
IMPIOUS<sup>5</sup>
MEXICAN INSTITUTE (2003); Zang et al., PNAS 100: 10388-92 PWSaSE ^ et al., Immunity 18: 863-73 (2003). C cannot overcome the inhibition induced by B7-H4 / Ig. Blocking the anti-B7-H4 antibody increased T cell proliferation and IL-2 production in vitro. In vivo administration of anti-B7-H4 antibody provided with administration of keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH) in complete Freund's adjuvant (CFA) led to a modest increase in IgM production of the antibody
<td>anti-KLH and a</td><td>increase</td><td>of</td><td>two</td><td>to three</td><td>times in</td>
<td>proliferation of</td><td>T cells</td><td>and in</td><td>the</td><td>production</td><td>from IL-2 to</td>
<td>re-stimulation</td><td>in vitro</td><td>with</td><td>KLH,</td><td colspan="2">suggesting more</td>
<td colspan="2">T cell preparation in</td><td>alive</td><td>in</td><td>presence</td><td>of anti-B7-H4.</td>
<td>Antibody</td><td colspan="2">anti-B7 lock</td><td>-H4</td><td colspan="2">markedly accelerated the</td>
<td colspan="2">onset and severity of</td><td>EAE</td><td>in</td><td>T cells</td><td>CD4 + and CD8 +</td>
and CDllb + macrophages in the brain of an anti-B7-H4 treated autoimmune mouse model. The combined experimental data available on B7-H4 suggests that it may sub-regulate immune responses in peripheral tissues and play a role in the regulation of T-cell tolerance. B7-H4 expression may also play a role in evasion of host immune responses in tumor immunity. Choi et al., J. Immunol., 171: 4650-54 (2003). As a result, B7-H4 antagonism may be helpful in improving response.
<img file="MX356367B_D0062.tif" />
immune to infection and tumor immunity when combined<sup>1</sup>'with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention.
6. BTLA:
The B7 BTLA family member (CD272, BTLA-1) is functionally similar to PD-1 and CTLA.
Initially identified as a selective marker for Thl cells, BTLA is expressed only in lymphocytes. Similar to CTLA-4, ICOS, and PD-1, BTLA is induced in T cells during activation. However, in contrast to ICOS, which remains elevated in Th2 cells, but is down-regulated in Thl cells, BTLA remains expressed in Thl cells, but not in Th2 cells. Similar to PD-1, BTLA is also expressed in B cells. Gavrieli et al., Biochem. Biophys. Beef. Commun., 312: 1236-43 (2003). However, BTLA is expressed in both resting and activated cells, whereas PD-1 is up-regulated in activated B cells. The BTLA has two ITIM reasons.
BTLA exerts inhibitory effects on both B and T. lymphocytes. Watanabe et al., Nat. Immunol., 4: 67 0-7 9 (2003). BLTA B cells<sup>7</sup>"Show a modest response to anti-IgM, but an increased response to antiCD3 in vitro. BTLA Thl cells<sup>-7-</sup> Polarized cells show approximately a two-fold increase in proliferation in response to antigen exposure , in vitro. In vivo BTLA mice<sup>-7</sup>'show an increase of
<img file="MX356367B_D0063.tif" />
three times in hapten-specific antibody responses and improved susceptibility to EAE. The phenotype of BTLA 'mice<sup>/_</sup> resembles the phenotype of PD-l mice<sup>_/</sup>~ exhibiting increased susceptibility to autoimmunity, but more subtle phenotypes than CTLA-4 mice<sup>7</sup>'. However, given its role as a negative regulator, BTLA blocking may prove useful in improving the immune response in infection and in anti-tumor immunity when combined with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention.
Interestingly, the Ig superfamily member BTLA has recently been shown to interact with the HVEM member of the TNFR family as well. Sedy et al., Nat. Immunol., 6: 90-98 (2005); González et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci., USA 102: 1116-1121 (2005). HVEM is reviewed below under Family Co-Stimulators
TNFR.
E. Co-stimulators of the TNFR Family
one. OX40 / OX40L (CD134)
Mice deficient in 0X40 (CD134, TXPG1L, TNFRSF4) and OX40L, (CD134L, CD252, GP34, TNFSF4, TXGP1) have reduced primary CD4 + T cell responses to both viral and common protein antigens and in contact sensitivity reactions. Chen et al., Immunity 11: 689-698 (1999); Kopf et al., Immunity 11: 699-708 (1999); Murata et al., J. Exp. Med. 191: 365-374 (2000); Gramaglia et al., J.
IMPÍ
<img file="MX356367B_D0064.tif" />
Immunol., 165: 3043-3050 (2000). Lower frequencies of antigen-specific effector T cells are generated later in the primary response and fewer memory T cells develop. Gramaglia et al., Supra. In contrast to CD27-deficient T cells, early proliferation is not impaired in untreated CD4t T-cell populations that are deficient in 0X40. However, reduced proliferation and marked apoptotic cell death occur 4 to 5 days after activation, with the result that few T cells survive in the long term. Rogers et al., Immunity 15: 445455 (2001). With 0X40-deficient CD8t T cells, initial cell division is not affected, but the accumulation of primary effector cells is markedly reduced 3 to 6 days after encounter with the antigen. Croft et al., Nat. Immunol., 3: 609-620 (2003).
Transgenic expression of OX40L by dendritic cells or T cells increased the number of T cells
CD4t that respond to the antigen and produce autoimmunity-like symptoms that are associated with aberrant activation of T. cells. Brocker et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 29: 1610-1616 (1999); Murata et al., J. Immunol., 169: 46284636 (2002). After immunization, injection of anti-OX40 agonist antibodies results in the accumulation of an increased number of CD4 + T cells reactive to the
<img file="MX356367B_D0065.tif" />
antigen at the peak of the primary response and a concomitant improvement in the number of memory T cells that are generated. Gramaglia et al., Supra. BansaiPakala et al., Nature Med. 7: 907-912 (2001). Maxwell et al., J. Immunol., 164: 107-112 (2000 =; Weatherill et al.,
Cell Immunol., 209: 63-75 (2001). Enhanced accumulation of primary effector CTLs occurs when mice prepared with antigen are treated with an agonist antibody specific for 0X40. De Smedt et al., J. Immunol., 168: 661-670 (2002).
0X40 is believed to provide a late-acting signal that enables the survival of newly generated effector cells at the peak of the primary immune response. There is also good evidence that 0X40 works downstream from CD28 - in addition to CD28 signal-mediated increased expression of 0X40, functional analysis of CD28 deficiency versus 0X40 deficiency has shown that early primary T cell responses are impaired. markedly in the absence of CD28 signals, but late responses are impaired only in the absence of 0X40 signals. Rogers et al., Immunity 15: 445-455 (2001); Bertram et al., J. Immunol., 168: 3777-3785 (2002).
As a result, it is likely that OX40 / OX40L activation, such as through the application of agonist antibodies, may be useful in combination with the antibodies.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0066.tif" />
anti-PD-1 of the invention to treat dysfunctional T-cell disorders.
2. 4-1BB (CD137) / 4-lBBL
Similar to OX40 / OX40L, T cells that are deficient in 4-1BB (CD137, TNFRSF9) and 4-lBBL (TNFSF9) show fewer antigen-reactive CD8 + T cells accumulated in primary responses when 4-lBBL is absent and fewer memory T cells develop. DeBenedette et al., J. Immunol., 163: 4833-4841 (1999); Tan et al., J. Immunol., 163: 4859-4868 (1999); Tan et al., J.
Immunol., 164: 2320-2325 (2000). Furthermore, blocking 41BBL does not alter the initial proliferative response of CD8 + Y cells, but rather suppresses the accumulation of effector CTLs at the peak of the primary response after 3 a
6 days, due to apoptosis of cells that have divided several times. Cooper et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 32: 521-529 (2002). Anti-4-ag agonist antibodies and transfected anti-4-lBBL APCs have also produced similar results: CTL and CD4 + T cell responses are markedly increased in vivo. Melero et al., Nature Med.,
3: 682-685 (1997); Melero et al., Eur. J. Immunol., 28: 11161121 (1998); Takahashi et al., J. Immunol., 162: 5037-5040 (1999); Guinn et al., J. Immunol., 162: 5003-5010 (1999);
Halstead et al., Nature Immunol., 3: 536-541 (2002);
Takahashi et al., Immunol. Lett., 76: 183-191 (2001); Bansal-
<img file="MX356367B_D0067.tif" />
Pakala et al., J. Immunol., 169: 5005-5009 (2002). The 4-1BB-specific antibody does not alter the initial proliferative response, supporting the conclusions of the 4-1BBL blocking experiments and pointing to the late activity of 4-1BB to supply signals of cell survival.
Like 0X40, 4-1BB is believed to provide a late-acting signal that allows the survival of newly generated effector cells at the peak of the primary immune response. There is also good evidence that 4-1BB works later than CD28 - in addition to CD28 signal-mediated increased expression of 0X40 and 4-1BB, functional analysis of CD28 deficiency versus 4-1BB deficiency has shown that Primary early T cell responses are markedly impaired in the absence of CD28 signals, but late responses are impaired only in the absence of 0X40 signals. Roger et al., Immunity 15: 445-455 (2001); Bertram et al., J. Immunol., 168: 3777-3785 (2002).
The anti-CD137 agonist antibody can induce tumor regression in cancer where CD8 + CTLs play a central role. Melero et al., Nat. Med. 3: 682-5 (1997); Hirano et al., Cancer Res. 65 (3): 1089-96 (2005). The constitutive and inducible expression of PD-Ll confers resistance in such tumors, which is reversible to
<img file="MX356367B_D0068.tif" />
IMPI
IMIIIIIWiuBirjjn
DSlANtonB * ·
INWJJTMM PD-L1 lock. Hirano et al. ———————
As a result, it is likely that e 41BB / 4-1BBL activation, such as through the application of agonist antibodies, particularly in combination with PD-Ll antagonists (eg, anti-PD-Ll antibody) may be useful in treating disorders dysfunctional T cells.
3. CD27 / CD27L (CD70)
The importance of CD27 (TNFRSF7, S152) and CD27L (CD70, TNFSF7) signaling in the early stages of a T cell response has been demonstrated in in vitro blocking studies, where CD27 / CD70 interactions were disrupted. Oshima et al., Int. Immunol., 10: 517-526 (1998); Agematsu et al., J. Immunol., 153: 1421-1429 (1994); Hintzen et al., J. Immunol., 154: 2612-2623 (1995). T cells that lack CD28 initially divide normally, but then proliferate sparingly 3 or more days after activation. Hendriks et al., Nature Immunol., 1: 433-440 (2000). This indicates that CD27 participates in promoting the initial expansion of the untreated T cell population, either by early suppression of T cell death or by acting on the cell cycle to allow sustained 2 to 3 day division after activation. This is reinforced by in vivo studies of CD27-deficient mice, in which fewer numbers of antigen-specific responses develop (days 4-8) and fewer.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0069.tif" />
memory T cells for 3 or more weeks. Hendriks et al., Supra. CD27 expression is up-regulated early after T cell activation, suggesting that it primarily supplies signals that maintain early proliferation, prior to the peak of the effector response.
As a result, it is likely that CD27 / CD27L activation, including through the application of agonist antibodies, particularly in combination with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described herein, may be useful in treating dysfunctional T-cell disorders.
Four. CD30 / CD30L (CD153)
CD30 (TNFRSF8, Ki-1) and CD30L (CD153, TNFSF8) signaling are co-stimulatory for various T-cell functions in vitro. Del Prete et al., J. Exp. Med., 182: 1655-1661 (1995), Bowen et al., J. Immunol., 156: 442-449 (1995). Blocking reagents for CD30L suppressed Th2 cell development and enhanced Thl cell development in vitro. This activity is consistent with data demonstrating that CD30 is preferentially expressed by Th2 cells and type 2 cytotoxic Tc2 cells. Del Prete et al., Supra, Nakamura et al., J. Immunol., 158: 2090-2098 (1996). CD30 is expressed 3 to 4 days after activation of untreated T cells in unpolarized primary responses. Nakamura et al., Supra, indicating that this
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0070.tif" />
role is not restricted to responses elicited by cytosine type 2.
Although the exact mechanisms of CD30 / CD30L signaling are unclear, it has been suggested that they might be similar to 0X40 and 4-1BB. When adoptively transferred antigen-specific CD8 + Y cells are transferred into CD30L-deficient mice, they do not accumulate in high numbers at the peak of a primary response and fewer memory T cells develop. As a result, CD30 could also provide proliferation and / or survival signals to allow the generation of high numbers of antigen-specific T cells at the peak of primary responses.
As a result, it is likely that CD27 / CD27L activation, including through the application of agonist antibodies, particularly in combination with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described herein, may be useful in treating dysfunctional T-cell disorders.
5. HVEM / LIGHT
The effect of HVEM (HVEA, ATAR, LIGHTR, TNFRSF14,
<td>PRO509) and</td><td>LIGHT</td><td>(CD258,</td><td>HVEML, TR2,</td><td colspan="2">TNFSF14, PRO726) in</td><td>the</td>
<td colspan="2">co-stimulation</td><td>of the</td><td>T cells</td><td>it gets complicated</td><td>by 1)</td><td>the</td>
<td>capacity</td><td colspan="2">from LIGHT for</td><td>link</td><td>also to</td><td>receiver</td><td>of</td>
<td colspan="2">β lymphotoxin (</td><td>ΕΤβΗ) and</td><td>2) HVEM</td><td colspan="3">to link to Lta3</td>
<td>soluble.</td><td>By</td><td>so much,</td><td>any</td><td>study of</td><td>effect</td><td>of</td>
<img file="MX356367B_D0071.tif" />
IMPI
HVEM / LIGHT must also take into account the effect of other liaison partners for this signaling system. Blocking LIGHT can inhibit early T-cell proliferation and cytosine secretion in mixed allogeneic lymphocyte reactions (MLRs). Tamada et al., J. Immunol., 164: 4105-4110 (2000), Kwon et al., J. Biol. Chem., 272: 14272-14276 (1997); Harrop et al., J. Immunol., 161:
1786-1794 (1998); Tamada et al., Nature Med., 6: 283-289 (2000). Pro-inflammatory cytosine production is suppressed when LIGHT is blocked in unmatched heart allografts with MHC. Ye et al., J. Exp. Med., 195: 795-800 (2002). In addition, allogenic skin grafts are rejected with delayed kinetics in containers deficient in both LIGHT and CD28. Scheu et al., J. Exp. Med., 195: 161315 1624 (2002). The suggestion of delayed graft rejection may indicate an early suppression of clonal T-cell expansion or cytosine production. This conclusion is supported by (i) in vivo studies showing that allogeneic responsive LIGHT deficient splenocytes have reduced production of both TH1 and TH2 cytosines and weak generation of cytotoxic T lymphocyte (CTL) activity [Sheu et al. , supra] and (ii) in vivo studies that demonstrate that blocking of LOGHT reduces the generation of alloreactive CTLs. Tamada et al., Nature Med., 6: 28325-289 (2000).
<img file="MX356367B_D0072.tif" />
As a result, HVEM / LIGHT, such as through the application of agonist antibodies, particularly in combination with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described herein, may be useful in treating dysfunctional T-cell disorders.
II. Definitions
An allergen or immunogen is any molecule that can activate an immune response. As used herein, the term covers either the antigenic molecule itself, or its source, such as pollen grains, animal bile, insect venom, or food product. This is contrasted with the term antigen, which refers to a molecule that can be specifically recognized by an immunoglobulin or T-cell receptor. Any external substance capable of inducing an immune response in a potential allergen. Many different chemicals of both natural and synthetic origin are known to be allergenic. Natural organic chemical complexes, especially proteins, are likely to cause antibody-mediated allergy, while simple organic compounds, inorganic chemicals, and metals, more preferably, cause T-cell mediated allergy. In some cases, the same allergen may be responsible for more than one type of allergy. Exposure to the allergen can be through inhalation, injection, or skin contact.
<img file="MX356367B_D0073.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0074.tif" />
Mexican irrsTmrro DE LA PHOREDAD
INW'irTRIAL '' Dysfunction in the context of immune dysfunction, refers to a state of reduced immune response to antigenic stimulation. The term includes the common elements of exhaustion and / or anergy in which antigen recognition may occur, but the ensuing immune response is ineffective in controlling infection or tumor growth.
Immune tolerance or tolerance is the failure of the immune system to install a defensive immune response to a particular antigen. Tolerance can be natural or autonomous, where the body does not attack its own proteins and antigens, or it can be induced, resulting from manipulation of the immune system. Central tolerance occurs during lymphocyte development and operates in the thymus and bone marrow. During this process, T and B lymphocytes that recognize autoantigens are suppressed before they develop into fully immunocompetent cells. This process is most active during fetal development, but continues throughout life as immature lymphocytes are generated. Peripheral T cell tolerance refers to the lack of functional response to autoantigens that are present in peripheral tissues, and occurs after T and B cells mature and enter the periphery. These processes include the suppression of self-reactive cells by
<img file="MX356367B_D0075.tif" />
regulatory T cell medium and the generation of hyporesponsiveness (anergy) in lymphocytes that find the antigen in the absence of the co-stimulatory signals that accompany inflammation. Acquired or induced tolerance refers to the adaptation of the immune system to external antigens characterized by a specific non-reactivity of the lymphoid tissues to an antigen since, under other circumstances, it would be likely to induce a cell-mediated or humoral immunity. In adults, tolerance may be clinically induced by repeated administration of very large doses of the antigen, or of small doses that are below the threshold required for stimulation of an immune response, such as through intravenous or sublingual administration of antigens. soluble. Immunosuppression also facilitates tolerance induction. Deactivation of self-tolerance can lead to autoimmunity.
<td></td><td>To get better</td><td>the function</td><td>of</td><td>T cells</td><td>it means</td>
<td>induce,</td><td>cause</td><td>or stimulate</td><td>to</td><td>that a T cell</td><td>have a</td>
<td>function</td><td>biological</td><td>sustained</td><td>or</td><td>amplified or</td><td>renew or</td>
reactivate depleted or inactive T cells. Examples of improved T-cell function include: increased secretion of CD8 + T-cell interferon γ, increased proliferation, increased antigen response (eg, viral or pathogen clearance) relative to
<img file="MX356367B_D0076.tif" />
IMPÍ
ICνΤΟ MEXICANO DE LA PÜOFIEDAl ·) INDUSTRY 'the levels before the intervention. In one embodiment, the level of improvement is at least 50%, alternatively 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, 120%, 150%, 200%. The way to measure this improvement is known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
A dysfunctional T-cell disorder is a T-cell disorder or condition characterized by a decreased response to antigenic stimulation. In a particular embodiment, a dysfunctional T-cell disorder is a disorder that is specifically associated with inappropriate increased signaling through PD-1. In another embodiment, the dysfunctional T-cell disorder is one in which the T-cells are anergic or have decreased their ability to secrete cytosines, proliferate, or perform cytolytic activity. In a specific aspect, the decreased response results in ineffective control of a pathogen or tumor expressing an immunogen. Examples of dysfunctional T-cell disorders characterized by T-cell dysfunction include acute unresolved infection, chronic infection, and tumor immunity.
Chronic infection refers to an infection in which an infectious agent (eg, pathogens such as viruses, bacteria, protozoal parasites, fungi, or the like) has induced an immune response in the infected host, but has not been cleaned or removed from it. guest like
ΙΜ
<img file="MX356367B_D0077.tif" />
during an acute infection. Chronic infections can be persistent, latent, or slow. Although acute infections are typically resolved by the immune system within a few days or weeks (eg, influenza), persistent infections can persist at a relatively low level for months, years, decades, or for life (eg, hepatitis B). In contrast, a latent infection is characterized by a long period of asymptomatic activity punctuated by a rapidly increasing period of high-grade infection and elevated pathogen levels (eg, herpes simplex). Finally, a slow infection is one characterized by a gradual and continuous increase in disease symptoms, such as a long incubation period followed by a long and progressive clinical course that begins after the onset of clinical symptoms. Unlike latent and persistent infections, slow infection may not start with an acute period of viral multiplication (eg, picornavirus, visnavirus, spongiform encephalopathy, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease). Exemplary infectious agents capable of inducing chronic infection include viruses (eg, cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus, hepatitis B virus, hepatitis C virus, herpes simplex virus, human immunodeficiency virus types I and II, human papilloma virus types 1 and 2, human T lymphotrophic viruses
<img file="MX356367B_D0078.tif" />
types 1 and 2, varicella zoster and lu jimilar viruses). bacteria (eg, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Listeria spp., Klebsiella pneumoniae, Streptococcus pneumoniae, staphylococcus aureus, Borrelia spp., Helicobacter pylori and the like), protozoan parasites (eg, Leishmania spp., Plasmodium falciparum, Schistosoma spp. , Toxoplasma spp., Trypanosoma spp., Taenia carssiceps and the like) and fungi (eg, Aspergillus spp., Candida albicans, Coccidioides immitis, Histoplasma capsulatum, Pneumocystis carínii and the like). Additional infectious agents include prions or unfolded proteins that affect the brain or the structure of neurons, further propagating unfolded proteins in these tissues, resulting in the formation of amyloid plaques that cause cell death, tissue damage, and eventual death. Examples of disease resulting from prion infection include: Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease and its varieties, Gerstmann-Stráussler-Scheinker syndrome (GSS), fatal familial insomnia (sFI), kuru, spongiform encephalopathy, bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE) in cattle (aka mad cow disease), and various other forms encephalopathy animals [eg, transmissible mink encephalopathy (TME), chronic attrition disease (CWD) in white-tailed deer, elk and deer, feline spongiform encephalopathy, exotic ungulate encephalopathy (EUE) in nyala, oryx and kudu major,
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0079.tif" />
ostrich spongiform encephalopathy].
Tumor immunity refers to the process in which tumors evade immune recognition and cleansing. Thus, as a therapeutic concept, tumor immunity is treated when such evasion is attenuated and tumors are recognized and attacked by the immune system. Examples of tumor recognition include, tumor bonding, tumor shrinkage, and tumor cleanup.
A B7-negative co-stimulatory antagonist (BNCA) is an agent that decreases, blocks, inhibits, abrogates, or interferes with the negative co-stimulatory signal mediated by or through cell surface proteins expressed in T lymphocytes mediated by a member of the B7 family. In one aspect, a BNCA, alone or in combination with the anti-PD-1 antibodies of the invention, can convert a dysfunctional T cell to a non-dysfunctional one. In another aspect, a BNCA may be an agent that inhibits nucleic acid or protein synthesis, expression, signaling, and / or post-expression processing of a B7-negative co-stimulatory molecule. In yet another aspect, a BNCA is an antibody, antigen-binding antibody fragment, BNCA oligopeptide, BNCA RNAi, or BNCA small molecule that decreases, blocks, inhibits, abrogates, or interferes with signal transduction by means of a co75 molecule
IMPI
ΙΝΓΓΓΜΤΟ MEXICANO DE LA MOHEDAL · INOVETUIAI B7 negative stimulator. Examples dS "ífióréTüli'TSS— B7 negative stimulators include: CTLA-4, PD-Ll, PD-1, B7.1 (expressed in T cells), PD-L2, B7-H3 and B7-H4.
A '' positive co-stimulator agonist is a molecule that increases, enhances, enhances, or facilitates the co-stimulator signal mediated by or through cell surface proteins expressed on T lymphocytes. In one aspect, a positive co-stimulator molecule can be an extracellular domain, soluble construct, or agonist antibody that activates a positive co-stimulatory path. Examples of positive co-stimulatory molecules include molecules of the B7 superfamily, eg, B7.1, B7.2, CD28 e
ICOS / ICOSL. Additional examples include costimulatory molecules of the TNFR family, eg, OX40 / OX40L, 41-BB / 41BBL, CD27 / CD27L, CD30 / CD30L and HVEM / LIGHT.
A small molecule or small organic molecule is one that has a molecular but below 500 Daltons.
An interfering RNA, RNAi is an RNA 10 to 50 nucleotides in length that reduces expression of a target gene, where portions of the chain are sufficiently complementary (eg, have at least 80% identity with the target gene) . The RNA interference method refers to the target-specific deletion of gene expression (ie, gene silencing) that is
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0080.tif" />
it presents at the post-transcriptional level (eg, Τ F'án έϊ Se ϊ ón) and includes all post-transcriptional and transcriptional mechanisms of RNA-mediated inhibition of gene expression, such as those described in PD Zamore, Science 296: 1265 (2002) and Hannan and Rossi, Nature 431: 371378 (2004). As used herein, the RNAi can be in the form of small interfering RNA (siRNA), short capillary RNA (shRNA), and / or microRNA (miRNA). Such RNAi molecules are frequently double-stranded RNA complexes that can be expressed in the form of separate complementary or partially complementary RNA chains. Methods for designing double-stranded RNA complexes are well known in the art. For example, the design and synthesis of suitable shRNAs and siRNAs can be found in Sandy et al., BioTechniques 39: 215-224 (2005).
A small interfering RNA or siRNA is a double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) double 10 to 50 nucleotides in length that reduces the expression of a target gene, where portions of the first strand are sufficiently complementary (eg, they are at least 80% identity with the target gene). The siRNAs are specifically designed to avoid the anti-viral response characterized by high synthesis of interferon, non-specific inhibition of protein synthesis and degradation of the RNA that frequently result in suicide or death of
<img file="MX356367B_D0081.tif" />
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICAN »DE LA MONEDAD 1NWJSTRIAI
<td>the cell</td><td>associate</td><td>with the</td><td>use of RNAi</td><td>in cells</td><td>of</td>
<td>mammal.</td><td>Paddison</td><td>et al.,</td><td>Proc. Nati.</td><td>Acad. Sci.</td><td>USA</td>
<td> 99(3):1443-8</td><td> (2002).</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>The</td><td>finished</td><td>capillary</td><td colspan="2">refers to a structure</td><td>of</td>
Looping RNA from 7 to 2 0 nucleotides. A short capillary RNA or shRNA is a single-stranded RNA 10 to 50 nucleotides in length characterized by a turn of the capillary that reduces the expression of a target gene, where portions of the RNA strand are sufficiently complementary (eg, have minus 80% identity with the target gene). The term precursor loop refers to a formation of pairs between two regions of the same base pair of the molecule to form a double helix that ends in an unpaired short loop, providing a paddle-shaped structure.
A microRNA or miRNA (previously known as ATNst) is a single-stranded RNA approximately 10 to 7 0 nucleotides in length that is initially transcribed as pre-mRNA characterized by a precursor loop structure that is subsequently processed into a mature miRNA after a further processing through the RNA-induced silencing complex (RISC).
A BNCA interfering RNA or BNCA RNAi binds, preferably specifically, to a BNCA nucleic acid and reduces its expression. This means that
<img file="MX356367B_D0082.tif" />
the expression of the B7 negative co-stimulator molecule is lower with the BNCA RNAi present compared to the expression of the B7 negative co-stimulator molecule in a control where the BNCA RNAi is not present. BNCA RNAi can be identified and synthesized using known methods (Shi Y., Trends in Genetics 19 (1): 9-12 (2003), WO 2003056012, WO 2003064621, WO 2001/075164, WO 2002/044321.
A BNCA oligopeptide is an oligopeptide that binds, preferably specifically, a B7-negative co-stimulatory polypeptide, including a signaling, receptor, ligand, or component respectively, as described herein. Such oligopeptides can be chemically synthesized using known oligopeptide synthesis methodology or can be prepared and purified using recombinant technology. Such oligopeptides are commonly at least about 5 amino acids in length, alternatively
<td>of</td><td>to m</td><td>enos</td><td colspan="2">approximately</td><td> 6,</td><td> 7, 8</td><td> , 9,</td><td> 10,</td><td> 11,</td><td> 12,</td><td> 13,</td><td> 14,</td>
<td> 15,</td><td> 16,</td><td> 17,</td><td> 18, 19, 20,</td><td> 21,</td><td> 22,</td><td> 23,</td><td> 24,</td><td> 25,</td><td> 26,</td><td> 27,</td><td> 28,</td><td> 29,</td>
<td> 30,</td><td> 31,</td><td> 32,</td><td> 33, 34, 35,</td><td> 36,</td><td> 37,</td><td> 38,</td><td> 39,</td><td> 40,</td><td> 41,</td><td> 42,</td><td> 43,</td><td> 44,</td>
<td> 45,</td><td> 46,</td><td> 47,</td><td> 48, 49, 50,</td><td> 51,</td><td> 52,</td><td> 53,</td><td> 54,</td><td> 55,</td><td> 56,</td><td> 57,</td><td> 58,</td><td> 59,</td>
<td> 60,</td><td> 61,</td><td> 62,</td><td> 63, 64, 65,</td><td> 66,</td><td> 67,</td><td> 68,</td><td> 69,</td><td> 70,</td><td> 71,</td><td> 72,</td><td> 73,</td><td> 74,</td>
<td> 75,</td><td> 76,</td><td> 77,</td><td> 78, 79, 80,</td><td> 81,</td><td> 82,</td><td> 83,</td><td> 84,</td><td> 85,</td><td> 86,</td><td> 87,</td><td> 88,</td><td> 89,</td>
<td> 90,</td><td> 91,</td><td> 92,</td><td> 93, 94, 95,</td><td> 96,</td><td> 97,</td><td> 98,</td><td>99 o</td><td colspan="2">1000 am</td><td>inoái</td><td>ears</td><td>of</td>
length or more.
Such oligopeptides can be identified without
IMPI ΐΝίττηιτβ MüucrtNi rt LA HIORíWa »
INMUT *! »'Undue experimentation using well-known techniques. In this regard, it is noted that techniques for screening oligopeptide libraries for oligopeptides that are capable of specifically binding to a target polypeptide are well known in the art (see, eg, US Patent Nos. 5,556,762, 5,750,373, 4,708,871, 4,833,092,
5,223,409, 5,403,484, 5,571,689, 5,663,143; PCT Publications Nos. WO 84/03506 and WO 84/03564; Geysen et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 81: 3998-4002 (1984); Geysen et al., Proc.
Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 82: 178-182 (1985); Geysen et al., In
Synthetic Peptides as Antigens 130-149 (1986); Geysen et al., J. Immunol. Meth.
102: 259-274 (1987); Schoofs et al., J. Immunol., 140: 611-616 (1988), Cwirla SE et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 87: 6378 (1990); Lowman HB et al., Biochemistry, 30: 10832 (1991); Clackson T. et al., Nature, 352: 624 (1991); Marks
JD et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222: 581 (1991); Kang AS et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 8363 (1991) and Smith GP
Current Opin. Biotechnol., 2: 668 (1991).
A BNCA small molecule or BNCA small molecule antagonist is an organic molecule other than an oligopeptide or antibody as defined herein that inhibits, preferably specifically, a B7-negative co-stimulatory polypeptide. Such inhibition of B7-negative co-stimulatory signaling preferably
<img file="MX356367B_D0083.tif" />
ΙΜΡΙ ητχτττυτο MtxiCANf de la ruimiwí, · INMSTRIAI
<img file="MX356367B_D0084.tif" />
it makes a T cell dysfunctional responsive to antimimulation »antigen. Examples of BNCA small molecules can be identified and chemically synthesized using known methodology (see, eg, PCT Publications Nos. WO 2000/00823 and WO 2000/39585). Such small BNCA molecules are commonly less than about 2000 daltons in size, alternatively less than about 1500, 750, 500, 250 or 200 daltons in size, are capable of binding, preferably specifically, to a negative stimulator polypeptide at B7 as described herein, and can be identified without undue experimentation using known techniques. In this regard, it is noted that techniques for selecting libraries of organic molecules for molecules that are capable of binding to a target polypeptide are well known in the art (see, eg, PCT Publications Nos. WO 00/00823 and WO 00 / 39585).
The term antibiotic includes any molecule that specifically inhibits or abolishes the growth of microorganisms, such as viruses, bacteria, fungi, or protozoa, but is not lethal to the host in the concentration and range of doses administered. As used herein, the term antibiotic included an antibacterial agent, an antiviral agent, an antifungal agent, and an anti-protozoal agent. In one specific aspect, an antibiotic is non-toxic to the host in the
<img file="MX356367B_D0085.tif" />
concentration and dose range administered. Antibacterial or antibacterial antibiotics can be broadly classified as either bactericidal (ie, directly killing) or bacteriostatic (ie, preventing division). Antibacterial antibiotics can further be subclassified as narrow spectrum (ie, they only affect a small class of the subset of bacteria, eg, gram negative, etc.) or broad spectrum (ie, they affect a broad class). Examples of antibiotics include: (i) aminoglycosides, eg, amikacin, gentamicin, kanamycin, neomycin, netilmycin, streptomycin, tobramycin, paromycin, (ii) ansamycins, eg, geldanamicin, herbimycin, (iii) carbazephems, eg, loracarbef, (iv), carbapene, eg , ertapenum, doripenem, imipenem / cilastatin, raeropenem, (v) cephalosporins (first generation), eg, cefadroxil, cefazolin, cefalotin, cefalexin, (vi) cephalosporins (second generation), eg, ceflaclor, cefamandol, cefoxitin, cephalosporins (third generation), cefdinir, cefditoren, cefoperazone, cefotaxime, cefpodoxime, ceftazidime, ceftibuten, ceftizoxime, (vii) cephalosporins (fourth generation), eg cefepime, (viii), cephalosporins (quii) , (ix) glycopeptides, eg, teicoplanin, vancomycin, (x) macrolides,
eg, axithromycin, clarithromycin, dirithromycin, cefprozil, (vi)
eg, cefixime,
<img file="MX356367B_D0086.tif" />
erythromycin, roxithromycin, troleandomycin, telithromycin, spectinomycin, (xi) monobactams, eg, axetronam, (xii) penicillins, eg, amoxicillin, ampicillin, axlocillin, carbenicillin, dichloxacillin, melamine, flucloxacillin, mezclocillin peperacillin, ticarcillin, (xiii) antibiotic polypeptides, eg, bacitracin, colistin, polymyxin B, (xiv) quinolones, eg, ciprofloxacin, enoxacin, gatifloxacin, levofloxacin, lemefloxacin, moxifloxacin, norfloxacin, orfloxacin, trovafloxacin, (xv) sulfonamides, eg, mafenide, prontosil, sulfacetamide, sulfametizole, sulfanilamide, sulfasalazine, sulfisoxazole, trimethoprim-sulphamomethazole (TMP) , minocycline, oxytetracycline, tetracycline and (xvii) others such as arspenamma, ethanbutol, isoniazid, chloramphenicol, phosphomycin, fusidic acid, linezolid, metronidazole, clindamycin, lincomycin, furazolidone, nitrofurantoin, platensimycin, mupirocin, pyrazinamide, quinupristin / dalfopristin, tinidazole.
rifampin / rifampicin
The term antiviral agent includes any molecule that inhibits or abolishes the growth, morbidity, and / or survival of viruses. This includes antiretroviral drugs such as (1) reverse transcriptase inhibitors including for example:
to)
<img file="MX356367B_D0087.tif" />
nucleoside analog reverse transcriptase inhibitors (NRTIs) (eg, Acyclovir / Acyclovir (ZOVIRAX®, ZOVIR®), cidofovir, azidothymidine / zidovudine (AZT, RETROVIR®, didanosine (ddl, VIDEX®; zalcitabine (ddC, HIVID stavudine (d4T, ZERIT®; lamivudine (3TC, EPIVIR®); abacavir (ZIAGEN®); emtricitabine (EMTRIVA®); brivudine (HELPIN®); entecavir (BARACLUDE®); idoxuridine; viramidine (taribavirin by Valeant Pharmaceuticals), cirtidine nucleoside analog polymerase inhibitor PCI-6130 and prodrug variants (eg, R7128) by Pharmasset / Roche; nucleoside analog inhibitor by Merck / Isis Pharmaceuticals - MK-0608, (b) nucleotide analog reverse transcriptase inhibitors (NtRTIs) (eg, tenofovir (VIREAD®); adefovir (PREVEON®, HEPSERA®); fomivirsen (VITRAVENE®) ; (c) non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors (NNRTIs), efavirenz (SUSTIVA®, STOCRIN®); nevirapine (VIRAMUNE®), delavirdine (RESCRIPTOR®), etravirine (INTELENCE®), loviride; HCV RNA-dependent non-nucleoside RNA polymerase inhibitor by ViroChem Pharma - VCH-759, HCV polymerase inhibitor non-nucleoside inhibitor by Pfizer - PF-868554; and (d) polymerase inhibitors including: Hepatitis C virus RNA dependent RNA polymerase by Boehringer Ingelheim - BILB-1941, RNA polymerase inhibitor by Roche -R1626; ACH-0137171 a replicase inhibitor by Achillion
<img file="MX356367B_D0088.tif" />
Pharmaceuticals, R7128 - polymerase inhibitor by
Roche / Pharmaset, ABT-333 and ABT-072 - Abbott Polymerase Inhibitors, Bl 207127 - Boehringer Ingelheim Polymerase Inhibitor, PSI-7851 - Pharmasset Polymerase Inhibitor, ANA598 - Polymerase Inhibitor by Anadys Pharmaceuticals, MK-3281 - Merck polymerase inhibitor, IDX184 - Idenix polymerase inhibitor, GSK 625433 Glaxo Smith Kline polymerase inhibitor, INX-189 Inhibitex polymerase inhibitor, NM283 - Idenix polymerase inhibitor, HCV796 - Wyeth, GL60667 and GS9190 polymerase inhibitor - polymerase inhibitors by
Gilead, PF-00868554 - Pfizer polymerase inhibitor,
VCH759, VCH916, VX222 and VX759 - Virochem polymerase inhibitors, IDX184 and IDX375 - Idenix polymerase inhibitors, BMS650032 - Bristol Myers Squibb polymerase inhibitor; (2) prote5ase inhibitors including for example: saquinavir (FOROVASE® / INVIRASE®), ritonavir (NORVIR®), indinavir (CRIXIVAN®), nelfinavir (VIRACEPT®), amprenavir (AGENERASE®), lopinavir (KALETRA®), atazanavir (REYATAZ®), fosamprenavir (LEXIVA®), tipranavir (APTIVUS®), darunavir (PREZISTA®), telapravir (VX-950); the second generation HCV protease inhibitors by Vertex Pharmaceuticals - VX500 and VX-813; the protease inhibitor NS3 / 4<sup>to</sup> by Intermine / Roche - ITMN-191 / R-7227, boceprevir, the protease inhibitor by Schering-Plow-SCN 503034, the inhibitor of
IMPI
AUÍfbAMO EU INSTITUTE ΙΛ INSISTI PROPERTY! ΙΛΙ
<img file="MX356367B_D0089.tif" />
HCV NS3 / 4A protease by MedivifZTibotec ------- »·
TMC435 / TMC435350, the protease inhibitor ACH-1625 by Achillion Pharmaceuticals, protease inhibitor ACH-806 by Achillion / Gilead, B1201335 and protease inhibitors BILN 2061 by Boehringer Ingelheim, protease inhibitor SCH 900518 / SP900518 (narlaprevir) S Plow, MK-7009 protease inhibitor by Schering-Plow, MK-7009 protease inhibitor by Merck, BMS-650032, BMS-790052 and
BMS-791325 - protease inhibitors by Bristol Myers
Squibb, R7227 - protease inhibitor by Roche, PHX1766 protease inhibitor by Phenomix, AVL-181 - protease inhibitor by Avila Therapeutics, Biliverdin, CTS-1027 protease inhibitor by Roche Biosciences, VX985 protease inhibitor by Vertex, VCH-759 and VCH-917 protease inhibitors by Virochem / Vertex, IDX-136 and 316 protease inhibitors by Idenix, ABT-450 - protease inhibitor by Abbott, VBY 376 - protease inhibitor by
Virobay; (3) integrase inhibitors including for example: raltegravir (ISENTRESS®), elvitegravir; (4) combo therapies of nucleoside analogue / nucleotide analogue inhibitors, atripla (tenofovir + embricitabine + efavirenz), combivir (lamivudein + zidovudine), (5) entry or fusion inhibitors including for example: woniroc, enfuvirtide, docosanol , anti-CD4 antibody, anti-gp! 20 antibody, anti-CCR5 antibody, HCV NS5a antagonists: (a) A-831, A86
ΪΜΡΙ * 2 ^
SUBSTITUTE HUUCANO f,
DE LA P,! O? IÍJAL »'* - ·'<sup>¡</sup> '·' Íji-ikttual
689 and AZD 2836 by Arrow Therapeutics, (b) BMS-790052 and BMS824393 by Bristol Myers Squibb, (c) GSK-625433 by Glaxo
Smith Kline, (d) NS4a ACH-1095 antagonists; (5) maturation inhibitors * including for example: bevirimat and vivecon; 5 (6) viral release inhibitors including for example:
zanamivir (RELENZA®), oseltamivir (TAMIFLU®), arbidol; (7) immune response enhancers including for example interferon oi (eg, BLX-883 and BLX 883 CR by Biolex
Therapeutics, Bellerophon by Nautilus Biotech, IFN-oi long-acting, IFN-α SR by LG Life Sciences, IFN-a2b CR long-acting, and IFN-a2b XL by Flamel Technologies, IFN-oi pegylated (eg, PEG-IFN -a-2<sup>to</sup>, PEGASYS®; PEG-IFN-Cit2b, PEGINTRON®), IFN-a2b human serum albumin fusion protein (ALBUFERON®); interferon-β including ΙΕΝ-β-lb (BETASERON®), 15 interferon-γ, interferon-λ, pegylated interferon-λ (eg, PEGrIL-29 by ZymoGenetics / Novo Nordisk), interferonω / leukocyte II interferon (eg, Intarcia Therapeutics), toll-like receptor 7 agonists including imiquimod, isatoribine, and prodrug variants thereof (eg, ANA-975 and ANA-971) by Anadys Pharmaceuticals, Oglufanide (IM862, L-Glu-L-Trp-OH) and lipid or glycosyl conjugated variants thereof by Implicit Bioscience, NOV-205 (eg, Molixan® - a peptide antiviral by Novels
Therapeutics, Inc.), the antiviral EHC18 by Enzo Biochem, gamma-D-glutamyl-L-tryptophan (eg,
SCV-07,
SciClone
<img file="MX356367B_D0090.tif" />
IMPI
Pharmaceuticals / Verta) alloferon (eg
alloferon-1HGVSGHGQHGVHG, alloferon-2-GVSGHGQHGVHG), CPG 10101 - a TLR-9 agonist by Coley Pharmaceuticals / Actilon; (8) antiviral synergistic enhancers, ie, few or no antiviral properties alone, but enhance the effect of other antivirals - eg, chloroquine, grape juice, hydroxyurea, leflunomide, mycophenolic acid, resveratrol, ritonavir as well as other antiviral drugs such as amantadine , edoxudin, famciclovir (FAMVIR®), peciclovir, fascarbet, fosonet, ganciclovir (CYTOVENE®, CYMEVENE®, VITRASERT®), gardasil, ibacitabine, imunovir, moroxidine, nexavir, peramivir, pleconaril, podophyllotoxin, ribavirin, rimantadine, trifluridine, trizivir, tromantadine, truvada, valaciclovir, valganciclovir, vidarabine, and interferon improvers such as EMZ702 by Transition Therapeutics, histamine dihydrochloride (eg, Ceplene® + IFN-oi); and (9) miscellaneous or unclassified antivirals such as: KPE02003002 (Artenimol) by Kemin Pharmaceuticals, Mitoquinone an antioxidant co-enzyme Q10 agonist by Antipodean Pharmaceuticals, alpha-glucosidase I inhibitors (eg, MX3253 celgosivir by Migenix Pharmaceuticals, castanospermine, glucocorticoid antagonists (eg, HCV IRES inhibitors, mife , VGX-410C by VGX Pharmaceuticals), liver agonists (eg, PYN17 by Phynova Pharmaceuticals), antiviral agents derived from therapies
ΙΜ
<img file="MX356367B_D0091.tif" />
traditional herbs, eg, PYN18 by Phynova Pharmaceuticals, caspase inhibitors (eg, LB-84451 by LG Life Sciences, emricasan PF-03491390 / IDN-6556 by Pfizer), cyclosporin analogs that inhibit viral replication by preventing binding to cyclophilin A (eg, SDZ NIM 911 by Novartis, Debio-025 by Debiopharm).
The term anti-fungal agent includes any molecule that inhibits or abolishes the growth, morbidity and / or survival of fungi. This includes, for example, (1) polyene anti-fungal such as natamine, rimocidin, filipin, nystatin, Amphotericin B, candida; (2) imidazoles such as miconazole, ketoconazole (LOTRIMIN®), econazole, bifonazole, butoconazole, fenticonazole, isoconazole, oxyconazole, sertaconazole (ERTACZO®), sulconazole, thioconazole, (3) triazoles such as fluconazole, itraconazole, isav, posaconazole, voriconazole, terconazole; (4) allylamines such as terbinafine (LAMISIL®), amorolfine, naphthphine (Naftin®), butenafin (LOTRIMIN ULTRA®); (5) echinocandins, such as anidulafungin, caspofungin, micafungin and other substances with anti-fungal properties such as benzoic acid, cyclopix, flucytosine, grisefulvin, gentian violet, haloprogrin, tolnaftate (TINACTIN®, DESENEX®, AFTATO®), acid undecylenic, tea tree oil - ISO 4730 (Melaleuca Oil, Terpinen-4ol type) citronella oil, lemon leaf, orange oil,
IMPIOS 'ΝίΤΤηίΤΟMKX.ICANI,
PF IND INDtlfTAIA PROPERTY oil of palmarrosa, patchouli, lemon myrtle, neem seed oil, coconut oil.
The term "anti-protozoal agent" or "anti-protozoan agent" includes any molecule that inhibits or abolishes the growth, morbidity and / or survival of protozoal organisms. Examples of antiprotozoal agents include,
1) anti-malaria agents, eg, quinine, quinimax, quinidine, quinimax, chloroquine (ARALEN®, hydroxychloroquine (PLAQUENIL®), amodiaquine, primetamine (DARAPRIM®), sulfadoxine, proguanil, mefloquine (LARIAM®), halofantrine, primaquine, artemesinin and its derivatives (eg, artemeter, artensunate, dihydroartemisinin, arteether), clindamycin, and combinations thereof; (2) protease inhibitors and drugs, benznidazole, buparvaquone, carbasone, clioquinol, disulfiram, eflornithine, emetine, furazolidine, meglumine antimoniate, melarsoprol, metronidazole (FLAFYL®), miltefosine, nifurtimox, nitazoxanide, nitazoxin, pentamidine, pyrimethamine (DARAPRIM®), secnidazole, tinidazole.
The term vaccine as used herein includes any non-pathogenic immunogen that, when inoculated into a host, induces protective immunity against a specific pathogen. Vaccines can take many forms. Vaccines can be whole organisms that share important antigens with the pathogen but are not
<img file="MX356367B_D0092.tif" />
themselves pathogenic (eg, smallpox). Vaccines can also be prepared from killed (Salk polio vaccine) or attenuated (lost their ability to cause disease - eg, Sabin polio vaccine). Vaccines can also be prepared from purified macromolecules isolated from the pathogenic organism. For example, toxoid vaccines (eg, tetanus and diphtheria) that contain the inactive form of the soluble bacterial toxin - resulting in the production of anti-toxin antibodies, but not immunity to intact bacteria. Subunit vaccines (eg, hepatitis B) contain only a single immunogenic protein isolated from the pathogen of interest. Hapten-conjugated vaccines bind certain carbohydrate or polypeptide epitopes isolated from the pathogen of interest to immunogenic vehicles, such as the tetanus toxoid. These strategies use epitopes as haptens to induce the production of antibodies, which then recognize the same epitope in the original pathogen. However, to be most effective, such vaccines must incorporate both B-cell and T-cell epitopes, and T-cell epitopes must be selected to ensure that they can be recognized, presented, and responded to by the immune systems of host individuals.
DNA vaccines exploit the ability of host cells to absorb and express the DNA they encode
<img file="MX356367B_D0093.tif" />
IM
MEXICAN INSTITUTE V OF THE fPOrtSDAr; · ζ for pathogenic proteins that are injected intramuscularly.
Examples of antiviral vaccines that can be used in combination with anti-PD-Ll antibodies for the methods described herein include: HCV (virasome) vaccine by Pevion Biotech., TG4040 (MVA-HCV by Transgene viron designed to enhance the cellular immune response (CD4 + and CD8 + cytotoxic T lymphocytes) against NS3, NS4 and NS5B, CHRONVAC® - an NS3 DNA vaccine / 4a codon optimized by Inovio Biomedical, HCV / CpG vaccines by Novartis, GI-5005 - a HCV vaccine by Globeimmune, IC41 a mixture of synthetic peptides having CD4 and CD8 HCV T epitopes in combination with poly-L-arginine by Intercell.
Host responses to immunogens can be improved if administered as a mixture with adjuvants. Immune adjuvants work in one or more of the following ways: (1) prolonging the retention of the immunogen, (2) increasing the effective size of the immunogen (and therefore promoting phagocytosis and macrophage presentation), (3) stimulating the influx of macrophage or other immune cells to the injection site, or (4) promoting local production of cytosine and other immune activities. Exemplary adjuvants include: Freund's complete adjuvant (CFA), aluminum salts, and derived mycobacterial proteins such as di
ΙΜΡΪ
MÜÜCANO INSTITUTE
DE LA P »INDUSTRIAL IPItUAO
<img file="MX356367B_D0094.tif" />
or muramil tripeptides. ___.____
The term antibody includes monoclonal antibodies, (including full length antibodies having an immunoglobulin Fe region) compositions with polyepitopic specificity, multispecific antibodies (eg, bispecific antibodies, diabodies, and single chain molecules), as well as antibody fragments (eg, Fab, F (ab ') 2 and Fv). The term immunoglobulin (Ig) is used interchangeably with antibody herein.
The basic 4-chain antibody unit is a heterotetrameric glycoprotein composed of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains. An IgM antibody consists of 5 of the heterotetramer base units along with an additional polypeptide called a J chain, and contains 10 antigen binding sites, while IgA antibodies comprise 2 to 5 of the 4 chain base units which can polymerize to form polyvalent assemblies in combination with the J chain. In the case of IgGs, the 4 chain unit is generally approximately 150,000 Daltons. Each chain
L is linked to an H chain via a covalent disulfide bond, while the two H chains are linked to each other by one or more disulfide bonds depending on the H chain isotype. Each H and L chain also has
<img file="MX356367B_D0095.tif" />
Regularly separated intrachain disulfide bridges. Each H chain has, at the N-terminus, a variable domain (V<sub>H</sub>) followed by three constant domains (C<sub>H</sub>) for each of the chains a and γ, and four C domains<sub>H</sub> for the isotypes μ and ε. Each string L has, at terminal N, a variable domain (V<sub>L</sub>) followed by constant dominance at its other end. The V<sub>L</sub> is aligned with the V<sub>H</sub> and the C<sub>L</sub> is aligned with the first constant domain of the heavy chain (C<sub>H</sub>1) · Particular amino acid residues are believed to form an interface between the light chain and heavy chain variable domains. Pairing a V<sub>H</sub> and a V<sub>L</sub> together they form a single antigen binding site. For the structure and properties of the different classes of antibodies, see, eg, Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8<sup>to</sup> edition, Daniel P. Sties, Abba I. Terr and Tristram G., Parslow (eds.) Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, CT, 1994, page 71 and Chapter 6. The L chain of any vertebrate species can be assigned to one of two clearly distinct types, called kappa and lambda, based on the amino acid sequences of their constant domains.
Depending on the amino acid sequence of the constant domain of its heavy chains (CH), immunoglobulins can be assigned to different classes or isotypes. There are five classes of immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG, and IgM, which have designated heavy chains, α, δ, ε, γ, and μ, ιμρι ^> μ
Μ tXJCA NO 3 *
PROPERTY
NDUSTRJAL TJT *> ΙΝΤΠΤΙ'ΊΌ MtXICANO PF Ι.Α
INDUSTRIAL respectively. The γ classes are further divided into subclasses based on the relatively minor differences in the sequence and function of CH, eg, humans express the following subclasses: IgGl, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl and IgA2.
An isolated antibody is one that has been identified, separated and / or recovered from a component of its production environment (eg, natural or recombinant). Preferably, the isolated polypeptide is free from association with all other components from its production environment. Contaminant components of your production environment, such as those resulting from recombinant transected cells, are materials that would typically interfere with antibody research, diagnosis, or therapeutic uses and may include proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous enzymes, hormones, and other solutes. In preferred embodiments, the polypeptide will be purified: (1) at more than 95% by weight of the antibody as determined, for example, by the Lowry method and, in some embodiments, at more than 99% by weight; (2) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of the N-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinner sequencer, or (3) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing or reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or, preferably, tincture of
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
DE IA fUeFBtiAD C “-5« J ± fci.
'NDHSTRIAL silver. The isolated antibody includes the Γη 5ΪΤΤΓ antibody within recombinant cells since at least one component of the antibody's natural environment will not be present. However, commonly, an isolated polypeptide or antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.
The variable region or variable domain of an antibody refers to the amino terminal domains of the heavy or light chain of the antibody. The heavy chain and light chain variable domains can be referred to as VH and VL respectively. These domains are generally the most variable parts of the antibody (relative to other antibodies in the same class) and contain the antigen binding sites.
The term "variable" refers to the fact that certain segments of the variable domains differ widely in sequence between antibodies. The V domain mediates binding to the antigen and defines the specificity of a particular antibody for its particular antigen. However, variability is not uniformly distributed across the full extent of the variable domains. Rather, it is concentrated in three segments called hypervariable regions (HVRs) in both the light chain and heavy chain variable domains. The most highly conserved portions of the variable domains are
ΪΜΡΙ iiwwrwro mexican
Dt! TO EkOElEOAD INDUSTRY!
<img file="MX356367B_D0096.tif" />
called the regions of structure (FR). The native heavy and light chain variable domains each comprise four FR regions, most of which take a beta-sheet configuration, connected by three HVRs, which form loops that connect, and in some cases are part of, the structure of beta sheet. The HVRs in each chain are held together in close proximity by means of the FR regions and, with the HVRs in the other chain, contribute to the formation of the antigen binding site of the antibodies (see Kabat et al., Sequences of Immunological Interest (Sequences of Immunological Interest), Fifth Edition, National Institute of Health, Bethesda, MD (1991)). Constant domains are not directly involved in binding the antibody to an antigen, but exhibit various effector functions, such as the participation of the
<td>antibody</td><td>in</td><td>the</td><td>toxicity</td><td>mobile</td><td>dependent on</td>
<td>antibody.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>The</td><td colspan="2">finished</td><td>antibody</td><td>monoclonal</td><td>how is it used</td>
<td colspan="2">at the moment,</td><td>I know</td><td>refers to a</td><td>antibody</td><td>obtained from a</td>
substantially homogeneous antibody population, ie, the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical, except for possible naturally-occurring mutations and / or post-translational modifications (eg, isomerizations, amidations) that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly
IMPI
1WWTTUTO MEXICANO DS LA PA0PTFDAD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0097.tif" />
specific, directed against a single antigenic site. In contrast to polyclonal antibody preparations that typically include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody is directed against a single determinant on the antigen. In addition to their specificity, monoclonal antibodies are advantageous in that they are synthesized by the hybridoma culture, not contaminated by other immunoglobulins. The monoclonal modifier indicates the character of the antibody being obtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, and should not be construed to require production of the antibody by any particular method. For example, monoclonal antibodies to be used in accordance with the present invention can be produced by a variety of techniques including, for example, the hybridoma method (eg, Kohler and Milstein, Nature, 256: 495-97 (1975); Hongo et al., Hybridoma, 13 (3): 251-260 (1995), Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual (Coid Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2<sup>to</sup> ed., 1988); Hammerling et al., In Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas, 563-681 (Elsevier NY, 1981)), recombinant DNA methods (see, eg, US Patent No. 4,816,567), phage display technologies (see, eg,
Clackson et
IΜ ΡI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ♦
MlXlCANO INSTITUTE
OF INDUSTRY PROPERTY !.
al., Natura, 352: 624-628 (1991); Mark et al. , T) Mol. Blül.
222: 581-597 (1992); Sidhu et al., J. Mol. Biol., 338 (2):
299-310 (2004); Lee et al., J. Mol. Biol. 340 (5): 1073-1093 (2004); Feilouse, Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 101 (34): 12675 12472 (2004); and Lee et al., J. Immunol. Methods., 284 (1-2):
119-132 (2004) and technologies for producing human or human type antibodies in animals that have part or all of the human immunoglobulin sites or genes encoding human immunoglobulin sequences (see, eg, WO
1998/24893; WO 1996/34096; WO 1996/33735; WO 1991/10741;
Jakobovits et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 90: 2551 (1993); Jakobovits et al., Nature 362: 255-258 (1993);
Bruggemann et al., Year in Immunol.,. 7:33 (1993); US Patent Nos. 5,545,807; 5,545,806; 5,569,825; 5,625,126;
5,633,425; and 5,661,016; Marks et al., BioTechnology 10: 779783 (1992); Lonberg et al., Nature 368: 856-859 (1994); Morrison, Nature 368: 812-813 (1994); Fishwild et al., Nature
Biotechnol., 14: 845-851 (1996); Neuberger, Nature Biotechnol., 14: 826 (1996); and Lonberg and Huzar, Intern. Rev.
Immunol., 13: 65-93 (1995).
The term "naked antibody" refers to an antibody that is not conjugated to a cytotoxic residue or radiolabel.
The terms full-length antibody, intact antibody, or whole antibody are used from gg IΜ ΡI π *? Ττηπτ> mixicanc
DE LA MOHEDAL · · Γ> Nf? «'STWlAl. 'interchangeable way to refer to an amphicuperp ”· eri ^ slr substantially intact form, opposed to an antibody fragment. Specifically, complete antibodies include those with heavy and light chains that include an Fe region. Constant domains can be native sequence constant domains (eg, human native sequence constant domains) or amino acid sequence variants thereof. In some cases, the intact antibody may have one or more effector functions.
An antibody fragment comprises a portion of an intact antibody, preferably the binding to the antigen and / or the variable region of the intact antibody. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab, Fab ', F (ab') 2 and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies (see US Patent 5,641,870, Example 2: Zapata et al., Protein Eng. 8 (10): 1057-1062 [1995]); single-chain antibody molecules and multispecific antibodies formed from antibody fragments. Papain digestion of the antibodies produces two identical antigen-binding fragments called Fab fragments, and a residual Fe fragment, a designation that reflects their ability to readily crystallize. The Fab fragment consists of a complete L chain together with the variable region domain of the H chain (V<sub>H</sub>) and the first constant domain of a heavy chain (C<sub>H</sub>one) . Each Fab fragment is monovalent with respect
100
IMPI
KrrmjTO MEXICANO DE LA REOFIEBA »XWSTIUAl
<img file="MX356367B_D0098.tif" />
to the antigen binding, ie, it has a single antigen binding site. Pepsin treatment of an antibody produces a single F (ab ') fragment<sub>2</sub> which corresponds approximately to two disulfide-linked Fab fragments that have different antigen-binding activity and are still capable of crosslinking the antigen. Fab 'fragments differ from Fab fragments in that they have some residues at the carboxy terminus of domain C<sub>H</sub>one including one or more cysteines from the hinge region of the antibody. Fab'SH is the designation herein for Fab 'in which the cysteine residue (s) from the constant domains contain a free thiol group. F (ab ') antibody fragments<sub>2</sub> they were originally produced as pairs of Fab 'fragments that have articulating cysteines between them. Other chemical couplings of antibody fragments are also known.
The Fe fragment comprises the carboxy terminal portions of both H chains held together by disulfides. Antibody effector functions are determined by sequences in the Fe region, the region that is also recognized by Fe receptors (FcR) found in certain cell types.
Fv is the minimum antibody fragment that contains a complete antigen recognition and binding site. This fragment consists of a dimer of a
101 Variable region domain of a heavy chain 'and' an '•• -l-rge-ra in close non-covalent association. From the doubling of these two domains, six hypervariable loops emanate (3 loops each from the H and L chain) that contribute to the amino acid residues for binding to the antigen and confer specificity of binding to the antigen to the antibody. However, even a single variable domain (or half of an Fv comprising only three HVRs specific for an antigen) has the ability to recognize and bind to the antigen, albeit at a lower affinity than the full binding site.
Single-chain Fv also abbreviated as sFv<sup>w</sup> or scFv are antibody fragments that comprise the V domains<sub>H</sub> and V<sub>L</sub> of an antibody connected on a single chain of polypeptides. Preferably, the scFv polypeptide further comprises a polypeptide linker between the V domains.<sub>H</sub> and V<sub>L</sub> which allows the sFv to form the desired structure for binding to the antigen. For a review of sFv, see, Pluckthün, in The Pharmacology of Monoclonal Antibodies vol. 113, Rosenburg and Moore eds., (Springer-Verlag, New York; 1994), pp. 269-315 (1994).
The functional fragments of the antibodies of the invention comprise a portion of an intact antibody, which generally includes the antigen binding region or
102
INSTITUTO MtXICANO ríLí DE LA PHORBOAD
INH'STPJAI variable of the intact antibody or the Fe region of an antibody that retains or has modified its binding capacity to FcR. Examples of antibody fragments include linear antibody, single-chain antibody molecules, and multispecific antibodies formed from antibody fragments.
The term diabodies refers to small antibody fragments prepared by constructing sFv fragments (see the preceding paragraph) with short linkers (approximately 5 to 10 residues) between the V domains.<sub>H</sub> and V<sub>L</sub> such that inter-chain but not intra-chain pair formation of V domains is achieved, resulting in a bivalent fragment, ie, a fragment having two antigen binding sites. Bispecific diabodies are heterodimers of two crossover sFv fragments in which the V domains<sub>H</sub> and V<sub>L</sub> of the two antibodies are present in different polypeptide chains. Diabodies are described in greater detail, for example, in EP 404,097; WO 93/01161; and Hollinger et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 90: 6444-6448 (1993).
Monoclonal antibodies herein specifically include chimeric antibodies (immunoglobulins) in which a portion of the heavy and / or light chain is identical with, or homologous to, the corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from
<img file="MX356367B_D0099.tif" />
103
IMPI
ΓΤΌ, ΓΤΌ Mexican ΠΕ LA rwOFTIOAD IND'TTMAL a particular species or belonging to a particular class or subclass of antibody, while the rest of the chain (s) is identical with or homologous to the corresponding sequences in the antibodies derived from another species or belonging to another class or subclass of antibody, as well as fragments of such antibodies, provided they exhibit the desired biological activity (US Patent No. 4,816,567; Morrison et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci USA 81: 6851-6855 (1984)). Chimeric antibodies of interest herein include PRIMATIZED® antibodies where the antigen binding region of the antibody is derived from an antibody produced eg, immunizing macaque monkeys with the antigen of interest. As used in the present humanized antibody it is used as a subset of chimeric antibodies.
Humanized forms of non-human (eg, murine) antibodies are chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. In one embodiment, a humanized antibody is a human immunoglobulin (recipient antibody) in which residues of a (previously defined) HVR from the recipient are replaced by residues of an HVR from a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat, rabbit, or non-human primate, having the desired specificity, affinity, and / or capacity. In some examples, waste from
104
IMPI Mexican Institute of INDUSTRIALITY
<img file="MX356367B_D0100.tif" />
structure (FR) of human immunoglobulin or or geomptL'Qgan by corresponding non-human residues. Furthermore, humanized antibodies can comprise residues that are not found in the recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications can be made to further refine the performance of the antibody, such as binding affinity. In general, a humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one and, typically two variable domains in which all or substantially all hypervariable circuits correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin sequence and all or substantially all FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin sequence, although FR regions can include one or more individual substitutions of the FR residue that improve antibody performance, such as binding affinity, isomerization, immunogenicity, etc. The number of these amino acid substitutions in the FR is typically not more than 6 in the H chain and, in the L chain, not more than 3. The humanized antibody will also optionally comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin (Fe) constant region, typically that of a human immunoglobulin. For additional details, see, eg, Jones et al., Nature, 321: 522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al., Nature, 332: 323-329 (1988); and
Lend, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol.,
2:593-596 (1992).
See
105
<img file="MX356367B_D0101.tif" />
also, for example, Vaswani and Hamilton, ~ Ann 7 "^ AT'ré'Tg'y, Asthma & Immunol., 1: 105-115 (1998); Harris, Biochem. Soc.
Transactions., 23: 1035-1038 (1995); Hurle and Gross, Curr. Op.
Biotech., 5: 428-433 (1994); and US Patents Nos. 6,982,321 and 7,087,409.
A human antibody is an antibody that has an amino acid sequence that corresponds to that of an antibody produced by a human and / or that has been made using any of the techniques to produce human antibodies as described herein. This definition of a human antibody specifically excludes a humanized antibody comprising non-human antigen binding residues. Human antibodies can be produced using various techniques known in the art including phage display libraries. Hoogenboom and Winter, J. Mol. Biol., 227: 381 (1991); Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222: 581 (1991). Also available for the preparation of human monoclonal antibodies are the methods described in Cole et al., Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, p. 77 (1985); Boerner et al., J. Immunol., 147 (1): 86-95 (1991). See also van Dijk and van de Winkel, Curr. Opin. Pharmacol., 5: 368-74 (2001).
Human antibodies can be prepared by administering the antigen to a transgenic animal that has been modified to
106
<img file="MX356367B_D0102.tif" />
produce such antibodies in response · - · .a. — antigenic tests, but whose endogenous sites have been disabled, eg, immunized xeno-mice (see, eg, US Patent Nos. 6,075,181 and 6,150,584 relating to XENOMOUSE ™ technology ). See also, for example, Li et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci., USA 103: 3557-3562 (2006) concerning human antibodies generated through a human B cell hybridoma technology.
The term hypervariable region, HVR or HV, when used herein, refers to regions of an antibody variable domain that are hypervariable in sequence and / or that form structurally defined circuits. Generally, the antibodies comprise six HVRs; three in the VH (Hl, H2, H3) and three in the VL (Ll, L2, L3). In native antibodies, H3 and L3 display the greatest diversity of the six HVRs, and H3 in particular is believed to play a unique role in imparting fine specificity to the antibodies. See, eg, Xu et al., Immunity, 13: 37-45 (2000); Johnson and Wu Methods in Molecular Biology, 248: 1-25 (Lo, ed., Human Press, Totowa, NJ, 2003). Indeed, naturally occurring camelid antibodies consisting of just one heavy chain are functional and stable in the absence of the light chain. See, eg, Hamers-Casterman et al., Nature, 363: 446-448 (1993) and Sheriff et al., Nature Struct.
Biol., 3: 733-736 (1996).
<img file="MX356367B_D0103.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0104.tif" />
107
A number of HVR delineations are in use and are covered herein. Kabat compliance determining regions (CDRs) are based on sequence variability and are the most commonly used (Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest), 5<sup>to</sup> ed., Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD (1991)). Rather Chothia refers to the location of structural circuits (Chothia and Lesk, J. Mol. Biol., 196: 901-917 (1987)). The AbM HVRs represent a compromise between the Kabat HVRs and the Chothia frameworks and are used by the Oxford Molecular AbM antibody modeling software. Contact HVRs are based on an analysis of the available crystal structures of the complex. The residues of each of these HVRs are noted below.
<td></td><td>Kabat Circuit</td><td>AbM</td><td>Chothia</td><td>Contact</td>
<td>LI</td><td>L24-L34</td><td>L24-L34</td><td>L26-L32</td><td>L30-L36</td>
<td>L2</td><td>L50-L56</td><td>L50-L56</td><td>L-50-L52</td><td>L4 6-L55</td>
<td>L3</td><td>L89-L97</td><td>L89-L97</td><td>L91-L96</td><td>L89-L96</td>
<td>H1</td><td>H31-H35B</td><td>H26-H35B</td><td>H26-H32</td><td>H30-H35</td>
(Kabat numbering)
<td>H1 H31-H35</td><td>H26-H35</td><td>H26-H32</td><td>H30-H35</td>
<td>(Chothia numbering)</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>H2 H50-H65</td><td>H50-H58</td><td>H53-H55</td><td>H47-H58</td>
<img file="MX356367B_D0105.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0106.tif" />
108
H3 H95-H102 H95-H102 H96-H101 H93-H101
HVRs can comprise extended HVRs as follows: 24-36 or 24-34 (Ll), 46-56 or 50-56 (L2), and 89-97 or 8996 (L3) in the VL and 26-35 (Hl) , 50-65 or 49-65 (H2) and 93-102, 94-102 or 95-102 (H3) in the VH. Variable domain residues are numbered according to Kabat et al., Supra, for each of these definitions.
The term variable domain residue numbering as in Kabat or amino acid position numbering as in Kabat and variations thereof refers to the numbering system used for heavy chain variable domains or light chain variable domains of the compilation of antibodies in Kabat et al., supra. Using this numbering system, the actual linear amino acid sequence may contain fewer or additional amino acids corresponding to a shortening of, or insertion into, an FR or HVR of the variable domain. For example, a heavy chain variable domain may include a single amino acid insert (residue 52a according to Kabat) after residue 52 of H2 and inserted residues (eg, residues 82a, 82b, and 82c, etc., according to
Kabat) after residue 82 of heavy chain FR. The Kabat residue numbering can be determined for a given antibody by aligning in the homology regions of the antibody sequence with a sequence
109
ΪΜΡ ^
MMICANO INSTITUTE
OF THE PRO »1 £ üaR
INDUSTRIAL V numbered Kabat standard. ~ -----—— · -—
Structure residues or FR are those variable domain residues other than HVR residues as defined herein.
A human consensus structure or human acceptor structure is a structure that represents the amino acid residues that are most commonly presented in a selection of human immunoglobulin VL or VH framework sequences. Generally, the selection of human immunoglobulin VL or VH sequences is from a subset of variable domain sequences. Generally, the sequence subgroup is a subgroup as in Kabat et al., Sequences of. Proteins of Immunological Interest., 5<sup>to</sup> edition, Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD (1991). Examples include for the VL, the subgroup which may be the kappa I, kappa II, kappa III or kappa IV subgroup as in Kabat et al., Supra. Additionally, for OAB, the subgroup may be subgroup I, subgroup II, or subgroup III as in Kabat et al., Supra. Alternatively, a human consensus structure may be derived from the above at particular residues, such as when a human structure residue is selected based on its homology to the donor structure, aligning itself to the donor framework sequence with a collection of several framework sequences human. An accepting human structure
<img file="MX356367B_D0107.tif" />
110 derived from a '' human ^ cr'CtTF '' immunoglobulin structure a human consensus structure may comprise the same amino acid sequence thereof or may contain pre-existing amino acid sequence changes. In some embodiments, the number of pre-existing amino acid changes is 10 or less, 9 or less, 7 or less, 6 or less, or less, 4 or less, 3 or less, or 2 or less.
A VH subgroup III consensus structure comprises the consensus sequence obtained from the amino acid sequences in the variable heavy subgroup III of Kabat et al., Supra. In one embodiment, the VH subgroup III consensus structure amino acid sequence comprises at least a portion of all of each of the following sequences: EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (HC-FR1) (SEQ ID NO:
4), WVRQAPGKGLEWV (HC-FR2) (SEQ ID NO: 5),
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (HC-FR3) (SEQ ID NO: 6),
WGQGTLVTVSA (HC-FR4) (SEQ ID NO: 7).
A VL kappa I consensus structure comprises the consensus sequence obtained from the amino acid sequences in the variable light kappa I subgroup of Kabat et al., Supra. In one embodiment, the VH subgroup I consensus structure amino acid sequence comprises at least a portion of all of each of the following sequences: DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (LC-FR1) (SEQ ID NO: 11), WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (LC- FR2) (SEQ ID NO: 12), lll
<img file="MX356367B_D0108.tif" />
ΙΝΡΓΠνϊΌ mMcam · FROM OWN
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0109.tif" />
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (LC-FR3) (SÉQ ID NO: 13), FGQGTKVEIKR (LC-FR4) (SEQ ID NO: 14).
An amino acid modification at a specified position, eg, of the Fe region, refers to the substitution or deletion of the specified residue or the insertion of at least one amino acid residue adjacent to the specified residue. Insertion adjacent to a specified residue means insertion within one to two residues of the residue. The insert may be N-terminal or C-terminal to the specified residue. The preferred amino acid modification herein is a substitution.
An affinity matured antibody is one with one or more alterations in one or more of its HVRs which results in an improvement in the affinity of the antibody for the antigen, compared to a parent antibody that does not possess that alteration (s). (is). In one embodiment, an affinity matured antibody has nanomolar or even picomolar affinities for the target antigen. Affinity matured antibodies are produced by procedures known in the art. For example, Marks et al., Bio / Technology, 10: 779-783 (1992) describe affinity maturation by entrainment of the VH and VL domain. Random mutagenesis of HVR and / or structural residues is described, for example, by: Barbas et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 91: 3809-3813 (1994); Schier et
112
IMPIAS
<img file="MX356367B_D0110.tif" />
al., Gene, 169: 147-155 (1995); Yelton et al., J. Immunol., 155: 1994-2004 (1995); Jackson et al., J. Immunol., 154 (7): 3310-3319 (1995); and Hawkins et al., J. Mol. Biol., 226: 889-896 (1992).
As used herein, the term "specifically binds to or is specific for" refers to measurable and reproducible interactions such as the link between a target and an antibody, which determines the presence of the target in the presence of a heterogeneous population of molecules including biological molecules. For example, an antibody that specifically binds to a target (which may be an epitope) is an antibody that binds to this target with greater affinity, avidity, more easily, and / or longer duration than it binds to other targets. . In one embodiment, the degree of binding of an antibody to an unrelated target is less than about 10% of the binding of the antibody to the measured target, eg, by radioimmunoassay (RIA). In certain embodiments, an antibody that specifically binds to a target has a dissociation constant (Kd) of <1 μΜ, <100 nM, <10 nM, <1 nM, or <0.1 nM. In certain embodiments, an antibody specifically binds to an epitope on a conserved protein between proteins of different species. In another embodiment, the specific link may include, but does not require, an exclusive link.
113
IMPI
INSTITUTO MÍXICANU Di LA PROPISDAD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0111.tif" />
In some antibodies
A blocking antibody o ~ »fT- ~ -" grrrfc ± c'ere'rpTr antagonist is one that inhibits or reduces a biological activity of the antigen to which it binds.
modalities, blocking antibodies and antagonists substantially or completely inhibit the biological activity of the antigen. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention block signaling through PD-1 in order to restore a functional response by T cells from a dysfunctional state to antigen stimulation.
An activating antibody or agonist is one that enhances or initiates signaling by the antigen to which it binds. In some embodiments, agonist antibodies cause or activate signaling without the presence of the natural ligand.
The term solid phase describes a non-aqueous matrix to which the antibody of the present invention can adhere. Examples of solid phases encompassed herein include those formed partially or entirely of glass (eg, controlled pore glass), polysaccharides (eg, agarose), polyacrylamides, polystyrene, polyvinyl alcohol, and silicones. In certain embodiments, depending on the context, the solid phase may comprise the well of a test plate; in others, it is an (affinity purification chromatography column) column.
This term also includes a solid phase
<img file="MX356367B_D0112.tif" />
114
Discrete IMPI of discrete particles, such as those deáCrlVcTS · in US Patent No. 4,275,149.
Antibody effector functions refer to those biological activities attributable to the Fe region (a native sequence Fe region or amino acid sequence variant Fe region) of an antibody, and vary with the isotype of the antibody. Examples of antibody effector functions include: Clq binding and complement dependent cytotoxicity; Fe receptor binding; Antibody Dependent Cell Mediated Cytotoxicity (ADCC); phagocytosis; sub-regulation of cell surface receptors (eg, B cell receptors); and B cell activation. Reduced or minimized antibody effector function means that it is reduced by at least 50% (alternatively 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%,
<img file="MX356367B_D0113.tif" />
99%) of the wild-type or unmodified antibody. The determination of the effector function of the antibody is readily determined and measured by that of ordinary skill in the art. In a preferred embodiment, the effector functions of the complement-binding antibody, complement-dependent cytotoxicity, and antibody-dependent cytotoxicity are affected. In some embodiments of the invention, the effector function is eliminated through a mutation in the constant region that eliminated glycosylation, eg, mutation without effector. In
<img file="MX356367B_D0114.tif" />
115
IMPI
INSTNVPO MKICANO r> »THE MOFCCMD 'ΝΓΧΙΤΠΗΛΙ one aspect, the effectorless mutation is a tri or ΓΙ' * N 29 DANA (D265A 'N297A) mutation in the CH2 region. Shields et al., J. Biol. Chem., 276 (9): 6591-6604 (2001). Alternatively, additional mutations resulting in reduced or eliminated effector function include: K322A and L234A / L235A (LALA). Alternatively, effector function can be reduced or eliminated through production techniques, such as expression in host cells that are not glycosylated (eg, E. coli) or in which an altered glycosylation pattern results that is not effective or is less effective in promoting effector function (eg,
Shinkawa et al., J. Biol. Chem., 278 (5): 3466-3473 (2003).
Antibody-dependent cell mediated cytotoxicity or ADCC refers to a form of cytotoxicity in which secreted Ig bound on Fe receptors (FcRs) present in certain cytotoxic cells (eg, natural killer cells (NK), neutrophils, and macrophages ) allows these cytotoxic effector cells to specifically bind to a target cell that contains the antigen and subsequently destroy the target cell with cytotoxins. Antibodies arm cytotoxic cells and are required for destruction of the target cell by this mechanism. Primary cells for mediating ADCC, NK cells, express only FcyRIII, whereas monocytes express FcyRI, FcyRII, and FcyRIII.
<img file="MX356367B_D0115.tif" />
116
The expression of Fe in hematopoietic cells is summarized in the
Table 3 on page 464 of Ravetch and Kinet, Annu. Rev.
Immunol., 9: 457-492 (1991). To assess the ADCC activity of a molecule of interest, an analysis can be carried out
ADCC in vitro, such as described in US Patent No.
5,500,362, or 5,821,337. Effector cells useful for such analyzes include peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) and natural killer cells (NK).
Alternatively or additionally, the ADCC activity of the
<td>molecule of interest can</td><td>be evaluated in</td><td>alive,</td><td>eg,</td><td>in</td><td>a</td>
<td>animal model such as the USA, 95: 652-656 (1998).</td><td>described in</td><td>Clynes</td><td>et al.</td><td colspan="2">, PNAS</td>
<td>Unless I know</td><td>indicate of</td><td>other</td><td>way</td><td>in</td><td>the</td>
<td>present, the numbering of</td><td>waste</td><td>in a</td><td>chain</td><td colspan="2">heavy</td>
immunoglobulin is that of the EU index as in Kabat et al., supra. The EU index as in Kabat refers to the residue numbering of the EU antibody of human IgGl.
The term Fe region herein is used to define a C-terminal region of an immunoglobulin heavy chain, including native sequence Fe regions and variant Fe regions. Although the boundaries of the Fe region of an immunoglobulin heavy chain may vary, the Fe region of human IgG heavy chain is commonly defined to stretch from an amino acid residue at position Cys226, or from Pro230, to the terminal
117
ΙΜΡΙ
ΙΝ 'ΤΓΠΙΤΟ MkXJCAMO r> FU ΡΚΟΠΒΟΑΟ INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0116.tif" />
carboxyl thereof. The C-terminal lysine (residue 447 according to the EU numbering system) from the Fe region can be removed, for example, during production or purification of the antibody, or by recombinantly manufacturing nucleic acid encoding a heavy chain of the antibody. Accordingly, an intact antibody composition may comprise antibody populations with all K447 residues removed, antibody populations without any K447 residues removed, and antibody populations having a mixture of antibodies with and without the K447 residue. Native sequence Fe regions suitable for use in the antibodies of the invention include IgGI, IgG2 (IgG2Am IgG2B), IgG3 and human IgG4.
Fe receptor or FcR describes a receptor that binds to the Fe region of an antibody. The preferred FcR is a native sequence human FcR. Furthermore, a preferred FcR is one that binds to an IgG antibody (a gamma receptor) and includes receptors from the FcyRI, FcyRII and FcyRIII subclasses, including allelic variants and alternately separate forms of those receptors. FcyRII receptors include FcyRIIA (an activation receptor) and FcyRIIB (an inhibition receptor), which have similar amino acid sequences that differ mainly in their cytoplasmic domains.
<img file="MX356367B_D0117.tif" />
118
The FcyRIIA activation receptor contains' Ufl "WOTTVO — CTS" activation based on the tyrosine immunoreceptor (ITAM) in its cytoplasmic domain. The FcyRIIB inhibition receptor contains an inhibition motif based on the tyrosine immunoreceptor (ITIM) in its cytoplasmic domain (see, eg, Daéron, Annu. Rev. Immuno., 15-203-234 (1997). The FcRs are reviewed. , for example, in Ravetech and Kinet, Annu. Rev. Immuno., 9: 457-92 (1991), Capel et al., Immunomethods 4: 25-34 (1994); and de Hass et al., J. Lab. Clin. Med. 126: 330-41 (1995). Other FcRs, including those to be identified in the future, are covered by the term FcR herein.
The term Fe receptor or FcR also includes the neonatal receptor, FcRn, which is responsible for the transfer of maternal IgGs to the fetus (Guyer et al., J. Immunol., 117: 587 (1976) and Kim et al., J Immunol., 24: 249 (1994)). Methods for measuring binding to FcRn are known (see, eg, Ghetie and Ward, Immunol. Today, 18 (12): 592-8 (1997); Ghetie et al., Nature Biotechnology, 15 (7): 637-40 (1997); Hinton et al., J. Biol. Chem., 279 (8): 6213-6 (2004);
WO 2004/92219 (Hinton et al.). Binding to human FcRn in vivo and serum half-life of high affinity binding polypeptides to human FcRn can be analyzed, eg, in transgenic mice or transfected human cell lines expressing human FcRn, or in primates to which
119
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0118.tif" />
administer polypeptides with an Fc '* vaTTa'ñt'eT' '~ T3' 'region WO 2000/42072 (Presta) describe antibody variants with improved or decreased binding to FcRs. See also, eg, Shields et al., J. Biol. Chem., 9 (2): 6591-6604 (2001).
Effector cells are leukocytes that express one or more FcRs and carry out effector functions. In one aspect, cells express at least FcyRIII and carry out ADCC effector function (s). Examples of human leukocytes mediating ADCC include peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC), natural killer cells (NK), monocytes, cytotoxic T cells, and neutrophils. Effector cells can be isolated from a native source, eg, from blood. Effector cells are generally lymphocytes associated with the effector phase and function to produce cytosines (helper Y cells), to destroy pathogen-infected cells (cytotoxic T cells), or to secrete antibodies (differentiated B cells).
Complement-dependent cytotoxicity or CDC refers to the lysis of a target cell in the presence of complement. Activation of the classical complement pathway is initiated by the binding of the first component of the complement system (Clq) to antibodies (of the appropriate subclass), which are bound to its cognate antigen. To assess complement activation, a CDC analysis can be carried out, eg, as described in
120
IMPI iNSTmrn »mexican DE LA PRUPJEDaC 'INDUSTRIA!
<img file="MX356367B_D0119.tif" />
Gazzano-Santoro et al., J. Immunol. Methods, 202: 163'-9 and b) 7 Polypeptide variants with altered Fe region amino acid sequences and increased or decreased Clq binding ability are described, eg, in US Patent No. 6,194,551 and WO 99/51642. The contents of these patent publications are specifically incorporated herein by reference. See also, eg, Idusogie et al., J. Immunol. 164: 4178-4184 (2000).
The IgG glycosylation site is at Asn297 in the CH2 domain. The present invention also provides compositions of a humanized antigen binding antibody that have a Fe region with reduced or no effector function. One way in which this can be achieved is an A297N substitution, which has previously been shown to abolish complement binding and effector function (Fe mutant without effector) in an anti-CD20 antibody. Idusogie et al., Supra. As a result of this mutation, the production of anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention containing this Fe mutation in mammalian cells such as CHO, will not have any glycosylation and in turn results in reduced or minimal effector function.
Alternatively, the effector function of the antibody can be eliminated without CH2 substitution by expression in non-mammalian cells such as E. coli.
Link affinity generally refers to the <sub>121</sub> IMPI
121 MEXICAN INSTITUTE »and INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY resistance of the sum total of non-covalent interactions between a single binding site of a molecule (eg, an antibody) and its binding partner (eg, an antigen). Unless otherwise indicated, as used herein, "binding affinity" refers to the intrinsic binding affinity that reflects a 1: 1 interaction between members of a binding pair (eg, antibody and antigen) . The affinity of a molecule X for its partner Y can generally be represented by means of the dissociation constant (Kd). Affinity can be measured by common methods known in the art including those described herein. Low affinity antibodies generally bind to the antigen slowly and tend to dissociate easily, whereas high affinity antibodies generally bind to the antigen faster and tend to stay longer. A variety of methods for measuring binding affinity are known in the art, of which any one can be used for the purposes of the present invention. Illustrative and exemplary modalities for measuring binding affinity are described in the following.
Kd or Kd value in accordance with this invention is measured, in one embodiment, by a radiolabelled antigen binding assay (RIA) performed with the Fab version of the antibody and antigen molecule as described
<img file="MX356367B_D0120.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0121.tif" />
122
ΪΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY for the following assay that measures the binding affinity of the Ta solution of Fabs for the antigen by balancing the Fab with a minimum concentration of labeled antigen (<sup>125</sup>I) in the presence of an unlabelled antigen titration series, then capturing the bound antigen with a plate coated with anti-Fab antibody (Chen et al., (1999) J. Mol. Biol., 293: 865-881) . To establish the conditions for the assay, microtiter plates (DINEX) are coated overnight with 5 pg / ml of a capture anti-Fab antibody (Cappel Labs) in 50 mM sodium carbonate (pH 9.6) and subsequently they are blocked with 2% (w / v) bovine serum albumin in PBS for two to five hours at room temperature (approximately 23 ° C). In a non-adsorbing plate (Nunc # 269620), 100 pM or 26 pM antigen [<sup>125</sup>I] were mixed with serial dilutions of a Fab of interest (consistent with evaluation of antiVEGF antibody, Fab-12, in Presta et al., (1997) Cancer Res., 57: 45934599). The Fab of interest is then incubated overnight, however, incubation can continue for a longer period (eg, 65 hours) to ensure equilibrium is achieved. The mixtures are then transferred to the capture plate for incubation at room temperature for one hour. The solution is then removed and the plate is washed eight times with 0.1% TWEEN-20 surfactant in PBS.
When the plates have dried, 150 μΐ / ροζο of
<img file="MX356367B_D0122.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0123.tif" />
123 scintillator (MICROSCINT-20, Packard), and the plates are counted in a TOPCOUNT ™ gamma counter (Packard) for ten minutes. The concentrations of each Fab giving less than or equal to 20% maximum binding are chosen for use in competitive binding assays.
According to another modality, Kd is measured using surface plasmon resonance assays using a BIACORE®-2000 or BIACORE®-3000 instrument (BIAcore, Inc., Piscataway, NJ) at 25 ° C with immobilized antigen CM5 chips to -10 response units (Rü). Briefly, carboxymethylated dextran biosensor chips (CM5, BIAcore, Inc.) are activated with Netyl-N '- (3-dimethylaminepropyl) -carbodimide hydrochloride (EDC) and Nhydroxysuccinimide (NHS) according to the supplier's instructions. The antigen is diluted with 10 mM sodium acetate, pH 4.8, at 5 pg / ml (-0.2 µΜ) before injection at a flow rate of 5 µΙ / minute to achieve approximately ten response units (RU) of coupled protein. After injection of the antigen, 1 M ethanolamine is injected to block the non-reactivated groups. For kinetic measurements, two-fold serial dilutions of Fab (0.78 nM to 500 nM) are injected into PBS with 0.05% TWEEN20 ™ Surfactant (PBST) at 25 ° C at a flow rate of approximately 25 μΙ / minute . Association rates (k<sub>on</sub>) and decoupling rates (k<sub>off</sub>) is calculated
<img file="MX356367B_D0124.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0125.tif" />
124 using a simple one-to-one Langmuir binding model (BIAcore® Evaluation Software version 3.2) while simultaneously adjusting the association and dissociation sensorgrams. The equilibrium dissociation constant (Kd) is calculated as the ratio k<sub>OR</sub>ff / k<sub>on</sub>· See, eg, Chen et al., J. Mol. Biol., 293: 865-881 (1999). If the on rate exceeds IO<sup>6</sup> M '<sup>1</sup>s ”<sup>1</sup> Using the above surface plasmon resonance assay, the .on rate can then be determined using a fluorescent quenching technique that measures the increase or decrease in fluorescence emission intensity (excitation = 295 nm; emission = 340 nm, 16 nm bandpass) at 25 ° C of a 20 nM anti-antigen antibody (Fab form) in PBS, pH 7.2, in the presence of increasing concentrations of antigen as measured on a spectrometer, such as a flow-stop equipped spectrometer (Aviv Instruments) or a SLM-AMINCO ™ 8000 series (ThermoSpectronic) spectrometer with a stirred cell.
An on rate, association rate, association rate ok<sub>on</sub> In accordance with this invention, it can also be determined as described above using a BIACORE®-2000 or BIACORE®-3000 system (BIAcore, Inc., Piscataway, NJ) at 25 ° C with CM5 antigen chips immobilized at approximately 10 units of answer (UK). Briefly, carboxymethylated dextran biosensor chips (CM5, BIAcore, Inc.) are activated with N125 hydrochloride
IMPI
INSTITUT · MIXiCANO DE LA nOMÍBAO ethyl-Ν '- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) -carbodimide (EDC) and N— <sup>or</sup> '' hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) according to the provider's instructions. The antigen is diluted with 10 mM sodium acetate, pH 4.8, at 5 mg / ml (= 0.2 mM) prior to injection at a flow rate of 5 ml / minute to achieve approximately ten response units (RU) of coupled protein. After injection of the antigen, 1 M ethanolamine is injected to block the non-reactivated groups. For kinetic measurements, two-fold serial dilutions of Fab (0.78 nM to 500 nM) are injected into PBS with 0.05% TWEEN 20 (PBST) surfactant (PBST) at 25 ° C at a flow rate of approximately 25 μΐ / minute. Association rates (k<sub>on</sub>) and decoupling rates (k<sub>off</sub>) are calculated using a simple one-to-one Langmuir binding model (BIAcore® Evaluation Software version 3.2) while adjusting the association and dissociation sensorgrams simultaneously.
The equilibrium dissociation constant (Kd) was calculated as the ratio k<sub>0</sub>ff / k<sub>0n</sub>. See, eg, Chen et al., (1999) J. Mol. Biol., 293: 865-881. However, if the on rate exceeds 10<sup>6</sup> M '<sup>1</sup>s'<sup>1</sup> By means of the above surface plasmon resonance assay, then the on rate is preferably determined using a fluorescent quenching technique that measures the increase or decrease in fluorescence emission intensity (excitation = 295 nm; emission = 340 nm, 16 nm bandpass) at 25 ° C from 20 nM
126
IMPI
INSTmrifcMUiCAH · OF THE INDUSTRIAL MOBILITY
<img file="MX356367B_D0126.tif" />
of anti-antigen antibody (Fab form) in ΡΗΕΤ ^ 'ρΉ TTzT, in the presence of increasing concentrations of antigen as measured on a spectrometer, such as a flow-stop equipped spectrometer (Aviv Instruments) or an SLM- spectrometer AMINCO 8000 series (ThermoSpectronic) with a stirred tank.
The phrase substantially reduced or substantially different, as used herein, denotes a sufficiently high degree of difference between two numerical values (generally one associated with a molecule and the other associated with a reference / comparator molecule) such that the The person skilled in the art would consider that the difference between the two values is of statistical significance within the context of the biological characteristic measured by said values (eg, Kd values). The difference between said two values, for example, is greater than approximately 10%, greater than approximately 20%, greater than approximately 30%, greater than approximately 40% and / or greater than approximately 50%, as a function of the value of the reference / comparator molecule.
The term substantially similar or substantially the same as used herein denotes a sufficiently high degree of similarity between two numerical values (for example, one associated with a
127
IMPI
INSTITUTO ManCAM DE LA ÍROHÍDA · INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0127.tif" />
antibody of the invention and the other to sUdlád'O doft ..... IfR 'reference / comparator antibody), such that the person skilled in the art would consider the difference between the two values to be of little or no biological significance and / or statistics within the context of the biological characteristic measured by said values (eg, Kd values). The difference between these two values, for example, is less than about 50%, less than about 40%, less than about 30%, less than about 20%, and / or less than about 10%, as a function of the value of reference / comparator.
Percent identity (%) of amino acid sequence and homology to a sequence of peptides, polypeptides, or antibodies, are defined as the percentage of amino acid residues in a candidate sequence that are identical to amino acid residues in the peptide sequence or specific polypeptides, after aligning the sequences and introducing spaces, if necessary, to achieve maximum percentage sequence identity, and without considering any conservative substitution as part of the sequence identity. Alignment for purposes of determining percent amino acid sequence identity can be accomplished in a number of ways that are within the skill of the art, for example, using publicly available software such as BLAST, BLAST-2,
128
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DC THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0128.tif" />
ALIGN or MEGALIGN ™ (DNASTAR). Experts in ^ a ^ e ^ ± ca- ~ can determine the appropriate parameters to measure alignment, including any algorithms necessary to achieve maximum alignment over the total length of the sequences being compared. For the purposes herein, however, the amino acid sequence identity% values are generated using the computerized sequence comparison program ALIGN-2, authored by Genentech Inc. The ALIGN-2 source code has been filed with user documentation at the US Copyright Office, Washington, DC, 20559, where it is registered under US Copyright Registration No. TXU510087.
The ALIGN-2 program is publicly available through Genentech, Inc., South San Francisco, California. The ALIGN-2 program must be compiled for use on a UNIX operating system, preferably UNIX V4.0D. All sequence comparison parameters are set by the ALING-2 program and do not vary.
In situations where ALIGN-2 is used for amino acid sequence comparisons, the amino acid sequence% identity of a given A amino acid sequence to, with or against a given B amino acid sequence (which may alternatively be phrased as a given amino acid sequence A having or comprising certain identity% of amino acid sequence a, with or against a sequence of
<img file="MX356367B_D0129.tif" />
129
<img file="MX356367B_D0130.tif" />
IMPI amino acids B given) is calculated as follows:
100 times the fraction X / Y where X is the number of amino acid residues valued as identical matches by the ALIGN-2 sequence alignment program in the A and B alignment of that program, and where Y is the total number of amino acid residues in B. It will be appreciated that when the length of amino acid sequence A is not equal to the length of amino acid sequence B, the amino acid sequence% identity from A to B will not equal the amino acid sequence% identity from B to TO.
Unless specifically defined otherwise, all amino acid sequence identity% values used herein are obtained as described in the immediately preceding paragraph using the ALIGN-2 computer program.
An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding the antibodies herein is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated from at least one contaminating nucleic acid molecule with which it is commonly associated in the environment in which it was produced. . Preferably, the isolated nucleic acid is free from association with all components associated with the production environment. The isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode the polypeptides and antibodies in
130
IMPI
INSTITUI * mexican · Give LA MONEDAD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0131.tif" />
they are in a different form ™ to<sup>J</sup> the form or placement in which they are found in nature. Isolated nucleic acid molecules, therefore, are distinguished from nucleic acid encoding polypeptides and antibodies herein that naturally exist in cells.
The term "control sequences" refers to the DNA sequences necessary for the expression of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular host organism. Control sequences that are suitable for prokaryotes, for example, include a promoter, optionally an operator sequence, and a ribosome binding site. Eukaryotic cells are known to use promoters, polyadenylation signals, and enhancers.
Nucleic acid is operably linked when it is placed into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For example, DNA for a presequence guide or secretory is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a pre-protein that participates in secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so
<img file="MX356367B_D0132.tif" />
to facilitate translation. Generally, 'operably linked' means that the DNA sequences that are linked are contiguous and, in the case of a secretory guide, contiguous and read-only. However, breeders do not have to be contiguous. The link is achieved through ligation
131
<td>in places</td><td>of</td><td>restriction</td><td>convenient. Yes</td><td>such</td><td>no sites</td>
<td>exist,</td><td>the</td><td>adapters</td><td>or linkers of</td><td colspan="2">oligonucleotide</td>
<td>synthetic</td><td>I know</td><td>they use</td><td>in accordance with</td><td>the</td><td>practice</td>
conventional.
The term "epitope tagged" when used herein, refers to a chimeric polypeptide comprising a polypeptide or antibody described herein fused to a tag polypeptide. The tag polypeptide has enough residues to provide an epitope against which an antibody can be produced, and yet is short enough not to interfere with the activity of the polypeptide to which it is fused. The tag polypeptide is also preferably quite unique so that the antibody does not substantially cross-react with other epitopes. Label polypeptides generally have at least six amino acid residues and commonly between about 8 and 50 amino acid residues (preferably, between about 10 and 20 amino acid residues).
hereby uses the term
How I know
<img file="MX356367B_D0133.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0134.tif" />
132 Immunoadhesin designates antibody-like molecules that combine the binding specificity of a heterologous protein (an adhesion) with the effector functions of the immunoglobulin constant domains. Structurally, immunoadhesins comprise a fusion of an amino acid sequence with the desired binding specificity that is different from antigen recognition and the binding site of an antibody (ie, it is heterologous) and to an immunoglobulin constant domain sequence. The adhesin part of an immunoadhesin molecule is typically a contiguous amino acid sequence that comprises at least the binding site of a receptor or a ligand. The immunoglobulin constant domain sequence in immunoadhesin can be derived from any immunoglobulin, such as the IgG-1, IgG-2 (including IgG2A and IgG2B), IgG-3, or IgG-4, IgA (including IgA-1, and IgA-2), IgE, IgD or IgM. Ig fusions preferably include the replacement of a domain of a polypeptide or antibody described herein at the site of at least one variable region within an Ig molecule. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the immunoglobulin fusion includes the CH2 and CH3 linkage or CHl, CH2 and CH3 linkage regions of an IgGl molecule. For the production of immunoglobulin fusions see also US Patent No. 5, 428,130 issued on June 27,
<img file="MX356367B_D0135.tif" />
133
nineteen ninety five. For example, useful immunoadhesins
IMPí ~ • nstitut · Mexican
I HEARD THE PRORIEOAt) INO! ISTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0136.tif" />
Drugs useful for combination therapies herein include polypeptides comprising the PD-1 binding or extracellular or PD-L1 or PD-L2 portions, or vice versa, fused to a constant domain of an immunoglobulin sequence.
A fusion protein and a fusion polypeptide refer to a polypeptide that has two portions covalently linked together, where each of the portions is a polypeptide that has a different property. The property can be a biological property, such as in vitro or in vivo activity. The property can also be a simple chemical or physical property, such as binding to a target molecule, catalysis of a reaction, etc. The two portions may be linked directly by a single peptide linker, or, through a peptide linker, they will be in a reading frame with each other.
A stable formulation is one in which the protein in it essentially retains its physical and chemical stability and integrity when stored. Various analytical techniques for measuring protein stability are available in the art and are reviewed in Peptide and Protein Drug Delivery 247-301, Vincent Lee Ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New
134
£ 1
<img file="MX356367B_D0137.tif" />
industrial
York, New York, Publications (1991) and Jones A. Adv. Drug Delivery Rev. 10: 29-90 (1993). Stability can be measured at a selected temperature over a selected period of time. For rapid selection, the formulation can be held at 40 ° C for 2 weeks to 1 month, at which time stability is measured. When the formulation is to be stored at 2 to 8 ° C, the formulation should generally be stable at 30 ° C or 40 ° C for at least 1 month and / or stable at 28 ° C for at least 2 years. When the formulation is to be stored at 30 ° C, the formulation should generally be stable for at least 2 years at 30 ° C and / or stable at 40 ° C for at least 6 months. For example, the degree of aggregation during storage can be used as an indicator of protein stability. Thus, a stable formulation can be one where less than about 10% and preferably less than about 5% of the protein is present as an aggregate in the formulation. In other embodiments, any increase in aggregate formation can be determined during storage of the formulation.
A reconstituted formulation is one that has been prepared by dissolving a lyophilized protein or antibody formulation in a diluent so that the protein disperses through it. The reconstituted formulation is suitable for administration (eg, administration
135
Subcutaneous IMPI) to a patient for treatment with the protein — interest and, in certain embodiments of the invention, may be one that is suitable for parenteral or intravenous administration.
An isotonic formulation is one that has essentially the same osmotic pressure as human blood.
Isotonic formulations will generally have an osmotic pressure of about 250 to 350 mOsm. The term hypotonic describes a formulation with an osmotic pressure below that of human blood. Correspondingly, the term hypertonic is used to describe a formulation with an osmotic pressure above that of human blood. Isotonicity can be measured using, for example, a vapor pressure or freezing type osmometer. The formulations of the present invention are hypertonic as a result of the addition of salt and / or buffer.
Carriers as used herein include pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers that are non-toxic to the cell or mammal that is exposed thereto in the doses and concentrations employed. Frequently, the physiologically acceptable vehicle is an aqueous solution of buffered pH.
Examples of physiologically acceptable vehicles include buffers such as phosphate,
136 iWflTVTO MEXICANO DE LA I> i¿ (iIELjaD
INCITSTKIAI
<img file="MX356367B_D0138.tif" />
citrate and other organic acids; antioxidar.te's “ifcLuyeritío 'ascorbic acid; low molecular weight polypeptides (less than about 10 residues); proteins such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine, or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including glucose, trickle, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; salt-forming counterions such as sodium; and / or nonionic surfactants such as TWEEN ™, polyethylene glycol (PEG), and PLURONICS ™.
A packaging insert refers to the instructions that are customary to include in commercial medicine packages, which contain information about the indications, use, dosage, administration, contraindications, other medicines that are combined with the packaged product and / or referring warnings to the use of such medications, etc.
A pharmaceutically acceptable acid includes inorganic and organic acids that are non-toxic in concentration and in the form in which they are formulated. For example, suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric, perchloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, nitric, sulfuric, sulfonic, sulfinic, sulphanilic, phosphoric,
137
IMPÍ
INSTITUTO MEJICANO /'/íí-j.-iiSíJ 'DE LA ritOWEBAD <“\ ~,>“ ΓΤ iwruiw. i., fi »4 /
INDI ÍSTft | λ (.
carbonic, etc. Suitable organic acids ñcTuygTl cte ~ straight or branched chain alkyl, aromatic, cyclic, cycloaliphatic, arylaliphatic, heterocyclic, saturated, unsaturated, mono, di and tri-carboxylic, including for example, formic, acetic, 2-hydroxyacetic, trifluoroacetic , phenylacetic, trimethylacetic, t-butyl acetic, anthranilic, propanoic, 2-hydroxypropanoic, 2-oxopropanoic, propandioic, cyclopentanepropionic, cyclopentane propionic, 3-phenylpropionic, butanoic, butandioic, benzoic, 3- (4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic, 2-acetoxy-benzoic, ascorbic, cinnamic, lauryl sulfuric, stearic, muconic, mandelic, succinic, embonic, fumaric, malic, maleic, hydroximaleic, malonic, lactic, citric, tartaric, glycolic, glyconic, gluconic, pyruvic, glyoxalic, oxalic, mesyl, succinic, salicylic, italic, palmoic, palmic, thiocyanic, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, 1,2-methanedisulfonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic, benzenesulfonic, 4-chlorobenzenes naphthalene-2-sulfonic, ptoluenesulfonic, camphor sulfonic, 4-methylbicyclo [2,2,2] -oct2- ene-l-carboxylic, glucoheptonic, 4,4'-methylenebis3- (hydroxy-2-ene-l-carboxylic) , hydroxynaphthoic.
Pharmaceutically acceptable bases include inorganic and organic bases that are non-toxic in concentration and in the form in which they are formulated. For example, suitable bases include those formed from inorganic base-forming metals such as lithium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, ammonium, iron, zinc, copper, manganese, aluminum, N-methylglucamine, morpholine, piperidine, and bases. organic non-toxic including, primary, secondary and tertiary amines, substituted amines, cyclic amines <sub>138</sub> IMPI O<sup>± οθ</sup> ΐΝίττπιτοmühcang st ·· ——>
PE LA PPOPIFr,<sub>TO</sub>or V. ti / industrial and basic ion exchange resins, [eg, N (R '). in organic non-isopropylamine, where R' is independently H or Ci_alkyl<sub>4</sub>, eg, ammonium, Tris)], for example, isopropylamine, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, tripropylamine, ethanolamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, trimethamine, dicyclohexylamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethyleneamine, methylglucamine, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, Netilpiperidine, polyamine resins and the like. Particularly preferred toxic bases are diethylamine, ethanolamine, trimethamine, dicyclohexylamine, choline, and caffeine. Pharmaceutically acceptable acids and bases useful with the present invention include those derived from amino acids, eg, histidine, glycine, phenylalanine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, lysine, and asparagine.
Pharmaceutically acceptable buffers and salts include those derived from both acid and base addition salts of the above acids and bases. Shock absorbers and / or salts
<img file="MX356367B_D0139.tif" />
139
MÜiCANO INSTITUTO DE LA PROPIIDAU INDUSTRIAL specific include histidine, succinate and acetate.
A pharmaceutically acceptable sugar is a molecule that, when combined with a protein of interest, prevents or significantly reduces the chemical and / or physical instability of the protein upon storage. When the formulation is intended to be lyophilized and then reconstituted, the pharmaceutically acceptable sugars may also be known as lyoprotectants. Exemplary sugars and their corresponding sugar alcohols include: an amino acid such as monosodium glutamate or histidine; a methylamine such as betaine; a lyotropic salt such as magnesium sulfate; a polyol such as trihydric or higher molecular weight sugar alcohols, eg, glycerin, dextran, erythritol, glycerol, arabitol, xylitol, sorbitol, mannitol: propylene glycol; polyethylene glycol; PLURONICS®; and combinations thereof. Additional exemplary lyoprotectants include glycerin and gelatin, and the sugars melibiosa, melezitose, raffinose, manotriose, and stachyose. Examples of reduction sugars include glucose, maltose, lactose, maltulose, iso-maltulose, and lactulose. Examples of non-reducing sugars include non-reducing glycosides of polyhydroxy compounds selected from sugar alcohols and other straight-chain polyols. The preferred sugar alcohols are monoglycosides, especially those compounds obtained
<img file="MX356367B_D0140.tif" />
140 by reducing disaccharides such as lactose, maltose, lactulose and maltulose. The group on the glycosidic side can be either glycosidic or galactosidic. Additional examples of sugar alcohols are glucitol, maltitol, lactitol, and iso-maltulose. Preferred pharmaceutically acceptable sugars are added to the formulation in a protective amount (eg, pre-freeze-drying) which means that the protein essentially retains its physical and chemical stability and integrity during storage (eg, after reconstitution and storage).
The diluent of interest herein is one that is pharmaceutically acceptable (safe and non-toxic for administration to a human) and that is useful for the preparation of a liquid formulation, such as a reconstituted formulation after freeze-drying. Exemplary diluents include sterile water, bacteriostatic water for injection (BWFI), a pH buffered solution (eg, phosphate buffered saline), a sterile saline solution, Ringer's solution, or dextrose solution. In an alternative embodiment, diluents can include aqueous solutions of salts and / or buffers.
A preservative is a compound that can be added to the formulations herein to reduce bacterial activity. Adding a conservative, for
<img file="MX356367B_D0141.tif" />
141 example can facilitate the production of a formulation
Examples of multi-use (multiple dose) octadecyldimethylbenzyl preservatives. Potentials include ammonium chloride, hexamethonium chloride, benzalkonium chloride (a mixture of alkylbenzyl dimethyl ammonium chlorides in which the alkyl groups are long-chain compounds), and benzethonium chloride. Other types of preservatives include aromatic alcohols such as phenol, butyl and benzyl alcohol, alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben, catechol, resorcinol, cyclohexanol, 3-pentanol, and mcresol. The most preferred preservative herein is benzyl alcohol.
Treatment refers to a clinical intervention designed to alter the natural course of the individual or cell being treated, and can be carried out either by prophylaxis or during the course of clinical pathology. Desirable treatment effects include preventing disease occurrence or recurrence, preventing metastasis, decreasing the rate of disease progression, improving or alleviating disease status, and improved remission or prognosis. In some embodiments, the antibodies of the invention are used to delay the development of a disease or disorder. A subject is successfully treated, for example, using the apoptotic anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention if one or more of the associated symptoms are mitigated.
<img file="MX356367B_D0142.tif" />
142
IMPI
MEXICAMO INSTITUTE OF U PROnuWT
INDUSTRIAL with a dysfunctional T-cell disorder. —---------- An effective amount refers to at least an effective amount, in the doses and for the periods of time necessary, to achieve the desired or indicated effect, including a therapeutic or prophylactic result. For example, an effective amount of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention is at least the minimum concentration that results in inhibition of PDL1 signaling, either through PD-1 in T cells or from B7.1 in other APCsd or both.
A therapeutically effective amount is at least the minimum concentration required to effect measurable improvement or prevention of a particular disorder. A therapeutically effective amount herein can vary according to factors such as the disease state, age, sex, and weight of the patient, and with the ability of the antibody to elicit a desired response in the individual. A therapeutically effective amount is one in which any toxic or harmful effects of the antibody are offset by the beneficial therapeutic effects. For example, a therapeutically effective amount of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention is at least the minimum concentration that results in the inhibition of at least one symptom of a dysfunctional T-cell disorder.
<img file="MX356367B_D0143.tif" />
143
A prophylactically effective amount refers to an effective amount, in the doses and for the periods of time necessary, to achieve the desired prophylactic result. For example, a prophylactically effective amount of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention is at least the minimum concentration that prevents or attenuates the development of at least one symptom of a dysfunctional T-cell disorder.
Chronic administration refers to the administration of the medicine (s) in a continuous mode opposed to the acute one, in order to maintain the initial therapeutic effect (activity) for an extended period of time. Intermittent administration is a treatment that is not carried out consecutively without interruption, but is cyclical in nature.
Mammal for treatment purposes, refers to any animal classified as a mammal including humans, domestic and farm animals, and zoo animals, for sports or pets, such as dogs, horses, rabbits, cattle, pigs, hamsters, gerbils , mice, ferrets, rats, cat s, etc. Preferably, the mammal is human.
The term pharmaceutical formulation refers to a preparation that is in a form that allows the biological activity of the active ingredient to be effective and that
144
<img file="MX356367B_D0144.tif" />
it does not contain additional components that are unacceptably toxic to a subject to whom the formulation is administered.
Such formulations are sterile.
A sterile formulation is aseptic or free of living microorganisms and their spores.
The term "approximately" as used herein, refers to the common range of error for the respective value readily known to the person skilled in this technical field.
An autoimmune disorder is a disease disorder that arises from and is directed against the individual's own tissues or organs or a co-segregation or manifestation thereof or a condition resulting therefrom.
Autoimmune diseases can be an organ-specific disease (ie, the immune response is specifically directed against an organ system such as the endocrine system, the hematopoietic system, the skin, the cardiopulmonary system, the gastrointestinal and liver systems, the kidney system, thyroid, ears, neuromuscular system, central nervous system, etc.) or a systemic disease that can affect multiple organ systems (for example, systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), rheumatoid arthritis (RA), polymyositis, etc.). Such preferred diseases include autoimmune rheumatic disorders (such as, for
<img file="MX356367B_D0145.tif" />
145
<img file="MX356367B_D0146.tif" />
INSTITUTO MiJSCANt i di: INCUSTPIAL property example, RA, Sjógren's syndrome, sclerodermTT ^^ lu ^ us ^ TaT such as SLE and lupus nephritis, polymyositis-dermatomyositis, cryoglobulinemia, anti-phospholipid antibody syndrome, and psoriatic arthritis), gastrointestinal and hepatic autoimmune disorders ( such as, for example, inflammatory bowel diseases (eg, ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), autoimmune gastritis and pernicious anemia, autoimmune hepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis and celiac disease), vasculitis (such as, for example, ANCA-negative vasculitis and ANCA-associated vasculitis, including Churg-Strauss vasculitis, Wegener's granulomatosis, and microscopic polyangiitis), autoimmune neurological disorders (such as, for example, sclerosis multiple, opsoclonus myclonus syndrome, myasthenia gravis, neuromyelitis optica, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, and autoimmune polyneuropathies), kidney disorders (such as, for example, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture syndrome, and Berger's disease), autoimmune dermatological disorders (such as, for example, psoriasis, urticaria, hives, pemphigus vulgaris, bullous pemphigoid, and cutaneous lupus erythematosus), disorders hematologic (such as, for example, thrombocytopenic purpura, thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, post-transfusion purpura, and autoimmune hemolytic anemia), atherosclerosis, uveitis, autoimmune hearing diseases
146
IMPI institute μμτ.λνο OF INDDSTrtlAI PROPERTY.
<img file="MX356367B_D0147.tif" />
(such as, for example, inter'ñδ ear disease ''<sup>i</sup>'and<sup>l</sup>”<sup>l</sup>'”’'<sup>, </sup>hearing loss), Behcet's disease, Raynaud's syndrome, organ transplantation, and autoimmune endocrine disorders (such as, for example, diabetes-related autoimmune diseases such as insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM), Addison's disease, and autoimmune thyroid (eg, Grave's disease and thyroiditis). Such more preferred diseases include, for example, RA, ulcerative colitis, ANCA-associated vasculitis, lupus, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Grave's disease, IDDM, pernicious anemia, thyroiditis, and glomerulonephritis.
The term cytotoxic agent as used herein refers to a substance that inhibits or prevents cell function and / or that causes cell destruction. The term includes radioactive isotopes (eg, At<sup>211</sup>, I<sup>131</sup>, I<sup>125</sup>, AND<sup>90</sup>, Re<sup>186</sup>, Ye<sup>153</sup>, Bi<sup>212</sup>, P<sup>32</sup> and radioactive isotopes of Lu) and toxins such as small molecule toxins or enzymatically active toxins of bacterial, fungal, plant or animal origin, or fragments thereof.
A chemotherapeutic agent is a chemical compound useful in the treatment of cancer. Examples of chemotherapeutic agents include alkylating agents such as thiotepa and cyclophosphamide (CYTOXAN®); alkyl
147
<img file="MX356367B_D0148.tif" />
sulfonates such as busulfan, improsulfan, and pipusumii; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone, meturedopa, and uredopa; ethyleneimines and metlamelamines including altretamine triethyleneomelamine triethylenephosphoramide triethylene phosphramide and trimethylolomelamine; acetogenins (especially bullatacin and bullatacinone); delta-9tetrahydrocanabinol (dronabinol, MARINOL®); beta-lapacone; lapacol; cloquicinas; netulinic acid; a camptothecin (including the synthetic analogue topotecan (HYCAMTIN®), CPT11 (irinotecan, CAMPTOSAR®, acetylcampothecin, scopolectin and 9-aminocamtothecin); briostatin; pemetrexed; calistatin; CC-1065 (including its synthetic analogues adozelesin, carzelesin and bize podophyllotoxin; podophyllinic acid; teniposide; cryptophycins (particularly cryptophycin 1 and cryptophycin 8); dolastatin; duocarmycin (including synthetic analogues, KW-2189 and CBl-TMl); eleuterobin; pancratistatin; TLK-286; CDP323 an oral alpha-4 integrin inhibitor; a saecodictine; spongistatin; nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil, chlornafazine, chlorophosphamide, estramustine, ifosfamide, mechlorethamine, mechlorethamine oxide hydrochloride, melphalan, novembycin, phenesterin, prednimustine, trophosphamide, uracilium mustard; nitrosoureas such as carmustine, chlorozotocin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine, and ranimustine; antibiotics such as enediine antibiotics (eg,
<img file="MX356367B_D0149.tif" />
148 actinomycin, cactinomycin, calicheamycin, especially gamma II calicheamycin and omega II calicheamycin (see, eg, Nicolaou et al., Agnew. Chem. Intl. Ed. Engl., 33: 183-186 (1994)); dynemycin, including dynemycin A, a esperamicin; as well as neocarzinostatin chromophore and related chromoprotein antibiotic chromophores, eclatinomycin, autramycin, azaserine, bleomycin, carabicin, carminomycin, carzinophilin, chromomycin, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, detorubicin, 6-diazo-5-noroin-5-dexorine, 5-diazorin including ADRIAMYCIN®, morpholino-doxorubicin, cyanomorpholinodoxorubicin, 2-pyrrolino-doxorubicin, liposome injection of doxorubicin (DOXIL® and deoxidexorubicin), epirubicin, esorubicin, idarubicin, marcelomycin, mitomycins such as mitomycin C, mycophenolic acid, nogalamycin, olivomycin, peplomycin, potfiromycin, puromycin, chelamycin, rodorubicin, streptonigrin, streptozocin, tubercidin, ubenimex, zinostatin; anti-metabolites such as methotrexate, gemicitabine (GEMZAR®), tegafur (UFTORAL®), capecitabine (XELODA®), an epothilone, and 5-fluoroacyl (5-FU); folic acid analogs such as denopterin, methotrexate, pteropterin, trimetrexate,; purine analogs such as fludarabine, 6mercaptopurine, thiamiprine, thioguanine; pyrimidine analogs such as ancitabine, azacitidine, 6-azauridine
<img file="MX356367B_D0150.tif" />
149 carmofur, cytarabine,
MIXICAN INSTITUTE I
DELA PROPERTY. w * »JNOIKTRIA» dideoxyuridine, doxifluiridine, enocitabine, floxuridine, and imatinib (a derivative of 2phenylaminopyrimidine), as well as other c-Kit inhibitors; anti adrenals such as aminoglutethimide, mitotane, trilostane;
folic acid filler such as frolinic acid;
aceglatone; aldophosphamide glycoside; aminoleuvinic acid;
eniluracil; amsacrine; bestrabucil; bisantrene; edatraxate;
defofamin; demecolcin; diazicuone; elformitin; eliptinium acetate; ethoglucid; gallium nitrate; hydroxyurea; slow lonidainin; maytansinoids such as maytansine and ansamitocins; mitoguazone; mitoxantrone;
nitraerine; pentostatin; fenamet;
losoxantrone; 2-ethylhydrazide; procarbazine; PSK® Polysaccharide Complex (JHS Natural Products, Eugene, OR);
razoxane; rizoxin; sizofiran;
tenuazonic; triazicuone; 2,2 ', 2' '- trichlorothriethylamine;
trichothecenes (especially T-2 toxin, verracurin A, roridin A, and angidin); urethane; vindesine (ELDISINE®, FILDESIN®); dacarbazine; manomustine; mitobronitol; mitolactol; pipobroman; gacytosine; arabinoside (Ara-C); thiotepa; taxoids, eg, paclitaxel (TAXOL ™), nanoparticle formulation made from paclitaxel and docetaxel albumin (TAXOTERE<sup>1</sup> thioguanine; mercaptopurine; methotrexate; platinum analogs such as cisplatin and carboplatin; vinblastine (VELBAN®);
mopidamol; pyrarubicin;
spirogermanium, acid (ABRAXANE<sup>T</sup> tTM? chlorampyl;
<img file="MX356367B_D0151.tif" />
150 platinum; etoposide (VP-16); ifosfamide; mitoxantrone; vincristine (ONCOVIN®); oxaliplatin; leucovovin; vinorelbine (NAVELBINE®); novantrone; edatrexate; daunomycin;
aminopterin; ibandronate; RFS 2000 topoisomerase inhibitors; difluoromethylornitine (DMFO); retinoids such as retinoic acid; pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the above; as well as combinations of two or more of the above such as CHOP, an abbreviation for a combined therapy of cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine and prednisolone and FOLFOX, an abbreviation for an oxaliplatin (ELOXATIN ™) treatment regimen combined with 5-FU and leucovovin. A particularly preferred chemotherapeutic agent useful in combination with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention, especially in the treatment of tumor immunity, is gemcitabine.
Also included in this definition are anti-hormonal agents that act to regulate, reduce, block, or inhibit the effects of hormones that can promote cancer growth and are frequently in the form of systemic or full body treatment. These can be hormones themselves. Examples include anti-estrogens and selective estrogen receptor modulators (SERMs), eg, tamoxifen (including tamoxifen including, Novaldex®), raloxifene (EVISTA®), droloxifene,
4151
<img file="MX356367B_D0152.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO hidroxitamoxifen, trioxifene, cheoxifene, ηΫ '' il / úl &<sup>J</sup>, onapristone and toremifene (Fareston®); anti-progesterones; estrogen receptor sub-regulators (ERDs); estrogen receptor antagonists such as fluvestrant (FASLODEX®); agents that function to suppress or deactivate the ovaries, for example, Leutinizing Hormone Releasing Hormone (LHRH), agonists such as Leuprolide Acetate (LUPRON® and ELIGARD®), Goserelin Acetate, Buserelin Acetate, and Tripterelin; anti-androgens such as flutamide, nilutamide, and bicalutamide; and aromatase inhibitors that inhibit the enzyme aromatase, which regulates the production of estrogen in the adrenal glands such as, for example, 4-imidazoles, aminoglutethimide, megestrol acetate (MEGASE®), exemestane (AROMASIN®, formestanie, fadrozol, vorozole (RIVISOR®, letrozole (FEMARA®) and anastrozole (ARIMIDEX®). In addition, such a chemotherapeutic definition includes bisphosphonates of agents such as clodronate (eg BONEFOS® or OSTAC®), etidronate (DIDROCAL®), NE-58095, zoledronic acid / zoledronate (ZOMETA®, alendronate (FOSAMAX®), pamidronate (AREDIA ®), tiludronate (SKELID® or risedronate (ACTONEL®); as well as troxacitabine (a 1,3-dioxolane nucleoside cytosine analog); anti-sense oligonucleotides, particularly those that inhibit gene expression in the signaling pathways involved in proliferation
<img file="MX356367B_D0153.tif" />
152
Cell aberrant IMPI 6, such as, for example, TKC- ^ STfag-ftaf ·; Ras-Ras, and epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR); vaccines such as THERATOPE® vaccine and gene therapy vaccines, for example, ALLOVECTIN® vaccine, LEUVECTIN® vaccine, and VAXID® vaccine; topoisomerase inhibitor 1 (eg, LURTOTECAN®); an anti-estrogen such as fulvestrant; a Kit inhibitor such as imatinib or EXEL-0862 (a tyrosine kinase inhibitor); EGFR inhibitor such as erlotinib or cetuximab; an anti-VEGF inhibitor such as bevacizumab; arinotecan; rmRH (eg, ABARELIX®); lapatinib and lapatinib ditosylate (a small molecule inhibitor of EGFR double tyrosine kinase also known as
GW572016); 17AAG (derived from geldamycin which is a heat shock protein (Hsp) poison 90) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the foregoing.
A growth inhibiting agent refers to a compound or composition that inhibits the growth of a cell, the growth of which depends on the activation of the receptor either in vitro or in vivo. Thus, the growth inhibiting agent includes one that significantly reduces the percentage of S-phase receptor-dependent cells. Examples of growth inhibitory agents include agents that block cell cycle progression (at a location other than the S phase), such as
<img file="MX356367B_D0154.tif" />
153 agents that induce G1 arrest and M phase arrest. Classic M phase blockers include vincas and vinca alkaloids (vincristine and vinblastine), taxanes, topoisomerase II inhibitors such as doxorubicin, epirubicin, daunorubicin, etoposide, and bleomycin. . G1 arresting agents also spread to S-phase arrest, for example, DNA alkylating agents such as tamoxifen, prednisone, dacarbazine, mechlorethamine, cisplatin, methotrexate, 5-fluoroacyl, and ara-C. Additional information can be found in The Molecular Basis of
Cancer, Mendelsohn and Israel, eds., Chapter 1, entitled Cell óyele regulation, oncogenes and antineoplastic drugs (Murakami et al., (WB Saunders: Philadelphia, 1995), especially p. 13. Taxanes (paclitaxel and docetaxel) are anti-cancer drugs both derived from yew. Docetaxel (TAXOTERE®, Rhone-Poulenc Rorer), derived from the European yew, is a semi-synthetic analogue of paclitaxel (TAXOL®, Bristol-Myers Squibb).
The term cytosine is a generic term for proteins released by a population of cells that act as intercellular mediators in another cell.
Examples of such cytosines are lymphosines, monosins; interleukins (ILs) such as IL-1, IL-Ία, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15 ... IL-
<img file="MX356367B_D0155.tif" />
154
35, including PROLEUKIN® rIL-2; a tumor effect necrosis factor such as TNF-oi or ΤΝΕ-β; and other polypeptide factors including LIF and ligand kit (KL), although the term interleukin has now become essentially synonymous with cytosine. As used herein the term cytosine includes proteins from natural or recombinant cell culture sources and biologically active equivalents of native sequence cytosines, including synthetically produced small molecule entities and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives and salts thereof. Cytosines can be classified at the proximal location of the intended target, where autocrine refers to action in the same cell from which it is secreted, paracrine refers to action restricted to the immediate proximity in which cytosine is secreted, and Endocrine refers to action in distant regions of the body. Immune cytosines can also be classified by improving a type I response (eg, IFN-γ, TGF-β etc.), which favors cellular immunity or a type II response (IL-4, IL-10, IL-13 etc. .) which favors the immunity of the antibody or humoral. Immune cytosines play roles in co-stimulation, maturation, proliferation, activation, inflammation, growth, differentiation, production and secretion of cytosines, and the survival of various immune cells.
155
ΙΜΡΪ institutc méxican ·.
FROM THE PRfH'IEi'AL): ndu <tkíal
<img file="MX356367B_D0156.tif" />
The term hormone refers to polypeptide hormones that are generally secreted by ducted glandular organs. Included among the hormones are, for example, growth hormone such as human growth hormone, N-methionyl human growth hormone, and bovine growth hormone; parathyroid hormone; thyroxine; insulin; proinsulin; relaxin; estradiol; hormone replacement therapy; androgens such as calusterone, dromostanolone propionate, epitiostanol, mepitiostane or testolactone; prorelaxin; glycoprotein hormones such as follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH); and luteinizing hormone (LH); prolactin, placental lactogen, mouse gonadotropin-associated peptide, gonadotropin-releasing hormone; inhibin; activin; Mullerian inhibitory substance; and thrombopoietin. As used herein, the term hormone includes proteins from natural sources or recombinant cell culture and biologically active equivalents of the native sequence hormone, including synthetically produced small molecule entities and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives and salts thereof.
III. Modes for Carrying Out the Invention
A. Humanization Using Phage Display
Grafted variants of hypervariable region
<img file="MX356367B_D0157.tif" />
156
Kunkel et al., Methods
Rapids can be introduced for general: and potential variants described herein were generated by "Kunkel" mutagenesis of the nucleic acid encoding the human acceptor sequences, using a separate oligonucleotide for each hypervariable region.
Enzymol., 154: 367-382 (1987).
appropriate changes within the structure and / or the hypervariable region using routine techniques, to correct and restore the appropriate hypervariable antigen region interactions.
Phage display (phagemid) (also referred to herein as phage display) can be used as a convenient method and screen many different antibodies in a library generated by sequence randomization. However, other methods are available to produce and select altered antibodies for those skilled in the art.
Phage display (phagemid) (also referred to herein as phage display in some contexts) can be used as a convenient and rapid method of generating and selecting many different potential variant antibodies in a library generated by sequence randomization. However, other methods are available to produce selected altered antibodies for those skilled in the art.
<img file="MX356367B_D0158.tif" />
157
Phage (phagemid) display technology has provided a powerful tool to generate and select for new proteins that bind to a ligand such as an antigen. The use of phage (phagemid) display techniques allows the generation of large libraries of protein variants that can be rapidly classified by those sequences that bind to a target molecule with high affinity.
Nucleic acids encoding variant polypeptides are generally fused to a nucleic acid sequence encoding a viral coat protein, such as the gene III protein and the gene VIII protein. Monovalent phagemid display systems have been developed where the nucleic acid sequence encoding the protein or polypeptide is fused to a nucleic acid sequence encoding a portion of the gene III protein. (Bass S., Proteins, 8: 309 (1990); Lowman and Wells, Methods: A Companion to Methods in Enzymology, 3: 205 (1991)). In a monovalent phagemid display system, the gene fusion is expressed at low levels and the wild-type gene III proteins are also expressed such that particle ineffectiveness is retained. Methods for generating peptide libraries and for selecting those libraries have been described in many patents (eg, US Patent No. 5,723,286, US Patent No. 5,432,018, US Patent No.
158
IMPI wjTnyroaBcANo OS IA Inowtrial RoSedad
<img file="MX356367B_D0159.tif" />
5,580,717, US Patent No. 5,427,908 and US Patent-. No. 5,498,530).
Antigen-binding antibody or polypeptide libraries have been prepared in numerous ways including altering a single gene by inserting random DNA sequences or cloning a family of related genes. Methods for displaying antibodies or antigen binding fragments using phage display (phagemid) have been described in US Patent Nos. 5,750,373, 5,733,743, 5,837,242, 5,969,108, 6,172,197, 5,580,717 and 5,658,727. The library is then selected by the expression of antibodies or antigen binding proteins with the desired characteristics.
Methods for substituting a selected amino acid for a template nucleic acid are well established in the art, some of which are described herein. For example, hypervariable region residues can be substituted using the Kunkel method. See, eg, Kunkel et al., Methods Enzymol., 154: 367382 (1987).
The oligonucleotide sequence includes one or more of the designated codon sets for the hypervariable region residues to be altered. A set of codons is a set of different triple nucleotide sequences used to encode amino acids
159
IMPI
INSTTfVTO MEXICANO Dt LA PUJMDAD INVUSTRiAE
<img file="MX356367B_D0160.tif" />
desired variants. The sets of cudum'S 'can be represented using symbols to designate the particular nucleotides or equimolar nucleotide mixtures as shown below according to the IUB code.
IUB CODES
<td>G (guanine)</td><td>Y (C or T)</td><td>H (A or C or T)</td>
<td>A (adenine)</td><td>M (A or C)</td><td>B (COGOT)</td>
<td>T (thymine)</td><td>K (G or T)</td><td>V (A or C or G)</td>
<td>C (cytosine)</td><td>S (C or G)</td><td>D (A or G or T)</td>
<td>R (A or G)</td><td>W (A or T)</td><td>N (A or C or G or T)</td>
<td colspan="3">For example, in the DVK codon set, D can be the nucleotides A or G or Τ; V can be A or G or C; and K can be G or T. This set of codons can have 18 codons different and can code for the amino acids Ala, Trp, Tyr, Thr, Asn, Lys, Ser, Arg, Asp, Glu, Gly and Cys.</td>
Oligonucleotide or primer sets can be synthesized using standard methods. A set of oligonucleotides can be synthesized, for example, by solid phase synthesis, containing sequences that represent all possible combinations of nucleotide triplets provided by the codon set and that will code for the desired group of amino acids. The synthesis of oligonucleotides with selected nucleotide degeneration at certain positions is well known in the
<img file="MX356367B_D0161.tif" />
160
<img file="MX356367B_D0162.tif" />
»· -WyrrrvTO Mexican
PF PROPERTY 1ΝΓΊ ISTRIAL technique. Such nucleotide sets having certain codon sets can be synthesized using commercial nucleic acid synthesizers (available from, for example, Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA), or can be obtained commercially (for example, from Life Technologies, Rockville, MD) . Accordingly, a set of oligonucleotides synthesized having a particular codon set will typically include a plurality of oligonucleotides with different sequences, differences set by the codon set within the entire sequence. Oligonucleotides, used in accordance with the invention, have sequences that allow hybridization to a variable domain nucleic acid template and may also include enzyme restriction sites for cloning purposes.
In one method, nucleic acid sequences encoding variant amino acids can be created by oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis. This technique is well known in the art as described by Zoller et al., Nucleic Acids Res., 10: 6487-6504 (1987). Briefly, nucleic acid sequences encoding variant amino acids are created by hybridizing a set of oligonucleotides that encodes the desired codon sets to a DNA template, when the template is in the single-stranded form of the plasmid containing the sequence of
<img file="MX356367B_D0163.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF LA TROHEDAD
INDUÍTKIAI
<img file="MX356367B_D0164.tif" />
variable region nucleic acid template. After hybridization, DNA polymerase is used to synthesize a complete second complementary strand of the template that will therefore incorporate the oligonucleotide primer, and will contain the codon sets provided by the set of oligonucleotides.
Generally, oligonucleotides of at least 25 nucleotides in length are used. An optimal oligonucleotide will have 12 to 15 nucleotides that are complementary to the template on either side of the nucleotide (s) encoding the mutation (s). This ensures that the oligonucleotide will properly hybridize to the single-stranded DNA template molecule. Oligonucleotides are readily synthesized using techniques known in the art such as those described by Crea et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 75, 5765 (1978).
The DNA template is generated by those vectors that are either derived from bacteriophage M13 vectors (commercially available M13mpl8 and M13mpl9 vectors are suitable), or those vectors that contain a single-stranded phage origin of replication as described in Viera et al. , Meth. Enzymol., 153: 3 (1987). Therefore, the DNA to be mutated can be inserted into one of these vectors in order to generate a single-chain template. The production of the single-chain template is described in sections 4.21-4.41
162
Τ λ # τι τ
<img file="MX356367B_D0165.tif" />
de Sambrook et al., supra. To alter the native DNA sequence, the oligonucleotide hybridizes to the single-stranded template under suitable hybridization conditions.
A DNA polymerizing enzyme, commonly T7 DNA polymerase or the Klenow fragment of DNA polymerase I, is then added to synthesize the template template strand using the oligonucleotide as a primer for synthesis. Thus, a heteroduplex molecule is formed such that one strand of DNA codes for the mutated form of gene 1, and the other strand (the original template) codes for the unaltered native sequence of gene 1. This heteroduplex molecule is then transformed into a suitable host cell, commonly a prokaryote such as JM101 from E. coli. After culturing the cells, the cells are plated onto agarose plates and selected using the radiolabelled oligonucleotide primer with a<sup>32</sup>-phosphate to identify bacterial colonies containing the mutated DNA.
The method described immediately above can be modified such that the homoduplex molecule is created where both strands of the plasmid contain the mutation (s). Modifications are as follows: The single-stranded oligonucleotide hybridizes to the single-stranded template as described above. A mix of
163
IΜ Ρ ί
INSTITUTO ΜΕΛΟΛΜΓ DF LA PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0166.tif" />
Three deoxyribonucleotides, deoxyriboadenosine '(dA ¥ £), deoxyriboguanosine (dGTP), and deoxyribotimidine (dTT), are combined with a modified thiodeoxyribocytosine called dCTP- (aS) (which can be obtained from Amersham). This mixture is added to the template-oligonucleotide complex. Upon addition of DNA polymerase to this mixture, a DNA strand identical to the template is generated except for the mutated bases. Furthermore, this new DNA strand will contain dCTP- (aS) instead of dCTP, which serves to protect it from restriction endonuclease digestion. After the double stranded heterodupla template chain has been cut with an appropriate restriction enzyme, the template chain can be digested with ExoIII nuclease or another appropriate nuclease to cut in a region other than that containing the site (s) ( s) that they will be mutagenized. The reaction then stops to leave a molecule that is only partially single-stranded. A complete double-stranded DNA homoduple is then formed using DNA polymerase in the presence of all four deoxyribonucleotide triphosphates, ATP, and DNA ligase. This homoduplex molecule can then be transformed into a suitable host cell.
As previously stated, the sequence of the oligonucleotide array is long enough to hybridize to the template nucleic acid and may also, but not necessarily, contain sites of
<img file="MX356367B_D0167.tif" />
164
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE RkOWEDAü
INOUSTRIAI
<img file="MX356367B_D0168.tif" />
restriction. DNA template can<img file="MX356367B_D0169.tif" /> those vectors that are either derived from bacteriophage M13 vectors or vectors containing a single-stranded origin of replication as described by Viera et al., Meth. Enzymol., 153: 3 (1987). Therefore, the DNA to be mutated must be inserted into one of these vectors in order to generate a single-chain template. The production of the single-chain template is described in sections 4.214.41 of Sambrook et al., Supra.
According to another method, a library can be generated by providing upstream and downstream oligonucleotide sets, each set having a plurality of oligonucleotides with different sequences, the different sequences established by the codon sets provided within the sequence of the oligonucleotides . The upstream and downstream oligonucleotide arrays, together with a variable domain template nucleic acid sequence, can be used in a polymerase chain reaction to generate a library of PCR products. PCR products can be referred to as nucleic acid cassettes, as they can be fused with other related or unrelated nucleic acid sequences, eg, viral coat proteins and dimerization domains, using established molecular biology techniques.
165
IMPI
MEXICAN INTERMEDIATE 06 THE PROMf »AD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0170.tif" />
The sequence of the PCR primers includes one or more of the codon pools designated for the highly diverse and solvent accessible positions in a hypervariable region. As described above, a codon set is a set of different triple nucleotide sequences used to code for the desired variant amino acids. Antibody selectors that meet the desired criteria, selected through appropriate classification / selection steps, can be isolated and cloned using standard recombinant techniques.
B. Recombinant Preparation
The invention also provides an isolated nucleic acid encoding the anti-PD-Ll antibodies, vectors and host cells comprising such nucleic acid, and recombinant techniques for the production of the antibody.
For recombinant production of the antibody, the nucleic acid encoding it is isolated and inserted into a replicable vector for subsequent cloning (DNA amplification) or for expression. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibody is easily isolated and sequenced using standard procedures (eg, using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the antibody's heavy and light chains). Many vectors are available.
<img file="MX356367B_D0171.tif" />
166
<img file="MX356367B_D0172.tif" />
IMPI
Selection of the vector depends in part on the céÍuTa ~ lrcrierto ——— ,. to be used. Generally, the preferred host cells are of either prokaryotic or eukaryotic (generally mammalian) origin.
one. Antibody Production_in Cells
Prokaryotic
a) Construction of the vector
The polynucleotide sequences encoding polypeptide components of the antibodies of the invention can be obtained using standard recombinant techniques. The desired polynucleotide sequences can be isolated and sequenced from antibody producing cells such as hybridoma cells. Alternatively, polynucleotides can be synthesized using a nucleotide synthesizer or PCR techniques. Once obtained, the sequences coding for the polypeptides are inserted into a recombinant vector capable of replicating and expressing heterologous polynucleotides in prokaryotic hosts. Many vectors that are available and known in the art can be used for the purpose of the present invention. Selection of an appropriate vector will depend primarily on the size of the nucleic acids to be inserted into the vector and the particular host cell to be transformed with the vector. Each vector contains various components, depending on its
<img file="MX356367B_D0173.tif" />
167 function (amplification or expression of the heterologous polynucleotide, or both) and its compatibility with the particular host cell in which it resides. Components of the vector generally include, but are not limited to: an origin of replication, a selection marker gene, a promoter, a ribosome binding site (RBS), a signal sequence, the heterologous nucleic acid insert, and a transcription termination sequence.
In general, plasmid vectors containing replicon and control sequences that are derived from species compatible with the host cell are used in connection with these hosts. The vector commonly contains a replication site, as well as marker sequences that are capable of providing phenotypic selection in transformed cells. For example, E. coli is typically transformed using pBR322, a plasmid derived from an E. coli species. pBR322 contains genes that code for resistance to ampicillin (Amp) and tetracycline (Tet), and thus provides easy means to identify transformed cells. pBR322, its derivatives, or other microbial plasmids or bacteriophages can also contain, or be modified to contain, promoters that can be used by the microbial organism for the expression of endogenous proteins. Examples of pBR322 derivatives used for the expression of particular antibodies are described in
<img file="MX356367B_D0174.tif" />
168 detail in Carter et al., US Patent No. 5,648,237.
Furthermore, phage vectors containing replicon and control sequences that are compatible with the host microorganism can be used as transformation vectors in connection with these hosts. For example, a bacteriophage such as GEM.TM.-ll can be used to produce a recombinant vector that can be used to transform susceptible host cells such as E-coli
LE392.
The expression vector of the invention may comprise two or more promoter-cistron pairs encoding each of the components of the polypeptide.
A promoter is an untranslated regulatory sequence located upstream (5 ') to a cistron that modulates its expression. Prokaryotic promoters typically fall into two classes, inducible and constitutive. The inducible promoter is a promoter that initiates increased levels of cistron transcription under its control in response to changes in the condition of the culture, eg, the presence or absence of a nutrient or a change in temperature.
A large number of promoters recognized by a variety of potential host cells are known. The selected promoter may be operably linked to a cistron DNA encoding the light or heavy chain by removing the promoter from the source DNA through enzyme digestion
169
IMPI
WSTmrro MUetANO
OF THE INPU5TKIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0175.tif" />
restriction and inserting the isolated promoter sequence "^ i 'the vector of the invention. Both the native promoter sequence and many heterologous promoters can be used to direct amplification and / or expression of the target genes. In some embodiments, heterologous promoters are used, as they generally allow for greater transcription and higher yields of the expressed target gene compared to the native target polypeptide and promoter.
Promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include the PhoA promoter, the galactamase and lactose promoter systems, a tryptophan promoter system, and hybrid promoters such as the tac or tcr promoter. However, other promoters that are functional in bacteria (such as other known bacterial or phage promoters) are also suitable. Their nucleotide sequences have been published, thus allowing a skilled worker to operably link them to cistrons that encode the target heavy and light chains (Siebenlist et al., (1980) Cell 20: 269) using linkers or adapters to supply any site. restriction required.
In one aspect, each cistron within the recombinant vector comprises a secretion signal sequence component that directs translocation of the polypeptides.
<img file="MX356367B_D0176.tif" />
170 expressed through a membrane. In general, the signal sequence may be a component of the vector or it may be a part of the target polypeptide DNA that is inserted into the vector. The signal sequence selected for the purpose of this invention should be one recognized and processed (ie, divided by a signal peptidase) by the host cell. For prokaryotic host cells that do not recognize or process native signal sequences for heterologous polypeptides, the signal sequence is replaced by a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the group consisting of alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, Ipp, or thermo-stable enterotoxin II (STII), LamB, PhoE, PelB, OmpA and MBP. In one embodiment of the invention, the signal sequences used in both cistrons of the expression system are STII signal sequences or variants thereof.
In another aspect, the production of the immunoglobulins according to the invention can occur in the cytoplasm of the host cell and consequently does not require the presence of secretion signal sequences within each cistron. In this regard, immunoglobulin light and heavy chains are expressed, doubled, and assembled for function within the cytoplasm.
forming immunoglobulins Certain host strains (eg, E. coli trxB- strains) provide conditions
171
ΪΜΡΙ
MEXICANC INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRY'
<img file="MX356367B_D0177.tif" />
of the cytoplasm that are favorable for the formation of the disulfide bond, thus allowing a proper folding and assembly of the expressed protein subunits. Proba and Plückthun Gene, 159: 203 (1995).
The present invention provides an expression system in which the quantitative ratio of the expressed polypeptide components can be modulated in order to maximize the performance of the secreted and properly assembled antibodies of the invention. Such modulation is accomplished at least in part by simultaneously modulating translational forces for the polypeptide components. A technique for modulating translational force is described in Simmons et al., US Patent No. 5, 840, 523. This uses variants of the translational initiation region (TIR) within a cistron. For a given IRR, a series of nucleic acid or amino acid sequence variants can be created with a range of translational forces, thus providing a convenient means by which to adjust this factor for the desired expression level of the specific chain. TIR variants can be generated by conventional mutagenesis techniques that result in codon changes that can alter the amino acid sequence, although silent changes in the nucleotide sequence are preferred. Alterations in the IRR may include, for example, alterations in the number or in the
172
<img file="MX356367B_D0178.tif" />
separation of the Shine-Dalgrano sequences, along with alterations in the signal sequence. One method of generating mutant signal sequences is to generate a codon bank at the start of a coding sequence that does not change the amino acid sequence of the signal sequence (ie, the changes are silent). This can be accomplished by changing the third nucleotide position of each codon; Additionally, some amino acids, such as leucine, serine, and arginine, have multiple first and second positions that can add complexity in producing the bank. This method of mutagenesis is described in detail in Yansura et al., (1992) METHODS: A Companion to Methods in Enzymol, 4: 151-158.
Preferably, a set of vectors with a range of IRR forces is generated for each citron in it. This limited set provides a comparison of the expression levels of each chain as well as the performance of the desired antibody products under various strength combinations of TIR. TIR forces can be determined by quantifying the expression level of a reporter gene as described in detail in Simmons et al., US Patent No. 5, 840,523. Based on the translational strength comparison, the desired individual IRRs are selected to be combined into the expression vector constructs of the invention.
173
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE PKOPIiDAI
INDI'ST »! * '
b) Prokaryotic host cells „_
Prokaryotic host cells suitable for expressing the antibodies of the invention include
Archebacteria and Eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms. include Escherichia (eg,
Examples of useful bacteria
E. coli), Bacilli (eg, B.
subtilis), Enterobacteriaceae, species Pseudomonas (eg, P.
aeruginosa), Salmonella typhimurium, Serratia Marcescans,
Klebisiella, Proteus, Shigella, Rhizobia, Vitreoscilla or Paracoccus. In one embodiment, Gram-negative cells are used. In one embodiment, E. coli cells are used as hosts for the invention. Examples of E. coli strains include strain W3110 (Bachmann, Cellular and Molecular Biology, vol. 2 (Washington, DC: American Society for Microbiology, 1987), pp. 11901219; ATCC Deposit No. 27,325 ) and derivatives thereof,
<td>including the strain</td><td>33D3 that</td><td>has</td><td>a</td><td colspan="3">genotype W3110 yfhuA</td>
<td>(ytonA) ptr3 lac</td><td>Iq lacL8</td><td colspan="3">yompTy (nmpc-fepE)</td><td colspan="2">degP41 kan<sup>R</sup></td>
<td>(US patent</td><td>No. 5,639</td><td> , 635)</td><td> •</td><td>Others</td><td>strains</td><td>and its</td>
<td colspan="2">derivatives, such as E. Coli</td><td> 294</td><td>(ATCC</td><td> 31,446</td><td>), E.</td><td>coli B,</td>
<td>E. coli 1776 (ATCC</td><td>31,537) and</td><td> AND.</td><td>coli</td><td>RV30 8</td><td>(ATCC</td><td>31m608)</td>
they are also suitable. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting. Methods for constructing derivatives of any of the aforementioned bacteria that have defined genotypes are known in the art and are
174
<img file="MX356367B_D0179.tif" />
describe, for example, in Bass et al., Proteins '-' S: ^^ 36 ^ -34 ^ (1990). It is generally necessary to select the appropriate bacteria taking into account the replication capacity of the replicon in the cells of a bacterium. For example, E. coli, Serratia or Salmonella species can be suitably used as the host when well known plasmids such as pBR322, pBR325, pACYC177 or pKN410 are used to supply the replicon.
Typically, the host cell must secrete minimal amounts of proteolytic enzymes and desirably additional protease inhibitors can be incorporated into the cell culture.
c) Production of antibodies
Host cells are transformed with the expression vectors described above and grown in standard modified nutrient medium as appropriate to include promoters, select for transformers, or amplify genes encoding the desired sequences. Transformation means introducing DNA into the prokaryotic host so that the DNA is replicable, either as an extrachromosomal element or via a chromosomal integrant. Depending on the host cell used, the transimation is carried out using standard techniques appropriate for such cells. Calcium treatment using calcium chloride is generally used for cells
IΜ
<img file="MX356367B_D0180.tif" />
175 bacteria that contain substantial paTé'd 'ceTcría-r barriers. Another method for transformation uses polyethylene glycol / DMSO. Still another technique used is electroporation.
The prokaryotic cells used to produce the antibodies of the invention are cultured in a medium known in the art and suitable for the culture of the selected host cells. Examples of suitable media include luria broth (LB) plus necessary nutritional supplements. In some embodiments, the medium also contains a selection agent, selected on the basis of the expression vector construct, to selectively allow the growth of prokaryotic cells containing the expression vector. For example, ampicillin is added to the medium for growth of cells expressing the ampicillin-resistant gene.
Any necessary supplement may also be included in addition to carbon, nitrogen and inorganic phosphate sources at the appropriate concentrations introduced alone or as a mixture with another supplement or medium such as a complex source of nitrogen. Optionally, the culture medium may contain one or more reducing agents selected from the group consisting of glutathione, cysteine, cystamine, thioglycollate, dithioerythritol, and dithiothreitol.
Prokaryotic host cells are grown in
<img file="MX356367B_D0181.tif" />
176 adequate temperatures. For E. coli growth, for example, the preferred temperature ranges are from about 20 ° C to about 39 ° C, more preferably from about 25 ° C to about 37 ° C, even more preferably at about 30 ° C. The pH of the medium can be any pH ranging from about 5 to about 9, depending mainly on the host organism. For E. coli, the pH is preferably from about 6.8 to about 7.4 and more preferably from about 7.0.
If an inducible promoter is used in the expression vector of the invention, protein expression is induced under conditions suitable for promoter activation. In one aspect of the invention, PhoA promoters are used to control transcription of polypeptides. Accordingly, the transformed host cells are cultured in a phosphate limiting medium for induction. Preferably the phosphate limiting medium is the CRAP medium (see, eg, Simmons et al., J. Immunol. Methods., (2002) 263: 133-147). A variety of other inductors can be used in accordance with the vector construction employed as known in the art.
The expressed antibody proteins of the present invention are secreted into and recovered from the periplasm of the host cells. Recovery of
177
<img file="MX356367B_D0182.tif" />
Protein typically involves breaking down the microorganism, generally by means such as osmotic shock, sonication, or lysis. Once cells are disrupted, cell powder or whole cells can be removed by centrifugation or filtration, further purified, by resin affinity chromatography. Alternatively, proteins can be transported to and isolated from the culture medium. Cells can be removed from the culture and the culture supernatant filtered and concentrated for further purification of the proteins produced. The expressed polypeptides can be further isolated and identified using commonly known methods such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE) and Western blot assay.
Alternatively, the production of antibodies is conducted in large numbers by a fermentation process. Various large-scale feed batch fermentation procedures are available for the production of recombinant proteins. Large-scale fermentations are at least 1,000 liters capacity, preferably approximately 1,000 to 100,000 liters capacity. These thermenters use shaker propellers to distribute oxygen and nutrients, especially glucose (the preferred source of
Proteins can example, by
178
IMPI
INSTITUT · B * ICANO ΜίΑΤΜΠΗΜΟ
INOI ISTMIA!
<img file="MX356367B_D0183.tif" />
carbon / energy). Small fermentation '' yyuá'i'S Sé 'generally refers to fermentation in a mixer that is not more than about 100 liters in volumetric capacity and can range from about lv liter to about 100 liters.
During the fermentation process, induction of protein expression typically begins after cells have been cultured under suitable conditions at a desired density, eg, an OD<sub>550</sub> approximately 180-220, at which stage the cells are in the early stationary phase. A variety of inductors can be used, according to the vector construction employed, as known in the art and described above. Cells can be cultured for shorter periods prior to induction. Cells are commonly induced for approximately 12 to 50 hours, although a longer or shorter induction time can be used.
To improve the production yield and quality of the antibodies of the invention, various fermentation conditions can be modified. For example, to improve proper assembly and folding of secreted antibody polypeptides, additional vectors can be used that overexpress the accompanying proteins, such as Dsb (DsbA, DsbB, DsbC, DsbD and or DsbG) or FkpA (a peptidylprolil cis , trans-
<img file="MX356367B_D0184.tif" />
179
<img file="MX356367B_D0185.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE RRORISBAD
INDUSTRIAL isomerase with companion activity) for <sup>1</sup>1st-fránstormaT prokaryotic host cells. Accompanying proteins have been shown to facilitate proper folding and solubility of heterologous proteins produced in bacterial host cells. Chen et al., (1999) J. Bio Chem., 274: 19601-19605; Georgiou et al., US Patent No. 6,083,715; Georgiou et al., US Patent No. 6,027,888; Bothmann and Plückthun (2000) J. Biol. Chem., 275: 17100-17105; Ramm and Plückthun (2000) J. Biol. Chem., 275: 17106-17113; Arie et al., (2001) Mol. Microbiol., 39: 199-210.
To minimize proteolysis of expressed heterologous proteins (especially those that are proteolytically sensitive), certain host strains deficient in proteolytic enzymes can be used for the present invention. For example, host cell strains can be modified to effect genetic mutation (s) in genes encoding known bacterial proteases such as Protease III, OmpT, DegP, Tsp, Protease I, Protease Mi, Protease V, Protease VI and combinations thereof. Some protease deficient strains of E-coli are available and are described, for example, in Joly et al., (1998), supra; Georgiou et al., US Patent No. 5,264,365; Georgiou et al., US Patent No. 5,508,192; Hara et al., Microbial Drug Resistance, 2: 63-72 (1996).
E. coli strains deficient in enzymes
<img file="MX356367B_D0186.tif" />
180 Proteolytic and transformed with plasmids that overexpress one or more accompanying proteins can be used as host cells in the expression system that encodes the antibodies of the invention.
d) Antibody purification
The antibody protein produced herein is further purified to obtain preparations that are substantially homogeneous for additional assays and uses. Standard protein purification methods known in the art can be employed. The following procedures are exemplary of suitable purification procedures: fractionation on immunoaffinity or ion exchange columns, precipitation on ethanol, reverse phase HPLC, chromatography on silica or on a cation exchange resin such as DEAE, chromato focus, SDS- PAGE, ammonium sulfate precipitation, and gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex G-75.
In one aspect, protein A immobilized on a solid phase is used for immunoaffinity purification of the full length antibody products of the invention. Protein A is a 41 kD cell wall protein from Staphylococcus aureus, which binds with high affinity to the Fe region of antibodies. Lindmark et al., (1983) J. Immunol. Meth., 62: 1-13. The solid phase to which protein A is immobilized is preferably a column
<img file="MX356367B_D0187.tif" />
181 comprising a glass or silica surface, more preferably a controlled pore glass column or a silicic acid column. In some applications, the column has been coated with a reagent, such as glycerol, in an attempt to prevent nonspecific adherence of contaminants. The solid phase is then washed to remove contaminants not specifically bound to the solid phase. Finally, the antibody of interest is recovered in the solid phase by elution.
2. Production of Antibodies in Cells
Eukaryotic
For eukaryotic expression, the components of the vector generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following, a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence.
a) Signal sequence component
A vector for use in a eukaryotic host may also be an insert that encodes a signal sequence or other polypeptide that has a specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide. The selected heterologous signal sequence is preferably one recognized and processed (ie, divided by a signal peptidase) by the host cell. In the
<img file="MX356367B_D0188.tif" />
182 In mammalian cellular expression, mammalian signal sequences as well as viral secretory guides are available, eg, herpes simplex gD signal.
The DNA for such a precursor region is linked in a reading frame to the DNA encoding the antibodies of the invention.
b) Origin of replication
Generally, the origin of replication component is not required for mammalian expression vectors (the SV40 origin can typically be used only because it contains the early promoter).
c) Selection of the gene component
Expression and cloning vectors can contain a selection gene, also called a selectable marker. Typical selection genes encode for proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics other than toxins, eg, ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) auxotropic deficiencies to complement, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available from the medium complex, eg, the gene coding for D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
An example of a selection scheme uses a drug to arrest the growth of a host cell. Cells that successfully transform with a gene
183
IMPI
MSXJCANC INSTITUTE
DF THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0189.tif" />
heterologous they produce a protein that confers resénFéncT ^ crl '- drug and therefore they survive the selection regime. Examples of such a dominant selection use the drugs neomycin, mycophenolic acid, and hygromycin.
Another example of suitable selectable markers for mammalian cells are those that allow the identification of cells competent to absorb the nucleic acid encoding the antibodies of the invention, such as DHFR, thymidine kinase, metallothionein-I and II, preferably genes of primate metallothionein, adenosine deaminase, ornithine decarboxylase, etc.
For example, cells transformed with the DHFR selection gene are first identified by culturing all transformers in a culture medium containing methotrexate (Mtx), a competitive DHFR antagonist. An appropriate host cell when wild-type DHFR is employed is the Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cell line deficient in DHFR activity (eg, ATCC CRL9096).
Alternatively, host cells (particularly wild-type hosts containing endogenous DHFR) transformed or co-transformed with the DNA sequences encoding the antibodies, wild-type DHFR protein, and another selectable marker such as aminoglycoside 3'-phosphotransferase ( APH), can
<img file="MX356367B_D0190.tif" />
184 selected for cell growth in a medium containing a selection agent for the selectable marker such as an aminoglycosidic antibiotic, eg, kanamycin, neomycin, or G418. See, US Patent No. 4,965,199.
d) Promoter component
Expression and cloning vectors commonly contain a promoter that is recognized by the host organism and is operably linked to the nucleic acid that encodes the desired antibody sequences. Virtually all eukaryotic genes have an AT-rich region located approximately 25 to 30 bases upstream from the site where transcription begins. Another sequence found 70 to 80 bases upstream from the start of transcription for many genes is the CNCAAT region where N can be any nucleotide. At the 3 'end of the eukaryotic majority is an AATAAA sequence that may be the signal for addition of the poly A end to the 3' end of the coding sequence. All of these sequences can be inserted into eukaryotic expression vectors.
Other promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include the poa promoter, - lactamase and lactose promoter systems, alkaline phosphatase promoter, a tryptophan (trp) promoter system, and
<img file="MX356367B_D0191.tif" />
185 hybrid promoters such as the tac promoter. However, other known bacterial promoters are suitable. Promoters for use in bacterial systems will also contain a Shine-Dalgrano (SD) sequence operably linked to the DNA encoding the antibody polypeptide.
Transcription of the antibody polypeptide from vectors into mammalian host cells is controlled, for example, by promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, smallpox virus, adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2). , bovine papilloma virus, avian sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a retrovirus, hepatitis B virus and more preferably simian virus 40 (SV40), from heterologous mammalian promoters, eg, the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter, from heat shock promoters, provided such promoters are compatible with host cell systems.
The early and late promoters of the SV40 virus are conveniently obtained as an SV40 restriction fragment that also contains the SV40 origin of viral replication. The immediate early promoter of human cytomegalovirus is conveniently obtained as a HindIII E restriction fragment. A system for expressing DNA in mammalian hosts using bovine papillomavirus —a
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0192.tif" />
186 as a vector, it is described in US Patent No.
4,419,446. A modification of this system is described in US Patent No. 4,601,978. See also Reyes et al., Nature 297: 598-601 (1982) on the expression of human interferon cDNA in mouse cells under the control of a thymidine kinase promoter from herpes simplex virus. Alternatively, the long terminal repeat of the Rous sarcoma virus can be used as a promoter.
e) Improver element component
Transcription of a DNA encoding the antibodies of this invention by major eukaryotes is frequently increased by inserting an enhancer sequence into the vector. Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, α-fetoprotein, and insulin). However, an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus will typically be used. Examples include the SV40 enhancer on the last side of the origin of replication (bp 100270), the early promoter enhancer the polyoma enhancer on the last replication, and adenovirus enhancers. Nature 297: 17-18 (1982) on activation elements of eukaryotic promoters. divide into the vector at a 5 'coding position for antibody, but for cytomegalovirus, origin side See also Yaniv, enhancers for
The enhancer may or 3 'to the sequence preferably be
<img file="MX356367B_D0193.tif" />
187
ΙΜΡΙ
IHSniUTO MEXJCAN *
FROM '.Λ PROPERTY' NIHISTRIAI.
locate at site 5 'from the developer. ——
f) Transcription Termination Component Expression vectors used in eukaryotic host cells (yeast, fungal, insect, plant, amino, human, or nuclear cells of other multicellular organisms) will also contain certain sequences necessary for transcription termination and to stabilize the mRNA. Such sequences are commonly available from the 5 'and occasionally 3' untranslated regions of eukaryotic or viral DNAs or cDNAs. These regions contain nucleotide segments transcribed as polyadenylated fragments in the untranslated portion of the mRNA encoding the antibody. A useful transcription termination component is the polyadenylation region of bovine growth hormone. See WO 94/11026 and the expression vector described herein.
g) Selection and transformation of host cells Host cells suitable for cloning and expression of DNA in vectors herein include larger eukaryotic cells described herein, including vertebrate host cells. Propagation of vertebrate cells in culture (tissue culture) has become a routine procedure. Examples of useful mammalian host cell lines are the monkey kidney CVl line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL
188
MEXICAN PROPERTY PROPERTY • NDL'STRIAl
<img file="MX356367B_D0194.tif" />
1651); the human embryonic kidney line (293 s<sup>1</sup> 2-9-9 subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen. Virol., 36.59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese / -DHFR hamster ovary cells (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 77: 4216 (1980)); mouse sertoli cells (TM4,
Mather., Biol. Reprod., 23: 243-251 (1980); monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TR1 cells (Mather et al., Annals. NY Acad. Sci. 383: 44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2).
Host cells are transformed with the vector expression or cloning described above for antibody production and cultured in standard modified nutrient medium as appropriate to induce promoters, select transformers, or amplify genes encoding the desired sequences.
h) Culture of host cells
The host cells used to produce the
189
ΙΝΠΓΓυτο MOJCMIO 'fcéZ-Z-Zr-fjl, I heard the property Y'Wb-Ü * Go To
INDUSTRIAL> T »- '' antibody of this invention can be grown in a variety of media. Commercially available media such as Ham's FIO (Sigma), Minimal Essential Medium (MEM) (Sigma), RPMI-1640 (Sigma), and Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM), (Sigma) are suitable for culturing host cells . Furthermore, any of the means described in Ham et al., Meth. Enz., 58:44 (1979), Barnes et al., Anal.
Biochem., 102: 255 (1980), US Patent Nos. 4,767,704,
4,657,866, 4,927,762, 4,560,655 or 5,122,469; WO 90/03430; WO
87/00195; or US Patent Re. 30,985 can be used as a culture medium for host cells. Any of these media can be supplemented as needed with hormones and / or other growth factors (such as insulin, transferrin, or epidermal growth factor), salts (such as sodium, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate chloride), buffers (such as HEPES), nucleotides (such as adenosine and thymidine), antibiotics (such as the drug GENTAMYCIN ™), trace elements (defined as inorganic compounds commonly present in final concentrations in the micromolar range) and glucose or an equivalent energy source. Any other necessary supplement may also be included in appropriate concentrations that would be known to those skilled in the art. The culture conditions, such as temperature, pH and the like, are those previously
<img file="MX356367B_D0195.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0196.tif" />
190 used with the host cell selected for expression and will be apparent to the technician of ordinary experience.
i) Purification of the antibody
When using recombinant techniques, the antibody can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium. If the antibody is produced intracellularly, as a first step, particulate dust is removed from either host cells or lysed fragments, for example, by centrifugation or ultrafiltration. Carter et al., Bio / Technology 10: 163-167 (1992) describe a procedure to isolate antibodies that are secreted into the periplasmic space of E. coli. Briefly, the cell paste is frozen in the presence of sodium acetate (pH 3.5), EDTA, and phenylmethylsulfonylfluoride (PMSF) for approximately 30 minutes. Cell powder can be removed by centrifugation. When the antibody is secreted into the medium, supernatants from such expression systems are generally concentrated first using a commercially available protein concentration filter, eg, an Amicon or Millipore Pellicon ultrafiltration unit. A protease inhibitor such as PMSF can be included in any of the previous steps to inhibit proteolysis and antibiotics can be included to prevent
191
<img file="MX356367B_D0197.tif" />
growth of adventitious contaminants,
The antibody composition prepared from the cells can be purified using, for example, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, and affinity chromatography, with affinity chromatography being the preferred purification technique. The suitability of protein A as an affinity ligand depends on the species and isotype of any immunoglobulin Fc domain that is present in the antibody. Protein A can be used to purify antibodies that are based on human immunoglobulins containing 1, 2 or 4 heavy chains (Lindmark et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 62: 1-13 (1983)). Protein G is recommended for all mouse isotypes and for human 3 (Guss et al., EMBO J. 5: 1567-1575 (1986). The matrix to which the affinity ligand is coupled is frequently agarose, but other matrices are available. Mechanically stable matrices such as controlled pore glass or poly (styrene-divinyl) benzene allow for faster flow rates and shorter processing times than can be achieved with agarose. When the antibody comprises a C domain<sub>H</sub>3, Bakerbond ABX ™ resin (JT Baker, Phillipsburg, NJ) is useful for purification. Other techniques for protein purification such as fractionation on an ion exchange column,
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0198.tif" />
192 ethanol precipitation, reverse phase HPLC, silica chromatography, heparin chromatography
SEPHAROSE ™, chromatography on an anion or cation exchange resin (such as a polyaspartic acid column), chromato focus, SDS-PAGE, and ammonium sulfate precipitation are also available depending on the antibody to be recovered.
After any preliminary purification step, the mixture comprising the antibody of interest and the contaminants can be subjected to low pH hydrophobic interaction chromatography using an elution buffer at a pH between about 2.5-4.5, preferably carried out at low salt concentrations (eg, approximately 0-0.24 M salt).
C. Antibody Preparation
1) Polyclonal antibodies
Polyclonal antibodies are generally generated in animals by multiple subcutaneous (se) or intraperitoneal (ip) injections of the relevant antigen and an adjuvant. It may be useful to conjugate the relevant antigen to a protein that is immunogenic in the species to be immunized, eg, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, or soybean trypsin inhibitor, using a bifunctional agent or of derivatization, eg, ester of (>.
\ i
193 inst ιτστο auxicanq PE THE PROPERTY '►OUSTPIAI maleimidobenzoyl sulfosuccinimide (conjugation through cysteine residues), N-hydroxysuccinimide (through lysine residues), glutaraldehyde, succinic anhydride, SOCI2 or R<sup>1</sup>N = C = NR, where R and R<sup>1</sup> they are independently lower alkyl groups. Examples of adjuvants that can be employed include Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl lipid A, synthetic trehalose dichorinomycoate). The immunization protocol can be selected by one skilled in the art without undue experimentation.
Animals are immunized against the antigen, immunogenic conjugates or derivatives, combining, eg, 100 pg or 5 pg of the protein or conjugate (for rabbits or mice, respectively) with 3 volumes of complete Freund's adjuvant and injecting the solution in a consistent manner. intradermal at multiple sites. One month later, animals are boosted with 1/5 to 1/10 of the original amount of the peptide or conjugate in complete Freund's adjuvant by subcutaneous injection at multiple sites. Seven to fourteen days later, animals are bled and serum is analyzed by antibody titration. Animals are boosted until titration stabilizes. Conjugates can also be produced by recombinant cell culture as protein fusions. Aggregation agents such as alumina are also suitable to improve response
194
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL MONEDAD
<img file="MX356367B_D0199.tif" />
i nmun e. '
2) Monoclonal antibodies
Monoclonal antibodies are obtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, ie, the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally-occurring mutations and / or post-translational modifications (eg, isomerizations, nests) that may be present in smaller amounts. Therefore, the monoclonal modifier indicates the character of the antibody, not being a mixture of discrete antibodies.
For example, monoclonal antibodies can be produced using the hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., Nature 256: 495 (1975) or can be produced by recombinant DNA methods (US Patent No. 4,816,567).
In the hybridoma method, a mouse or other appropriate host animal, such as a hamster, is immunized as described above to extract lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the protein used for immunization. Alternatively, the lymphocytes can be immunized in vitro.
The lymphocytes are then fused with myeloma cells using a suitable fusion agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell.
195
<img file="MX356367B_D0200.tif" />
(Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principies and Practice (pp. 59-103 (Academic Press, 1986).
The immunizing agent will typically include the antigenic protein or a fusion variant thereof. Generally, either peripheral blood lymphocytes (PBLs) are used if cells of human origin are desired, or spleen or lymph node cells if non-human mammalian sources are desired. The lymphocytes are then fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusion agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell, Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice (Academic Press, (1986) pp. 59-103.
Immortalized cell lines are commonly transformed mammalian cells, particularly myeloma cells of rodent, bovine, and human origin. Commonly, mouse myeloma cell lines are employed. The hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and cultured in a suitable culture medium preferably containing one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of myeloma cells of unfused origin. For example, if the source myeloma cells lack the enzyme hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT or HPRT), the culture medium for the hybridomas will include
<img file="MX356367B_D0201.tif" />
196
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRY PROPERTY!
typically hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT medium) ',' which are substances that prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.
Preferred immortalized myeloma cells are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high-level production of the antibody by selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. Among these, murine myeloma lines, such as those derived from mouse tumors MOPC-21 and MPC-11 available from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center, San Diego, California USA, and SP-2 cells (and their derivatives) are preferred. , eg, X63-Ag8-653) available from the American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Virginia USA. Mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines for the production of human monoclonal antibodies have also been described (Kozbor, J. Immunol., 133: 3001 (1984); Brodeur et al., Monoclonal
Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, pp. 51-63 (Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1987)).
The culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are grown is analyzed by the production of monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen. Preferably, the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies produced by cells of
197
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE TXOPIEDAI? INDUSTMIAI
<img file="MX356367B_D0202.tif" />
Hybridoma is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as a radioimmunoassay (RIA) or an enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA).
The culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are grown can be analyzed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed against the desired antigen. Preferably, the affinity and binding specificity of the monoclonal antibody can be determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as a radioimmunoassay (RIA) or an enzyme-linked assay (ELISA). Such techniques and tests are known in the art. For example, binding affinity can be determined by Scatchard analysis from Munson et al., Anal. Biochem., 107: 220 (1980).
After identifying the hybridoma cells that produce antibodies of the desired specificity, affinity and / or activity, the clones can be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and culturing by standard methods (Goding, supra). Suitable culture medium for this purpose includes, for example, D-MEM or RPMI-1640 medium. Furthermore, hybridoma cells can be cultured in vivo as tumors in a mammal.
The monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones are adequately separated from the culture medium, from the <sub>198</sub> IMPI <sup>±: yO</sup> ΙΝ'ΤΓΠΓΓΟ MEXICAN
M THE NlOt'iEDAp INDUSTRY!
ascitic fluid, or serum by standard immunoglobulin purification procedures such as, for example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
Monoclonal antibodies can also be produced by recombinant DNA methods, such as those described in US Patent No. 4,816,567, and as described above. DNA encoding monoclonal antibodies is easily isolated and sequenced using standard procedures (eg, using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding for heavy and light chains of murine antibodies). Hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of such DNA. Once isolated, DNA can be placed in expression vectors that are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells than other cells. They do not produce the immunoglobulin protein in order to synthesize the monoclonal antibodies in such recombinant host cells. The review of articles on recombinant expression in bacteria of DNA encoding the antibody includes Skerra et al., Curr. Opinion in Immunol., 5: 256-262 (1993) and Plückthun, Immunol. Revs., 130: 151-188
<img file="MX356367B_D0203.tif" />
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0204.tif" />
199 (1992).
In a further embodiment, the antibodies can be isolated from antibody phage libraries generated using the techniques described in McCafferty et al., Nature, 348: 552-554 (1990). Clackson et al., Nature, 352:
624-628 (1991) and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222: 581-597 (1991) describe the isolation of murine and human antibodies, respectively, using phage libraries. Subsequent publications describe the production of high affinity human antibodies (nM range) by chain-dragging (Marks et al., Bio / Technology, 10: 779-783 (1992)), as well as combinatorial infection and recombination in vivo as a strategy to build very large libraries (Waterhouse et al., Nucí. Acids Res., 21: 2265-2266 (1993)). Therefore, these techniques are viable alternatives to traditional monoclonal antibody hybridoma techniques for the isolation of monoclonal antibodies.
DNA can also be modified, for example, by substituting human heavy and light chain constant domains for the coding sequence in place of the homologous murine sequences (US Patent No. 4,816,567; Morrison et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci ., USA 81: 6851 (1984)) or by covalently binding all or part of the coding sequence to the immunoglobulin coding sequence
<img file="MX356367B_D0205.tif" />
200 for a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide. Typically, such non-immunoglobulin polypeptides are replaced by the constant domains of an antibody or are substituted by the variable domains of an antigen combining site of an antibody to create a bivalent chimeric antibody comprising an antigen combining site having specificity. for one antigen and another antigen combining site that has specificity for a different antigen.
The monoclonal antibodies described herein can be monovalent, the preparation of which is well known in the art. For example, the method involves recombinant expression of the immunoglobulin light chain and a modified heavy chain. The heavy chain is generally truncated at any point in the Fe region in order to avoid crosslinking of the heavy chain. Alternatively, the relevant cysteine residues can be substituted with another amino acid residue or deleted in order to avoid crosslinking. In vitro methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are also suitable. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
Chimeric or hybrid antibodies can also be prepared in vitro using methods known in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving
201
ΪΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OE industrial PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0206.tif" />
crosslinking agents. For example, they may cons t'riii r ^ S<sup>1 </sup>immunotoxins using a disulfide exchange reaction or forming a thioether linkage. Examples of reagents suitable for this purpose include iminothiolate and methyl-4-mercaptobutyrimidate.
3) Humanized Antibodies
The antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized or human antibodies. Humanized forms of non-human (eg, murine) antibodies are chimeric immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin chains, or fragments thereof) such as Fv, Fab, Fab ', F (ab')<sub>2</sub> or other antigen-binding antibody sub-sequences) containing minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which the residues of a complementarity determining region (CDR) (HVR as used herein) of the recipient are replaced by residues of a CDR from a non-human species (donor antibody ) such as from mouse, rat or rabbit having the desired specificity, affinity and capacity. In some examples, the Fv residues of human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non-human residues. Humanized antibodies may also comprise residues that are found neither in the recipient antibody nor in the CDR or sequences.
202
ΪΜΡΙ® ^
INSTITUTE ΜβΛλΝΟ OF «(QUEDAD (n.dustriai * -” imported framework. In general, the antibody —- humailUzadü ---- will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, of the variable domains in which all or Substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin, and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence. The optimally humanized antibody will also comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin (Fe) constant region, typically that of a human immunoglobulin. Jones et al., Nature 321: 522-525; Riechman et al., Nature 322: 323-329 (1988) and Presta, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol., 2: 593-596 (1992).
Methods for humanizing non-human antibodies are well known in the art. Generally, a humanized antibody has one or more amino acid residues introduced into it from a non-human source. These non-human amino acid residues are frequently referred to as imported residues, which are typically taken from an imported variable domain. Humanization can be carried out essentially by following the method of Winter et al., Jones et al., Nature 321: 522-525 (1986); Riechman et al., Nature 332: 323-327 (1988); Verhoeyen et al., Science 239: 1534-1536 (1988) or through the replacement of rodent CDRs or CDR sequences, π, IMPI
203 INSTJTUTB MBXICANO, -D «LA PROPIBUAO Λ industrial
<img file="MX356367B_D0207.tif" />
for the corresponding sequences of a human antibody. Accordingly, such humanized antibodies are chimeric antibodies (US Patent No. 4,816,567), wherein substantially less of an intact human variable domain has been replaced by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species. In practice, humanized antibodies are typically human antibodies in which some CDR residues and possibly some FR residues are replaced by residues from analogous sites in rodent antibodies.
Selection of human variable domains, both light and heavy, for use in the production of humanized antibodies is very important in reducing antigenicity. In accordance with the so-called best adapted method, the variable domain sequence of a rodent antibody is selected against the entire library of known human variable domain sequences. The human sequence that is closest to that of the rodent is then accepted as the human structure (FR) for the humanized antibody. Sims et al., J. Immunol., 151: 2296 (1993); Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol., 196: 901 (1987). Another method uses a particular structure derived from the consensus sequence of all human antibodies to a particular light or heavy chain subgroup. The same structure can be used for various antibodies
204
ΪΜΡΙ iNrrrr τ · Mexican »ϊ IA RXOHEDAO INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0208.tif" />
different humanized. Carter et al., Proc., .., Nati - Asad - Sci. USA 89: 4285 (1992); Presta et al., J. Immunol., 151: 2623 (1993).
probable of selected.
Furthermore, it is important that the antibodies are humanized with high affinity retention for the antigen and with other favorable biological properties. To achieve this purpose, according to a preferred method, humanized antibodies are prepared by a process of origin sequence analysis and various conceptual humanized products using three-dimensional models of the origin and humanized sequences. Three-dimensional immunoglobulin models are commonly available and familiar to those skilled in the art. Computer programs are available that illustrate and display the three-dimensional conformational structures of candidate immunoglobulin sequences. Inspection of these visualizations allows analysis of the likely role of residues in the functioning of the candidate immunoglobulin sequence, ie, analysis of residues influencing the ability of the candidate immunoglobulin to bind to its antigen. In this way, FR residues can be selected and combined from the · container and imported sequences in order to achieve the desired characteristic of the antibody, such as increased affinity for the target antigen (s).
205
MPIte πτυτο Mexican í
-%*·
INSTITUTE
DT LA THOHEDAD INDUSTRIA *
In general, CDR residues are di re oJt ^ —y —— plus ·· - · '··' substantially involved in influencing binding to the antigen.
Various forms of the humanized antibody are contemplated. For example, the humanized antibody may be an antibody fragment, such as a Fab, that is optionally conjugated to one or more cytotoxic agents in order to generate an immunoconjugate. Alternatively, the humanized antibody can be an intact antibody, such as an intact IgGl antibody.
4) Human antibodies
As an alternative to humanization, human antibodies can be generated. For example, it is now possible to produce transgenic animals (eg, mice) that are capable, upon immunization, of producing a complete repertoire of human antibodies in the absence of endogenous immunoglobulin production. For example, homozygous deletion of the antibody heavy chain binding region gene (J<sub>H</sub>) in germline mutant mice results in complete inhibition of endogenous antibody production. Transfer of the human germline immunoglobulin gene array into such germline mutant mice will result in the production of human antibodies to antigen challenge. See, eg, Jakobovits et al.,
Proc. Nati. Acad.
<img file="MX356367B_D0209.tif" />
Sci. USA 90: 2551 (1993); Jakobovits et al., Nature, 3 ^: 7255258 (1993); Bruggermann et al., Year in Immuno., 7:33 (1993); US Patent Nos. 5,591,669 and WO 97/17852.
Alternatively phage display technology can be used to produce human antibodies and antibody fragments in vitro from immunoglobulin variable domain (V) gene repertoires from non-immunized donors. McCafferty et al., Nature 348: 552-553 (1990); Hoogenboom and Winter, J. Mol. Biol., 227: 381 (1991). According to this technique, antibody domain V genes are cloned in-frame into either a larger or smaller coat protein gene from a filamentous bacteriophage, such as M13 or fd, and deployed as functional antibody fragments on the phage particle surface. Because the filamentous particle contains a single-stranded DNA copy of the phage genome, selections based on the functional properties of the antibody also result in the selection of the gene encoding the antibody that exhibits those properties. Thus, phage mimics some of the properties of cell B. Phage display can be carried out in a variety of formats, reviewed in, eg, Johnson, Kevin S, and Chiswell, David J. Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol., 3: 564-571 (1993). Various sources of V gene segments can be used for phage display. Clackson et al.,
<img file="MX356367B_D0210.tif" />
207
Nature 352: 624-628 (1991) isolated a diverse array of anti-oxazolone antibodies from a small random combinatorial library of V genes derived from spleens of immunized mice. A repertoire of V genes from unimmunized human donors can be constructed and antibodies to a diverse array of antigens (including self-antigens) can be isolated essentially following the techniques described by Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222: 581-597 (1991) or Griffith et al., EMBO J. 12: 725-734 (1993). See also US Patent Nos. 5,565,332 and 5,573,905.
The techniques of Colé et al., And Boerner et al., Are also available for the preparation of human monoclonal antibodies (colé et al., Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy) Alan R. Liss, p. 77 (1985) and Boerner et al., J.
Immunol., 147 (1): 86-95 (1991). Similarly, human antibodies can be produced by introducing human immunoglobulin sites into transgenic animals, eg, mice in which the endogenous immunoglobulin genes have been partially or completely inactivated. When tested, human antibody production is observed, which closely resembles that seen in humans in all respects, including gene rearrangement, assembly, and antibody repertoire. This procedure is described,
<img file="MX356367B_D0211.tif" />
208 for example, in US Patent Nos., 5,545,807; 5,545,806, 5,569,825, 5,625,126, 5,663,425, 5,661,016 and in the following scientific publications: Marks et al., Bio / Technology 10: 779-783 (1992); Lonberg et al., Nature
368: 856-859 (1994); Morrison, Nature 368: 812-13 (1994),
Fishwild et al., Nature Biotechnology 14: 845-51 (1996),
Neuberger, Nature Biotechnology 14: 826 (1996) and Lonberg and
Huszar, Intern. Rev. Immunol., 13: 65-93 (1995).
Finally, human antibodies can also be generated in vitro by activated B cells (see US Patent Nos. 5,567,610 and 5,229,275).
5) Antibody fragments
In certain circumstances there are advantages to using antibody fragments, rather than complete antibodies. Smaller fragment sizes allow for quick cleaning and can lead to improved access to solid tumors.
Various techniques have been developed for the production of antibody fragments. Traditionally, these fragments were derived by proteolytic digestion of intact antibodies (see, eg, Morrison et al., J. Biochem. Biophys. Method., 24: 107-117 (1992); and Brennan et al., Science 229: 81. (1985)). However, these fragments can now be produced directly by recombinant host cells. Antibody fragments Fab, Fv and scFv
209
IM F!
BtSTTTUTO MflllCAftO 'x -' ^ wSrtíjí<sup>1 </sup>OF PRONITY 1 “1ιιΓ *! FlT INDUSTRIAL can all be expressed in and secreted from E. coli, 'thus allowing the easy production of large quantities of these fragments. Antibody fragments can be isolated from the phage libraries of antibodies discussed above. Alternatively, Fab'-SH fragments can be directly recovered from E. coli and chemically coupled to form F (ab ') fragments.<sub>2</sub> (Carter et al., Bio / Technology 10: 163-167 (1992)). According to another procedure, fragments F (ab ')<sub>2</sub> they can be isolated directly from the recombinant host cell culture. Fab and F (ab ')<sub>2</sub> with increased in vivo half-lives are described in US Patent No. 5,869,046. In other embodiments, the selected antibody is a single-chain Fv fragment (scFv). See WO 93/16185; US Patent No. 5,571,894 and
US Patent No. 5,587,458. The antibody fragment can also have a linear antibody, eg, as described in US Patent No. 5,641,870. Such linear antibody fragments can be monospecific or bispecific.
6) Antibody Dependent Enzyme Mediated Prodrug Therapy (ADEPT)
The antibodies of the present invention can also be used in ADEPT by conjugating the antibody to a prodrug activating enzyme that converts a prodrug (eg, a peptidyl chemotherapeutic agent, see WO
<img file="MX356367B_D0212.tif" />
210
81/01145) in an active anti-cancer drug. See, for example, WO 88/07378 and US Patent No. 4,975,278.
The enzyme component of the immunoconjugate useful for ADEPT includes any enzyme capable of acting in a prodrug in such a way that it converts it to its most active cytotoxic form.
Enzymes that are useful in the method of this invention include, but are not limited to, glycosidase, glucose oxidase, human lysozyme, human glucuronidase, alkaline phosphatase useful for converting phosphate-containing prodrugs into free drugs; alkylsulfatase useful for converting sulfate-containing prodrugs into free drugs; Cytosine deaminase useful for converting non-toxic 5-fluorocytosine to the anti-cancer drug 5-fluoroacyl; proteases, such as serratia protease, thermolysin, subtilisin, carboxypeptidases (eg, carboxypeptidase G2 and carboxypeptidase A) and cathepsins (such as cathepsins B and L), which are useful for converting peptide-containing prodrugs into free drugs; Dalanylcarboxypeptidases, useful for converting prodrugs containing D-amino acid substituents; carbohydrate cleaving enzymes such as β-galactosidase and neuraminidase useful for converting glycosylated prodrugs to free drugs; β-lactamase useful for converting β-lactam derivatized drugs to free drugs; and penicillin
WSTnVTO ΜΧΛΟβκη. -> '
Vamidase or penicillin G drugs derivatized into phenoxyacetyl groups or free drugs.
with enzymatic activity,
211 amidases, such as penicillin amidase, useful for converting their amine nitrogens with phenylacetyl, respectively,
Alternatively, antibodies also known in the art as abzymes can be used to convert the prodrugs of the invention to free active drugs (see eg, Massey, Nature 328: 457458 (1987)). Antibody-abzyme conjugates can be prepared as described herein for delivery of the abzyme to a tumor cell population.
The above enzymes can be covalently linked to the polypeptide or to the antibodies described herein by techniques well known in the art such as the use of the heterobifunctional crosslinking agents discussed above. Alternatively, fusion proteins comprising at least the antigen binding region of the antibody of the invention linked to at least one functionally active portion of an enzyme of the invention can be constructed using recombinant DNA techniques well known in the art (see, eg, Neuberger et al., Nature 312: 604-608 (1984)).
7) Bispecific and polyspecific antibodies Bispecific antibodies (BsAbs) are antibodies that have binding specificities for al
212
<img file="MX356367B_D0213.tif" />
In order to focus and minus two different epitopes, including those on Tia herself or another protein. Alternatively, one arm can bind to the target antigen and another arm can combine with an arm that binds to an activator molecule on a leukocyte such as a T cell receptor molecule (eg, CD3), or to IgG (FcyR) receptors such as FcyRI (CD64), FcyRII (CD32) and FcyRIII (CD16), locate cellular defense mechanisms to the cell that expresses the target antigen. Such antibodies can be derived from full-length antibodies or from antibody fragments (eg, F (ab ') 2 bispecific antibodies) ·
Bispecific antibodies can also be used to locate cytotoxic agents to cells that express the target antigen. Such antibodies possess one arm that binds to the desired antigen and another arm that binds to the cytotoxic agent (eg, saporin, anti-interferon-α, vinca alkaloid, ricin A chain, methotrexate, or radioactive isotope hapten). Examples of known bispecific antibodies include anti-Erb2 / anti-FcgRIII (WO 96/16673), anti-Erb2 / anti-FcgRI (US Patent 5,837,234), antiErb2 / anti-CD3 (US Patent 5,821,337).
Methods of producing bispecific antibodies are known in the art. Traditional production of full-length bispecific antibodies is based on the co-expression of two pairs of heavy-light / light chain of <s> ~ -
<img file="MX356367B_D0214.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0215.tif" />
213
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DE LA PROÍ-iEUAr) nnusTíiAi immunoglobulin, where the two chains have different specificities. Millstein et al., Nature, 305: 537-539 (1983). Due to random selection of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, these hybridomas (quadromas) produce a potential mixture of 10 different antibody molecules, of which only one has the correct bispecific structure. Purification of the correct molecule, which is commonly done by affinity chromatography steps, is somewhat cumbersome, and product yields are low. Similar procedures are described in WO 93/08829 and in Traunecker et al., EMBO J. 10: 3655-3659 (1991).
According to a different procedure, the antibody variable domains with the desired binding specificities (antigenic antibody combining sites) are fused to the immunoglobulin constant domain sequences. The fusion is preferably with an immunoglobulin heavy chain constant domain, comprising at least part of the joint regions CH2 and CH3. It is preferred that the first heavy chain constant region (CH1) contains the site necessary for light chain binding, present in at least one of the fusions. DNAs encoding immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, immunoglobulin light chain, are inserted into expression vectors
<img file="MX356367B_D0216.tif" />
214
ΙΜΙ
MFWCANO INSTITUTE.
SAY LA moMÍOAD *
INDUSTRIAL * ·> - '«V ** separated and co-transfected into a suitable host organism. This provides great flexibility in adjusting the mutual proportions of the three polypeptide fragments in modalities where the unequal proportions of the three polypeptide chains used in construction provide optimal yields. However, it is possible to insert the coding sequences for two or all of the three polypeptide chains into an expression vector when the expression of at least two polypeptide chains in equal proportions results in high yields or when the proportions are not significant. particular.
In a preferred embodiment of this procedure, bispecific antibodies are comprised of an immunoglobulin hybrid heavy chain with a first binding specificity on one arm and an immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain hybrid pair (providing a second binding specificity) on the other arm. This asymmetric structure was found to facilitate separation of the desired bispecific compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, since the presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only half of the bispecific molecules provides an easy way of separation. This procedure is described in WO 94/04690. For additional details of bispecific antibody generation, see,
<img file="MX356367B_D0217.tif" />
215 for example, Suresh et al., Methods in Enzymology 121: 210 (1986).
In accordance with another procedure described in WO 96/27011 or in US Patent 5,731,168, the interface between a pair of antibody molecules can be manufactured to maximize the percentage of heterodimers that are recovered from the recombinant cell culture. The preferred interface comprises at least part of the CH3 region of an antibody constant domain. In this method, one or more small amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody molecule are replaced with larger side chains (eg, tyrosine or tryptophan). Compensatory cavities of identical or similar size to the large side chain (s) are created at the interface of the second antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with smaller ones (eg, alanine or threonine). This provides a mechanism to increase the performance of the heterodimer over other unwanted end products such as homodimers.
Techniques for generating bispecific antibodies from antibody fragments have been described in the literature. For example, bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical binding. Brennan et al., Science 229: 81 (1985) describe a procedure where intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0218.tif" />
216 generate F (ab ') fragments<sub>2</sub>. These fragments are reduced in the presence of the complexing agent of sodium dithiol arsenite to stabilize the neighboring dithioies and prevent the formation of intermolecular disulfide. The generated Fab 'fragments are then converted to thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives. One of the Fab'-TNB derivatives is then converted to the Fab'-TNB derivative to form the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibodies produced can be used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.
Fab 'fragments can be recovered directly from E. coli and chemically coupled to form bispecific antibodies. Shalaby et al., J. Exp. Med., 175: 217-225 (1992) describe the production of F (ab ') molecules<sub>2</sub> of humanized bispecific antibody. Each Fab 'fragment was secreted separately from E.E. coli and underwent targeted chemical coupling in vitro to form the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibody thus formed was able to bind to cells that overexpress the ErbB2 receptor and normal human T cells, as well as activate the lytic activity of human cytotoxic lymphocytes against targets of human breast tumor.
Various techniques have also been described to produce and isolate bivalent antibody fragments directly from the recombinant cell culture. For example, bivalent heterodimers have been produced using
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0219.tif" />
217 leucine zippers. Kostelny et al., J. Immunol., 148 (5): 1547-1553 (1992). The leucine zipper peptides from the Fos and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab 'portions of two different antibodies by gene fusion. Antibody homodimers were reduced in the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form antibody heterodimers. The diabody technology described by Hollinger et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci., USA 90: 6444-6448 (1993) has provided an alternative mechanism for producing bispecific / monovalent antibody fragments. The fragments comprise a heavy chain variable domain (V<sub>H</sub>) connected to a light chain variable domain (V<sub>L</sub>) via a linker that is too short to allow pairs to form between the two domains on the same chain. Therefore, domains V<sub>H</sub> and V<sub>L</sub> of a fragment are forced to pair with domains V<sub>L</sub> and V<sub>H</sub> complementary to another fragment, thus forming two antigen binding sites. Another strategy for producing bispecific / bivalent antibody fragments through the use of single-chain Fv dimers (sFv) has also been reported. See Gruber et al., J. Immunol.,
147: 60 (1991).
Exemplary bispecific antibodies can bind to two different epitopes on a given molecule. Alternatively, an anti-protein arm can be combined
<img file="MX356367B_D0220.tif" />
218 with an arm that binds to an arti.vadn.pj on _nn leukocyte molecule such as a T cell receptor molecule (eg, CD2, CD3, CD28, or B7) or Fe receptors for IgG (FcyR) such as FcyRI (CD64) , FcyRII (CD32) and FcyRIII (CD16), in order to target cellular defense mechanisms to the cell that expresses the particular protein. Bispecific antibodies can also be used to locate cytotoxic agents to cells that express a particular protein. Such antibodies possess a protein binding arm and an arm that binds to a cytotoxic agent or radionuclide chelate, such as EOTUBE, OPTA, DOTA, or TETA. Another bispecific antibody of interest binds to the protein of interest and binds to tissue factor (TF) as well.
8) Multivalent Antibodies
A multivalent antibody can be internalized (and / or catabolized) faster than a bivalent antibody by a cell that expresses an antigen to which the antibodies bind. The antibodies of the present invention can be multivalent antibodies (which are different from the IgM class) with three or more antigen binding sites (eg, tetravalent antibodies), which can be easily produced by recombinant expression of nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide chains of the antibody. The multivalent antibody can comprise
<img file="MX356367B_D0221.tif" />
219 one dimerization domain and three or more sites? ' give SRT3ce "15T 'antigen. The preferred dimerization domain comprises (or consists of) an Fe region or a hinge region. In this scenario, the antibody will comprise one Fe region and three or more amino-terminal antigen binding sites to the Fe region. The preferred multivalent antibody herein comprises (or consists of) from three to about eight, but preferably four, antigen binding sites. The multivalent antibody comprises at least one polypeptide chain (and preferably two polypeptide chains), wherein the polypeptide chain (s) comprise (s) two or more variable domains. For example, the polypeptide chain (s) may comprise: VD1 (XI)<sub>n</sub>-VD2- (X2) <sub>n</sub>—Fe, where CDI is a first variable domain, VD2 is a second variable domain, Fe is a polypeptide chain of a Fe region, XI and X2 represent an amino acid or polypeptide and n is 0 or 1. For example, the (s ) polypeptide chain (s) may comprise: VH-CHl-flexible linker-VH-CHl-Fc region chain; or VH-CHl-VH-CHl-Fc region chain. The multivalent antibody herein preferably further comprises at least two (and preferably four) light chain variable domain polypeptides. The multivalent antibody herein can comprise, for example, from about two to about eight variable domain polypeptides of
<img file="MX356367B_D0222.tif" />
220
». VAT PI O® * ¡ρπττντο m *! Canü
Ce IA PRCITEGAÜ ί. -.ντΛ * ii'lX.'STPIAL '
Patent light chain. The light chain 'variable' domain polypeptides contemplated herein comprise a light chain variable domain and optionally further comprise a CL domain.
9) Heteroconjugate Antibodies
Heteroconjugate antibodies are also within the scope of the present invention. Heteroconjugate antibodies are made up of two covalently linked antibodies. For example, one of the antibodies in the heteroconjugate can be coupled to avidin, the other to biotin. Such antibodies, for example, have been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells, US Patent 4,676,980, and for the treatment of HIV infection. WO 91/00360, WO 92/200373 and EP 0308936. It is contemplated that antibodies can be prepared in vitro using methods known in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents. For example, immunotoxins can be constructed using a disulfide exchange reaction or forming a thioether linkage. Examples of reagents suitable for this purpose include iminothiolate and methyl 4-mercaptobutyrimidate and those described, for example, in EU No. 4,676,980. Heteroconjugate antibodies can be produced using any convenient crosslinking method.
The agents of
221
IMPI MixRican WRruT OF PROdIyad TNDU «T» iai
<img file="MX356367B_D0223.tif" />
Suitable crosslinking are well known in the r $ ürr ± -cra — y— & © -. described in US Patent No. 4,676,980, along with numerous crosslinking techniques.
10) Effector Function Engineering
It may be desirable to modify the antibody of the invention with respect to the effector function of Fe, eg, in order to modify (eg, improve or eliminate) antigen-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC) and / or cytotoxicity dependent on the complement (CDC) of the antibody. In a preferred embodiment, the Fe effector function of anti-PD-Ll antibodies is reduced or eliminated. This can be accomplished by introducing one or more amino acid substitutions into an Fe region of the antibody. Alternatively or additionally, cysteine residue (s) may be introduced into the Fe region, thus allowing formation of the interchain disulfide bond in this region. The homodimeric antibody thus generated may have improved internalization capacity and / or complement-mediated cell destruction and antibody-dependent cell cytotoxicity (ADCC). See, Carón et al., J. Exp. Med., 176:
1191-1195 (1992) and Shopes, B., J. Immunol., 148: 2918-2922 (1992). Homodimeric antibodies with enhanced antitumor activity can also be prepared using heterobifunctional crosslinkers as described in Wolff et al., Cancer Research 53: 2560-2565 (1993).
222
ΓΙ LA rtOPIf DAU INDUSTRIAl.
Alternatively, an antibody can be made which has double Fc regions and consequently can have enhanced ADCC and complement lysis capabilities. See,
Stevenson et al., Anti-Cancer Drug Design 3: 219-230 (1989).
To increase the serum half-life of the antibody, a salvage receptor binding epitope can be incorporated into the antibody (especially an antibody fragment) as described in US Patent 5,739,277, for example. As used herein, the term salvage receptor binding epitope refers to an epitope from the Fc region of an IgG molecule (eg, IgGi, IgG<sub>2</sub>, IgG3 or IgG<sub>4</sub>) which is responsible for increasing the in vivo serum half-life of the
IgG.
11) Other Sequence Modifications of
Amino acids
Amino acid sequence modification (s) of the antibodies described herein are contemplated. For example, it may be desirable to improve the binding affinity and / or other biological properties of the antibody. Amino acid sequence variants are prepared by introducing the appropriate nucleotide changes into the nucleic acid of the antibody or by peptide synthesis. Such modifications include, for example, deletions of and / or
<img file="MX356367B_D0224.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0225.tif" />
223 insertions in and / or substitutions for, residues within the amino acid sequences of the antibody. Any combination of deletion, insertion, and substitution is made to arrive at the final construction, provided that the final construction has the desired characteristics. Changes in amino acids can also alter the post-translational processes of the antibody, such as the change in the number or position of glycosylation sites.
A useful method for identifying certain antibody residues or regions that are preferred locations for mutagenesis is called alanine scanning mutagenesis as described by Cunningham and Wells in Science 244: 1081-1085 (1989). Here, a target residue or group of residues (eg, charged residues such as arg, asp, his, lys, and glu) is identified and replaced by a neutral or negatively charged amino acid. Amino acid locations that demonstrate functional sensitivity to substitutions are then refined by introducing additional or different variants at, or for, the substitution sites. Thus, although the site for introducing an amino acid sequence variation is predetermined, it is not necessary to predetermine the nature of the mutation per se. For example, to analyze the performance of a mutation at a given site, a wing scan or random mutagenesis is conducted at the codon or
224
ΙΝΠΙΙΙΤΌ MFXICA.'JD i ·
OF PROPERTY CV — Jt. ' . <F 'target region and variants of anti cu erp ¢ 5 ^ * éXpfe s áci'a s' s'é selected by the desired activity.
Amino acid sequence inserts include amino and / or carboxyl terminal fusions ranging in length from one residue to polypeptides containing one hundred or more residues, as well as intrasequence insertions of single or multiple amino acid residues. Examples of terminal inserts include an antibody with an N-terminal methionyl residue or the antibody fused to a cytotoxic polypeptide. Other insertion variants of the antibody molecule include fusion to the N or C terminus of the antibody with an enzyme (eg, for
ADEPT) or a polypeptide that of the antibody.
preferred substitutions.
result a change in the
Another kind of
<td>substitution</td><td colspan="2">of amino acids.</td>
<td>a residue</td><td>of</td><td>amino acid</td>
<td>replaced</td><td>by</td><td>a residue</td>
<td colspan="2">interest for</td><td>mutagenes:</td>
<td colspan="3">hypervariable regions,</td>
<td>alterations</td><td>of</td><td>FR. The</td>
<td>show in</td><td>the</td><td>Table A s</td>
increases serum half-life variant is a variant of
These variants have at least one different antibody molecule. Sites with higher Ls are substituted include but conservative substitutions are also contemplated below under the heading of
If such substitutions give as biological ictivity, then more substantial changes, called exemplary substitutions
225
IMPI
M & 10GAMD INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0226.tif" />
In Table A, or as described, add Irñe ffE * e '”TTt3rS' below with reference to classes of amino acids, products can be entered and selected.
Table A
Amino Acid Substitutions
<td>Original waste</td><td>Substitutions Copies</td><td>Substitutions Preferred</td>
<td>Wing (A)</td><td>val; leu; ile</td><td>val</td>
<td>Arg (R)</td><td>lys; gln; asn</td><td>lys</td>
<td>Asn (N)</td><td>gln; his; asp; lys; arg</td><td>gln</td>
<td>Asp (D)</td><td>glu; asn</td><td>glu</td>
<td>Cys (C)</td><td>to be; to</td><td>to be</td>
<td>Gln (Q)</td><td>asn; glu</td><td>asn</td>
<td>Glu (E)</td><td>asp; gln</td><td>asp</td>
<td>Gly (G)</td><td>to</td><td>to</td>
<td>His (H)</td><td>asn; gln; lys; arg</td><td>arg</td>
<td>I have (I)</td><td>leu; val; met; to; phe; norleucine</td><td>leu</td>
<td>Leu (L)</td><td>Norleucine; ile; val; met; to; phe</td><td>ile</td>
<td>Lys (K)</td><td>arg; gln; asn</td><td>arg</td>
<td>Met (M)</td><td>leu; phe; ile</td><td>leu</td>
<td>Phe (F)</td><td>leu; val; ile; to; tyr</td><td>tyr</td>
<td>Pro (P)</td><td>to</td><td>to</td>
<td>Be (S)</td><td>thr</td><td>thr</td>
<td>Thr (T)</td><td>to be</td><td>to be</td>
<td>Trp (W)</td><td>tyr; phe</td><td>tyr</td>
<td>Tyr (Y)</td><td>trp; phe; thr; to be</td><td>phe</td>
<td>Val (V)</td><td>ile; leu; met; phe; to; norleucine</td><td>leu</td>
226
ΪΜΡΙ ^
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ·
OF INDI ISTRIAL PROPERTY
Substantial modifications in the properties<sup>-</sup>Antibody biologics are accomplished by selecting substitutions that differ significantly in their effect of maintaining (a) the structure of the polypeptide structure in the area of the substitution, for example, as a sheet or helical conformation, (b) loading or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the volume of the side chain. Naturally occurring wastes are divided into groups based on the properties of the common side chain:
(1) hydrophobic: norleucine, met, ala, val, leu, i le;
(2) neutral hydrophilic: cys, ser, thr;
(3) acidic: asp, glu;
(4) basic: asn, gln, his, lys, arg;
(5) residues that influence chain orientation: gly, pro; and (6) aromatics: trp, tyr, phe.
Non-conservative substitutions will result in the exchange of a member of one of these classes for another class.
Any cysteine residue not involved in maintaining the proper conformation of the antibody can also be substituted, generally with serine, to improve the oxidative stability of the molecule and prevent crosslinking.
227
<img file="MX356367B_D0227.tif" />
aberrant. Rather, cysteine linkage (s) may be added to the antibody to improve its stability (particularly when the antibody is an antibody fragment such as an Fv fragment).
A particularly preferred type of substitution variant involves substituting one or more hypervariable region residues from a parent antibody (eg, a humanized or human antibody). Generally, the resulting variant (s) selected for further development will have improved biological properties relative to the antibody of origin from which they are generated. A convenient way to generate such substitution variants involves affinity maturation using phage display. Briefly, several hypervariable region sites (eg, sites 6 and 7) are mutated to generate all possible amino acid substitutions at each site. The antibody variants thus generated are deployed in a monovalent manner from filamentous phage particles as fusions for product III of the M13 gene packaged within each particle. Phage-displayed variants are then selected for their biological activity (eg, binding affinity) as described herein. In order to identify candidate hypervariable region sites for modification, alanine scanning mutagenesis can be carried out to identify residues of
228
<img file="MX356367B_D0228.tif" />
hypervariable region that contribute significantly to the binding to the antigen. Alternatively or additionally, it may be beneficial to analyze a crystal structure of the antigen-antibody complex to identify the contact points between the antibody and its target (eg, PD-L1, B7.1). Such contact residues and neighboring residues are candidates for substitution according to the techniques developed herein. Once such variants are generated, the panel of variants is screened as described herein and antibodies with superior properties in one or more relevant assays can be screened for further development.
Another type of amino acid variant of the antibody alters the original glycosylation pattern of the antibody. By altering is meant to delete one or more of the carbohydrate residues found in the antibody and / or to add one or more of the glycosylation sites that are not present in the antibody.
Antibody glycosylation is typically N-linked or O-linked. N-linked refers to the binding of the carbohydrate residue to the side chain of an asparagine residue. The tripeptide sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X is an amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for the enzymatic binding of the residue of
229
<img file="MX356367B_D0229.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE *** C * V .: OE LA RROF1I »AD
INDUSTRIAL »* Α_ΖΓ carbohydrate to the asparagine side chain. Therefore, the presence of any of these tripeptide sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site. 0-linked glycosylation refers to the binding of one of the N-acetylgalactosamine, galactose or xylose sugars to a hydroxyamino acid, more commonly serine or threonine, although 5-hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine can also be used.
Addition of glycosylation sites to the antibody is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites). Alteration may also be effected by adding, or substituting for, one or more serine or threonine residues to the original antibody sequence (for glycosylation sites linked to
O).
Nucleic acid molecules encoding amino acid sequence variants for the antibodies of the invention are prepared by a variety of methods known in the art. These methods include, but are not limited to, isolation from a natural source (in the case of naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants) or preparation by oligonucleotide-mediated (or site-directed) mutagenesis, PCR mutagenesis, and cassette mutagenesis of a variant or non-versions
230
IMPI mixmms msmvro
Say! TO INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY * »
<img file="MX356367B_D0230.tif" />
recently prepared variants. '
12) Other Antibody Modifications The antibodies of the present invention can be further modified to contain additional non-protein residues known in the art and readily available. Preferably, the suitable residues for the derivatization of the antibody are water soluble polymers. Non-limiting examples of water soluble polymers include, but are not limited to, polyethylene glycol (PEG), ethylene glycol / propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethyl cellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, poly-1,3-dioxolane, poly-1 , 3,6trioxane, ethylene / maleic anhydride copolymer, polyamino acids (either homopolymers or random copolymers) and dextran or poly (n-vinyl pyrrolidone) polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol homopolymers, polypropylene oxide / ethylene oxide copolymers, polyethoxylated polyols (eg, glycerol), polyvinyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof. Polyethylene glycol propionaldehyde may have manufacturing advantages due to its stability in water. The polymer can be of any molecular weight and can be branched or unbranched. The number of polymers bound to the antibody can vary and, if more than one polymer binds, they can be the same or different molecules. In general, the number and / or the
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0231.tif" />
231 The type of polymers used for derivatization can be determined based on considerations including, but not limited to, the particular properties or functions of the antibody to be improved, whether the antibody derivative will be used in therapy under defined conditions, etc. Such techniques and other suitable formulations are described in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20<sup>to</sup> Ed., Alfonso Gennaro, Ed., Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science (2000).
D. Pharmaceutical Formulations
Therapeutic storage formulations are prepared by mixing the active ingredient having the desired degree of purity with optional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers (Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20<sup>to</sup> Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Pub., Gennaro Ed., Philadelphia, PA 2000). Acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers are non-toxic to the containers at the doses and concentrations employed and include buffers, antioxidants, including ascorbic acid, methionine, vitamin E, sodium metabisulfite; preservatives, isotonifiers, stabilizers, metal complexes (eg, Zn-protein complexes); chelating agents such as EDTA and / or nonionic surfactants.
When the therapeutic agent is a fragment of
<img file="MX356367B_D0232.tif" />
232 antibody, the smaller inhibitory fragment that specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is preferred. For example, based on the variable region sequences of an antibody, antibody fragments or even peptide molecules can be designed that retain the ability to bind to the target protein sequence. Such peptides can be chemically synthesized and / or produced by recombinant DNA technology (see eg, Marasco et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA 90: 7889-7893 [1993]).
Buffers are used to control pH in a range that optimizes therapeutic effectiveness, especially if stability is pH dependent. Buffers are preferably present in concentrations ranging from about 50mM to about 250mM. Buffing agents suitable for use with the present invention include organic and inorganic acids and salts thereof. For example, citrate, phosphate, succinate, tartrate, fumarate, gluconate, oxalate, lactate, acetate. Additionally, buffers can be comprised of histidine and trimethylamine salts such as Tris.
Conservatives are added to slow microbial growth and are typically present in a range of 0.2% - 1.0% (w / v). The Conservatives
<img file="MX356367B_D0233.tif" />
233 Suitable for use herein include including octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride; hexamethonium chloride; benzalkonium halides (eg, chloride, bromide, iodide), benzethonium chloride; trimerosal, phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol; alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben; catecoi; resorcinol; cyclohexanol, 3-pentanoi and mcresol.
Tonicity agents, sometimes known as stabilizers, are present to adjust or maintain the tonicity of the liquid in a composition. When used with large charged biomolecules such as proteins and antibodies, they are often referred to as stabilizers because they can interact with charged groups of amino acid side chains, thereby decreasing the potential for inter and intra-molecular interactions. Toxicity agents can be present in any amount between
0.1% to 25% by weight, preferably 1 to 5%, taking into account the relative amounts of the other ingredients. Preferred tonicity agents include polyhydric sugar alcohols, preferably trihydric sugar alcohols or higher, such as glycerin, erythritol, arabitol, xylitol, sorbitol and mannitol.
Additional excipients include agents that can serve as one or more of the following: (1) agents
234
Τ MD ϊ ul i ·; AA 1 <55 * ^ 3!
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '^ ¿^ 2-1 ^ ;, J
PF! A nU »* DA» j
INW'STWIAl volume, (2) solubility enhancers, (3) stabilizers, and (4) agents that prevent denaturation or adherence to the container wall. Such excipients include: polyhydric sugar alcohols (listed above); amino acids such as alanine, glycine, glutamine, asparagine, histidine, arginine, usine, ornithidine, leucine, 2-phenylalanine, glutamic acid, threonine, etc .; organic sugars or sugar alcohols such as sucrose, lactose, lactitol, trehalose, stachyose, trickle, sorbose, xylose, ribose, ribitol, myoinisitose, myoinisitol, galactose, galactitol, glycerol, cyclitols (eg, inositol), polyethylene glycol; sulfur-containing reducing agents such as urea, glutathione, thioctic acid, sodium thioglycolate, thioglycerol, ammonothioglycerol and sodium thio sulfate; low molecular weight proteins such as human serum albumin, bovine serum albumin, gelatin, or other immunogiobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; monosaccharides (eg, xylose, mannose, fructose, glucose; disaccharides (eg, lactose, maltose, sucrose); trisaccharides such as raffinose; and polysaccharides such as dextrin or dextran.
Nonionic surfactants or detergents (also known as wetting agents) are present to help solubilize the therapeutic agent as well as to protect the therapeutic protein against aggregation
235
<img file="MX356367B_D0234.tif" />
IMPI
INSTITI ITO * 4 * ICAK)
GE INDI 'STRIAL PROPERTY induced by agitation, which also allow the formulation to be exposed to shear surface tension without causing denaturation of the active therapeutic protein or antibody. Nonionic surfactants are present in a range from about 0.05 mg / ml to about 1.0 mg / ml, preferably from about 0.07 mg / ml to about 0.2 mg / ml.
Suitable nonionic surfactants include polysorbates (20, 40, 60, 65, 80, etc.), polyoxamers (184,
188, etc.), PLURONIC® polyols, TRITON®, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoethers (TWEEN® 20, TWEEN® 80, etc.), lauromacrogol 400, polyoxy 40 stearate, polyoxyethylene, hydrogenated castor oil 10, 50 and 60, monostearate of glycerol, fatty acid sucrose ester, methyl cellulose and carboxymethyl cellulose. Anionic detergents that can be used include sodium lauryl sulfate, dioctyl sodium sulfosuccinate, and dioctyl sodium sulfonate. Cationic detergents include benzalkonium chloride or benzethonium chloride.
In order for the formulations to be used for in vivo administration, they must be sterile. The formulation can be made sterile by filtration through sterile filter membranes. The therapeutic compositions herein are generally placed in a container that has an access port
236
IMPI
ΙΝΠΤΠΙΤΟ MEXICAN CE LA FFG? ¡EOAL) INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0235.tif" />
sterile, for example, a bag or vial of ..... solution -.- · ...... <-.
IV that has a perforator obturator through a hypodermic injection needle.
The route of administration is in accordance with known and accepted methods, such as by single or multiple rapid injection or infusion over a long period of time in an appropriate manner, eg, injection or infusion by subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, intra-arterial routes. , intralesional or intra-articular, topical administration, inhalation or by sustained-release or extended-release means.
The formulation herein may also contain more than one active compound as needed for the particular indication being treated, preferably those with complementary activities that do not adversely affect each other. Alternatively or additionally, the composition may comprise a cytotoxic agent, cytosine, or a growth inhibitory agent. Such molecules are suitably present in combination, in amounts that are effective for the intended purpose.
The active ingredients can also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethyl cellulose or gelatin microcapsules and
237
<img file="MX356367B_D0236.tif" />
poly (methylmethacrylate) microcapsules, respectively ^ in colloidal drug delivery systems (eg, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles, and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are described in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences 18<sup>to</sup> edition, supra.
The stability of the proteins and antibodies described herein can be improved through the use of non-toxic, water-soluble polyvalent metal salts. Examples include Ca<sup>2+</sup>, Mg<sup>2+</sup>, Zn<sup>2+</sup>, Faith<sup>2+</sup>, Faith<sup>3+</sup>, Cu<sup>2+</sup>, Sn<sup>2+</sup>, Sn<sup>4+</sup>, To<sup>2+</sup> and Al<sup>3+</sup>. Exemplary anions that can form water soluble salts with the above polyvalent metal cations include those formed from inorganic acids and / or organic acids. Such water soluble salts have a solubility in water (at 20 ° C) of at least about 20 mg / ml, alternatively at least about 100 mg / ml, alternatively at least about 200 mg / ml.
Suitable inorganic acids that can be used to form the water-soluble polyvalent metal salts include hydrochloric, acetic, sulfuric, nitric, thiocyanic and phosphoric acid. Organic acids that can be used include aliphatic carboxylic acid and aromatic acids. Aliphatic acids within this definition can be defined as carboxylic acids
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0237.tif" />
238
INJTITlfTO MüMCano '* nopiMMn' Ί tNIMiSTPlAl caproic, enantic, methacrylic acids ii co
Acids
C2-9 saturated or unsaturated (eg, mono, di and tricarboxylic aliphatic acids). For example, exemplary monocarboxylic acids within this definition include C2-9 saturated monocarboxylic acids acetic, propionic, butyric, valeric, caprylic, pelargonic, and caprionic and C2-9 unsaturated acrylic, proprylic, crotonic, and isochrotonic monocarboxylic acids.
Exemplary dicarboxylic acids include saturated malonic, succinic, glutaric, adipic, and pymelic C2-9 dicarboxylic acids, while unsaturated C2-9 dicarboxylic acids include maleic, fumaric, citraconic, and mesaconic acids. Exemplary tricarboxylic acids include tricarboxylic acids C<sub>2</sub>-g saturated tricarbalilic and 1,2,3-butane tricarboxylic acid. Additionally, the carboxylic acids in this definition may also contain one or two hydroxyl groups to form hydroxy carboxylic acids. Exemplary hydroxy carboxylic acids include glycolic, lactic, glyceric, tartronic, malic, tartaric, and citric acids. Aromatic acids within this definition include benzoic and salicylic acid.
Commonly employed water soluble polyvalent metal salts that can be used to help stabilize the encapsulated polypeptides of this invention include, for example: (1) the acid metal salts
239
<img file="MX356367B_D0238.tif" />
inorganic halides (eg, zinc chloride, calcium chloride), sulfates, nitrates, phosphates, and thiocyanates; (2) the metal salts of aliphatic carboxylic acid (eg, calcium acetate, zinc acetate, calcium proprionate, zinc glycolate, calcium lactate, zinc lactate, and zinc tartrate); and (3) the metal salts of aromatic carboxylic acid of benzoates (eg, zinc benzoate) and salicylates.
E. Treatment methods:
For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate dose of an active agent will depend on the type of disease to be treated, as defined above, on the severity and course of the disease, on whether the agent is administered for preventive purposes or therapeutic, from previous therapy, from the patient's medical history and response to the agent, and from the discretion of the attending physician. The agent is suitably administered to the patient at one time or during a series of treatments.
In a particular embodiment, the invention relates to co-stimulation resulting from attenuation of signaling through PD-1, specifically by application of PD-Ll antibodies that prevent binding to PD1 and / or B7.1, thus as well as the therapeutic treatment of dysfunctional T-cell disorders.
240
ΪΜΡϊ iNSTmrro m «bcano DS LA PROPIEUA · INDUSTRIA!
one. Infections -
Pd-1 and its ligands (PD-1: PD-L) play an important role in regulating immune defenses against pathogens that cause acute and chronic infections. PD-1: PD-L signaling plays a key role in regulating the balance between effective antimicrobial immune defense and immunity-mediated tissue damage. For example, although PD-1 knockout mice clear adenovirus infection faster than their wild-type counterparts, they develop more severe hepatocellular damage. Iwai et al., J. Exp. Med., 198: 39-50 (2003). In a mouse model of herpes stromal keratitis, blocking of the anti-PD-Ll antibody exacerbated keratitis by increasing the expansion of HSV-1-specific effector CD4 T cells and the production and survival of IFN-γ. Jun et al., FEBS Lett. 579: 6259-64 (2005).
Microorganisms that cause chronic infection have exploited the PD-1: PD-L signaling pathway to evade host immune responses that result in chronic infections. Viruses that cause chronic infection can render virus-specific T cells non-functional and therefore silence the antiviral response of T cells. Barber et al., Nature 439: 682-87 (2006); Wherry et al., J. Virol., 78: 5535-45
<img file="MX356367B_D0239.tif" />
241
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEÜCANO UE LA i'ROPIEUAi.) INDUSTRIAL (2004). T cell depletion, or anergy, of CD8 T cells<sup>+</sup> it is an important reason for ineffective viral control during chronic infections and is characteristic of chronic LCMV infections in mice as well as HIV, HBV, HCV, and HTLV infection in humans and SIV infection in primates. There appears to be a progressive, hierarchical loss of function within the CD8 T-cell phenotype.<sup>+</sup> virus-specific depleted, with loss of cytotoxicity and IL-2 production first, followed by effector cytosine production.
PD-1 is up-regulated upon activation, and expression is maintained at a high level by CD8 T cells<sup>+ </sup>depleted in mice with chronic LCMV infection. Barber et al., Supra. Administration of antibodies that blocked PD-1: PD-L1 binding resulted in improved T-cell responses and a substantial reduction in viral load. In persistently infected mice with ineffective response to T<sub>H</sub> CD4<sup>+</sup>, PD-1: PD-L block restored CD8 T cells<sup>+</sup> of a dysfunctional state resulting in proliferation, cytosine secretion, destruction of infected cells, and decreased viral load, strongly suggesting a therapeutic procedure for the treatment of chronic viral infections.
As a result of the role of PD-1: PD-L in LCMV,
<img file="MX356367B_D0240.tif" />
242
<img file="MX356367B_D0241.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTMAl.
has shown a strong interest in targeting this path for the treatment of chronic human infection. PD-1 expression is high in HIV-specific T cells [Petrovas et al., J. Exp. Med., 203: 2281-92 (2006); Day et al., Nature 443: 350-54 (2006): Traumann et al., Nat. Med.,
12: 1198-202 (2006)], specific for HBV [Boettler et al., J. Virol., 80: 3532-40 (2006); Boni et al., J. Virol., 81: 421525 (2007)] and specific to VCH [Urbani et al., J. Virol.,
80: 11398-403 (2006)]. PD-Ll is also up-regulated on CD14 monocytes<sup>+</sup> of peripheral blood and myeloid DCs in patients with HBV infection [Chen et al., J. Immunol., 178: 6634-41 (2007); Geng et al., J. Virol. Hepat., 13: 725-33 (2006)], and on CD14 + cells and T cells in HIV patients [Trabattoni et al., Blood 101: 2514-20 (2003)]. Blocking PD-1: PD-Ll interactions in vitro reverses depletion of HIV-specific, HBV-specific, HCV-specific, and SIV-specific CD8t and CD4t T cells and restores cytosine proliferation and production. Petrovas et al., J. Exp. Med., 2003: 2281-92 (2006); Day et al., Supra; Trautmann et al., Supra; Boni et al., Supra; Urbani et al., Supra; Velu et al., J. Virol., 81: 5819-28 (2007).
The degree of PD-1 expression may also be a useful diagnostic marker in virus-specific CD8 + T cells to indicate the degree of T cell depletion and
<img file="MX356367B_D0242.tif" />
243
B 'bffTTT-lTO MtXiCANO DF PROPERTY IMMOUST'JAl the severity of the disease. The level of PD-1 expression in HIV-specific CD8 + T cells correlates with viral load, declining CD4 + counts, and the decreased ability of CD8 + T cells to proliferate in response to the HIV antigen in vitro. Corresponding to in vivo observations, there is a direct correlation between PD-1 expression in HIV-specific CD4 + T cells and viral load. D'Souza et al.., J. Immunol., 179: 1979-87 (2007). Long-term nonprogressors have functional HIV-specific CD8 + T cells with markedly lower PD-1 expression in contrast to typical progressors expressing significantly over-regulated PD-1, which correlates with a reduced number of CD4 + T cells, a decreased number of T cells
CD4 +, a decreased function of HIV-specific memory effector CD8 + T cells and a high plasma viral load. Zhang et al., Blood 109: 4671-78 (2007).
The PD-1: PD-L pathway has also been implicated in the chronicity of bacterial infections.
Helicobacter pylori causes chronic gastritis and gastroduodenal ulcers and is a risk factor for the development of gastric cancer. During an H. pylori infection, T cell responses are insufficient to clear the infection, leading to persistent infection. After exposure to H. pylori in vitro or in vivo, the
244
<img file="MX356367B_D0243.tif" />
INDUSTRIAL
PD-L1 is upregulated in gastric epithelial cells 7 ~ ....... Gastric epithelial cells express MHC class II molecules and are believed to play an important role in APC during H infection . pylori. Anti-PD-Ll antibodies that block PD-1 interaction
PD-L1 improves T-cell proliferation and IL-2 production in gastric epithelial cell cultures exposed to H. pylori and CD4 T cells. Blocking PD-L1 with either antibodies or siRNA prevented the generation of regulatory T cells, suggesting that PD-L1 may promote suppression of T cells and persistent infections by controlling the dynamics between regulatory and effector T cells during infection by H. pylori. Beswick et al., Infect. Immuno. 75: 4334-41 (2007).
Parasitic worms have also exploited the path of PD-1: PD-L1 to induce macrophages that suppress the immune response. During Taenia crassiceps (ie, solitary) infections in mice, PD-1 and PD-L2 are up-regulated in activated macrophages, and CD4 + T cells express PD-1. Blocking PD-1, PD-L1, or PD-L2 significantly decreased suppression of T-cell proliferation in vitro by macrophages from tapeworm-infected mice. Terrazas et al, Int. J. Parasitol., 35: 1349-58 (2005). During Shistosoma mansoni infection in mice, macrophages express high levels of PD-L1 and
245
1. · £ i £ TV I m-JkíU.'V '** í'c PROPERTY' NOIL'TP ΙΑ I more modest levels of PD-L2. The Anti-PD-Ω<sup>-</sup>'Go shot' Ta ability of these macrophages to suppress the proliferation of T cells in vitro, while the anti-PD-L2 had no effect. PD-Ll expression in macrophages of infected mice declines after 12 weeks of infection, correlating with a breakdown in the anergy of T. cells, et al., J. Immunol., 173: 1240-48 (2004).
2. Tumor immunity
Empirical evidence of tumor immunity includes (i) the observance of spontaneous remission, (ii) the presence of detectable, but ineffective, host immune responses to tumors, (iii) the increased prevalence of primary and secondary malignancies in immunodeficient patients, (iv) the detection of increased levels of antibodies and T lymphocytes in tumor patients, and (v) the observation that test animals can be immunized against various types of tumors.
Studies have shown that most human tumors express tumor associated antigens (TAAs) that can be recognized by T cells and thus are potentially capable of inducing an immune response. Boon et al., Immunol. Today 16: 334-336 (1995). Early-phase clinical trials have been initiated by vaccinating cancer patients with TAA or professional antigen presenting cells driven by TAA. Dudley et al., Science 298:
246
ΙΜΡΐ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
850-854 (2002); Gajewski et al., Clin. Cancer Res., 7: 895s901s (2001); Marineóla et al., Adv. Immunol., 74: 181-273 (2000); Peterson et al., J. Clin. Oncol., 21: 2342-2348 (2003). Induction of antigen-specific tumor CD8 + T cells has been accomplished in many of these tests. Mackensen et al ,. Eur. Cytokine Netw., 10: 329-336 (1999); Peterson et al., Supra. Adoptive transfer of antigen-specific tumor T cells in patients has also been sought and revealed accommodation of expanded cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) at tumor sites. Meidenbauer et al., J. Immunol., 170: 2161-2169 (2003). However, despite tumor infiltration of immune effector cells, tumor growth was rarely controlled.
It is well established that the micro-environment of the tumor can protect tumor cells from immune destruction. Ganss et al., Cancer Res., 58: 4673-4681 (1998);
Singh et al., J. Exp. Med., 175: 139-146 (1992). Soluble factors, as well as membrane-bound molecules including transforming growth factor β (TGF-β), interleukin (IL) -10, prostaglandin E, have been found<sub>2</sub>, FASL, CTLA-4 ligands, the tumor necrosis factor-related apoptosis-inducing ligand (TRAIL), and programmed death receptor 1 ligand (PD-Ll, aka B7-H1) are expressed by tumors and
IMPI
247 mexican iwrmvro
FROM INIW MOBILITY: TSIAI are believed to mediate immune evasion. Thus, blocking these immune regulatory signals in tumor cells is a promising procedure for enhancing the immunity of tumor-specific CD8 + T cells in vivo.
PD-Ll expression in many tumors is a component for this suppression and can act in concert with other immunosuppressive signals. PD-Ll negatively regulates T-cell receptor signaling. PD-Ll expression has been demonstrated in situ in a wide variety of solid tumors, including breast, lung, colon, ovarian, melanoma, and bladder cancers. , liver, salivary, stomach, gliomas, thyroid, thymic, epithelial, head and neck. Brown et al., J. Immunol., 170: 1257-66 (2003); Dóng et al., Nat. Med., 8: 793-800 (2002); Hamanishi et al., PNAS 104: 3360-65 (2007); Strome et al., Cancer Res., 63: 6501-5 (2003); Inman et al., Cancer
109: 1499-505 (2007); Konishi et al., Clin. Cancer Res., 10: 5094-100 (2004); Nakanishi et al., Cancer Immunol.
Immunother., 56: 1173-82 (2007); Nomi et al., Clin. Cancer
Res-, 13: 2151-57 (2004); Thompson et al., PNAS 101: 17174-79 (2004); Wu et al., Acta Histochem., 108: 19-24 (2006).
Immune staining also reveals PD-1: PD-L expression in various cancers.
Interestingly, cancer has also been characterized as a chronic inflammatory disease.
<img file="MX356367B_D0244.tif" />
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0245.tif" />
248
Coussens et al., Nature 420: 860-867
15% of cancers around the direct infectious [Kuper et al., J. 183 (2000)], many human tumors irritation and chronic inflammation.
Cancer 5: 263-274 (2005).
(2002). Although even the world has an internal origin. Med., 248: 171 are related to
Zou et al., Ntu. Rev.
Studies related to PD-L1 expression in tumors for disease outcome show that PD-L1 expression strongly correlates with an unfavorable prognosis in kidney, ovarian, bladder, breast, gastric, and pancreatic cancer, but such not once in small cell lung cancer. Hamanishi et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci., USA 104: 3360-65 (2007), Inman et al., Cancer 109: 1499-505 (2007), Konishi et al., Clin. Cancer Res., 10:
5094-100 (2004); Nakanishi et al., Cancer Immunol.
Immnother., 56: 1173-82 (2007); Nomi et al., Clin. Cancer
Res., 13: 2151-57 (2007); Thompson et al., Proc. Nati. Acad.
Sci. USA 101: 17174-79 (2004); Wu et al., Acta Histochem. ,
108: 19-24 (2006). Furthermore, these studies suggest that higher levels of PD-L1 expression in tumors may facilitate advancement of the tumor stage and invasion into deeper tissue structures.
The PD-1: PD-L path may also play a role in hematologic malignancies. PD-1 or PD-L1 are rarely expressed in B-cell malignancies, but PD-L2
249
<img file="MX356367B_D0246.tif" />
INDUSTRIAL
Dorfman et al.,
The analysis of is overexpressed in cell malignancies' stabstat- Brown et al., Supra; Rosenwald et al., J. Exp. Med., 198: 851-62 (2003). PD-Ll is expressed in multiple myeloma cells, but not in normal plasma cells. T cell expansion in response to myeloma cells is enhanced in vitro by blocking PD-Ll. Liu et al., Blood 110: 296-304 (2007). PD-Ll is expressed in some primary T-cell lymphomas, particularly large anaplastic T-cell lymphomas, and PD-Ll is expressed in the associated follicular dendritic cell network.
Am. J. Surg. Pathol., 30: 802-10 (2006).
micro-arrangement further suggests that tumor-associated T cells respond to PD-1 signals in situ in Hodgkin lymphoma. Chemnitz et al., Blood 110: 3226-33 (2007). PD-1 and
PD-Ll are expressed on CD4 + T cells in leukemia and HTLV-1 mediated adult T cell lymphoma. Shimaucho et al., Int.
J. Cancer 121: 2585-90 (2007). These tumor cells are hypo-responsive to TCR signals, and PD-1 blockade increased their expression of TNF-oi, but not IFN-γ. Studies in animal models demonstrate that PD-Ll expression in tumors inhibits T-cell activation and lysis of tumor cells and, in some cases, leads to increased tumor-specific T-cell death. Dong et al., Nat. Med., 8: 793-800 (2006); Hirano et al.,
Cancer Res. 65: 1089-96 (2005).
250
<img file="MX356367B_D0247.tif" />
Therefore, suppression of signaling through PD-L1 with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention, in order to improve T-cell function, shows the promise of attenuating tumor immunity and, as a result,
<td>It can be a</td><td>treatment</td><td>effective for</td><td>cancer.</td>
<td>F.</td><td>Therapies of</td><td>Combination</td><td></td>
<td>The</td><td>method of</td><td>the invention</td><td>can be combined with</td>
Known methods of treating chronic infection or cancer, either as combined or associated treatment steps or as additional components of a therapeutic formulation.
one. Cancer:
Improving the host's immune function to fight tumors is the subject of increased interest. Conventional methods include (i) APC enhancement, such as (a) injection into the tumor of DNA encoding external MHC alloantigens, or (b) transfection of tumor cells biopsied with genes that increase the probability of recognition of the immune antigen (eg, immune stimulating cytosines, GM-CSF, costimulatory molecules B7.1, B7.2) of the tumor, (iii) adoptive cellular immunotherapy, or treatment with activated tumor-specific T cells. Adoptive cellular immunotherapy includes isolating host T lymphocytes from tumor infiltration, expanding the population in vitro, such as through
<img file="MX356367B_D0248.tif" />
251 stimulation by IL-2 or tumor, or both. Additionally, isolated T cells that are dysfunctional can also be activated by in vitro application of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention. T cells that are thus activated can then be re-administered to the host.
monoclonal antibody tyrosine inhibitors,
Traditional cancer therapies include the following: (i) radiation therapy (eg, radiation therapy, X-ray therapy, irradiation) or the use of ionizing radiation to destroy cancer cells and shrink tumors. Radiation therapy can be administered either externally through external beam radiation therapy (EBRT) or internally through brachytherapy; (ii) chemotherapy, or the application of a cytotoxic drug that generally affects rapidly dividing cells; (iii) targeted therapies, or agents that specifically affect deregulated cancer cell proteins (eg, kinases, immunotherapy therapy, or enhancement of the host immune response (eg, vaccines); (v) hormone therapy, or hormone blockage (eg, when the tumor is hormone sensitive), (vi) angiogenesis inhibitor, or blockage of blood vessel formation and growth, and (vii) palliative care, imatinib , geftinib; photodynamic); (iv) or treatment aimed at improving the quality of care
<img file="MX356367B_D0249.tif" />
252
IMPI
WTTITVlWMeBCANO pe u norfciA * INDUSTRl * !.
to reduce pain, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, and bleeding. Pain medication, such as morphine and oxycodone, anti-emetics such as ondansetron and aprepitant, may allow for more aggressive treatment regimens.
In the treatment of cancer, any of the conventional treatments previously described for the treatment of cancer immunity can be conducted, prior, subsequent or simultaneous with the administration of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention. Additionally, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be administered prior to, subsequent to, or concurrent with conventional cancer treatments, such as administration of tumor-binding antibodies (eg, monoclonal antibodies, toxin-conjugated monoclonal antibodies) and / or the administration of chemotherapeutic agents.
2. Infection:
In the treatment of infection - (- eg, acute and / or chronic), the administration of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention may be combined with conventional treatments in addition to or in order to stimulate the host's natural immune defenses against infection. . Natural host immune defenses to infection include, but are not limited to inflammation, fever, antibody-mediated host defense, T-cell mediated host defenses, including secretion of lymphosine and cytotoxic T cells.
253
P * PIEDAD indi'stbiai (especially during viral infection), complement-mediated lysis and opsonization (facilitated phagocytosis) and phagocytosis. The ability of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention to reactivate dysfunctional T cells would be particularly useful in treating chronic infections, particularly those in which cell-mediated immunity is critical to complete recovery.
to. Bacteria
For infections resulting from a bacterial infection, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined by their simultaneous administration with, prior to, or subsequent to, standard therapies for treating bacterial infection. Bacterial infections are now more commonly treated with antibacterial antibiotics, but pathogen-specific antibodies that contain serum from immunized hosts may also be effective.
Bacteria that are pathogenic as a result of toxin secretion, (toxogenic bacteria), vaccination with inactive toxins, and / or administration of therapeutic agents that block toxin toxicity are commonly effective (eg, polyclonal serum, antibodies, antibiotics , etc.). These organisms include Clostridium spp., Bacillus spp., Corynebacterium spp., Vibrio chloerae, Bordetella pertussis, Staphylococcus spp., Streptococcus spp. Gram negative bacteria that also
254
IMPí
INSTITUTE M »ICA Ni '<3 ^
FROM IA FHORíeoaI. · V. INDUSTRY! Xh'-T
<img file="MX356367B_D0250.tif" />
typically responding to such traditional therapies include »- Enterobacteriaceae (eg, Escherichia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Yersinia, Erwina), Salmonella and Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Encapsulated bacteria, which are resistant to phagocytosis and opsonization, and therefore frequently prevent a more significant challenge to immune cleansing include: Streptococcus spp., Haemophilus spp., Neisseria spp., Klebsiella spp., And Bacterioides fragillis.
Bacteria evade host defenses by invading cells to evade antibody and serum complement after a particular challenge. The cleanliness of these infections is almost entirely dependent on T lymphocyte-mediated immunity and they are especially prone to developing into chronic infections. Specific examples include Salmonella (S. typhi, S. choleraesuis, S. enteritidis), Legionella spp., Listeria spp., Brucella spp., And Mycobacterium, including M. tuberculosis, M. avium and M. leprae.
Spirochetes, including Treponema spp., Borrelia spp., And Leptospira spp., Are bacteria that cause persistent and latent infections. Treponema palladium, the pathogen that causes syphilis disease, is a sexually transmitted disease that can have severe pathological consequences if left untreated. The disease progresses through different stages. The phase
255
IMPI
INSTITUTE uÉUCAtA DE LA EROUtUAl 'INDUSTRIA!
<img file="MX356367B_D0251.tif" />
initial clinic is an ulcer or chancre in the ... if tic. of ........ ú ^ a.
treponema inoculation. Following this is a continuing period of spirochetemia and metastatic distribution of microorganisms, including repeated cycles of infection and resolution, in a condition known as secondary syphilis. After resolution of secondary syphilis, the disease enters an asymptomatic latency period that can end in tertiary syphilis, which is a serious and often fatal condition. Tertiary syphilis can manifest in (i) the heart as aneurysis formation and secondary insufficiency of the aortic value, (ii) the central nervous system (dorsal tubes, general paresis), (iii) the eyes (interstitial keratitis) or (iv) the ears (nervous deafness). The non-venereal forms resemble the clinical manifestations of the venereal forms, but are transmitted primarily by direct contact and poor hygiene. These include the jaws (T. pallidum subp. pertenue) pinta (T. carateum) and bejel (T. pallidum subsp. endemic).
Treatments for syphilis include penicillin (eg, penicillin G), tetracycline, doxycycline, ceftriazone, and azithromycin. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention would be more advantageously administered to treat the latent period of infection.
Lyme disease caused by Borrelia
<img file="MX356367B_D0252.tif" />
256 burgdorferi, is transmitted in humans through hard bites. The disease initially manifests as a localized rash followed by cold-like symptoms including malaise, fever, headache, stiff neck, and arthralgia. Subsequent manifestations may include migratory and polyarticular arthritis, neurological and cardiac involvement with cranial nerve palsy and radiculopathy, myocarditis, and arrhythmias. Some cases of Lyme disease become persistent resulting in irreversible damage analogous to tertiary syphilis.
Current therapy for Lyme disease mainly includes the administration of antibiotics. Antibiotic resistant strains can be treated with hydroxychloroquine or methotrexate. Antibiotic refractory patients with neuropathic pain can be treated with gabapentin. Minocycline may be useful in late / chronic Lyme disease with neurological or other inflammatory manifestations. Anti-PD-Ll antibodies would be more advantageously administered to treat the latent period of infection.
Other forms of borreliois, such as those resulting from B. recurentis, B. hermsii, B. turicatae, B. parikeri, B. hispánica, B. duttonii and B. pérsica, as well as leptospirosis (eg, L. interrogans), typically it
<img file="MX356367B_D0253.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0254.tif" />
257 resolve spontaneously unless blood titers reach concentrations causing intrahepatic obstruction.
b. Virus
For infections resulting from viral causes, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined by simultaneous application with, prior to, or subsequent to, application of standard therapies to treat viral infections. Such standard therapies may vary depending on the type of virus, although in almost all cases, administration of virus-specific human serum-containing antibodies (eg, IgA, IgG) may be effective.
1) Influenza
Influenza infection results in fever, cough, myalgia, headache, and malaise, which frequently occurs in seasonal epidemics. Influenza is also associated with numerous post-infectious disorders such as encephalitis, myopericarditis, Goodpasture's syndrome, and Reye's syndrome. Influenza infection also suppresses normal pulmonary antibacterial defenses, such that the patient's recovery from influenza has an increased risk of developing bacterial pneumonia.
The surface proteins of viral influenza show a marked antigenic variation, resulting from
<img file="MX356367B_D0255.tif" />
258 mutation and recombination. Thus, cytolytic T lymphocytes are the primary host vehicle for virus clearance after infection. Influenza is classified into three main types: A, B, and C. Influenza A is unique in that it infects both humans and many other animals (eg, pigs, horses, birds, and seals) and is the leading cause of influenza. pandemic. Also, when a cell is infected by two different influenza A strains, the segmented RNA genomes of two types of virus of origin mix during replication to create a hybrid replicant, resulting in new epidemic strains. Influenza B does not replicate in animals and therefore has less genetic variation and influenza C has only a single serotype.
The most conventional therapies are palliative for the symptoms resulting from the infection, although the host's immune response actually clears the disease. However, certain strains (eg, influenza A) can cause more serious illness and death. Influenza A can be treated both clinically and prophylactically by administration of the cyclic amine inhibitors amantadine and rimantadine, which inhibit viral replication. However, the clinical utility of these drugs is limited due to the relatively high incidence of adverse reactions, their narrow anti-viral spectrum.
259
<img file="MX356367B_D0256.tif" />
(influenza A only), and the propensity of the virus to become resistant. Administration of serum IgG antibody to major influenza surface proteins, hemagglutinin and neuraminidase, can prevent lung infection, while mucosal IgA is required to prevent infection of the upper respiratory tract and trachea. The most effective current treatment for influenza is vaccination with the administration of the virus inoculated with formalin or β-propiolactone.
2) Measles virus
After a 9-11 day incubation, hosts infected with the measles virus develop fever, cough, coryza, and conjunctivitis. Within 1 to 2 days, an erythematous maculopapular rash develops, spreading rapidly over the entire body. Because the infection also suppresses cellular immunity, the host is at increased risk of developing bacterial super-infections, including otitis media, pneumonia, and post-infectious encephalomyelitis. Acute infection is associated with significant morbidity and mortality, especially in malnourished adolescents.
<td>The</td><td>treatment</td><td>for</td><td>measles includes</td><td>the</td>
<td colspan="2">passive administration of</td><td colspan="3">Deposited human IgG, which can</td>
<td>prevent the</td><td>infection in</td><td>subjects</td><td>not immune even if</td><td>I know</td>
<td>provides</td><td>one week</td><td>then</td><td>of the exhibition.</td><td>Without</td>
<img file="MX356367B_D0257.tif" />
260
However, prior immunization with live attenuated virus is the most effective treatment and prevents disease in more than 95% of those immunized. Since a serotype of this virus exists, a single immunization or infection typically results in lifetime protection from subsequent infection.
In a small proportion of infected hosts, measles can develop into SSPE, which is a chronic progressive neurological disorder resulting from persistent infection of the central nervous system. SSPE is caused by clonal variants of the measles virus with defects that interfere with virion assembly and outbreak. For these patients, reactivation of T cells with the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention would be desirable in order to facilitate viral clearance.
3) Hepatitis B virus
Hepatitis B virus (HB-V) is the most infectious known blood-borne pathogen. This is the main cause of acute and chronic hepatitis and liver carcinoma, as well as chronic lifelong infection. After infection, the virus replicates in hepatocytes, which then also diffuses the HBsAg surface antigen. Detection of excessive serum HBsAg levels is used as a standard method of diagnosing hepatitis B infection. An infection
261
I to ΡI
INSTITUT · MEXiCANO V? «I« CS ^ jÍ O £ LA Ι'ΧΟΡΙΕΠαΙ? v * _ * í NDl ISTHIA!
Acute may resolve or may develop into chronic persistent infection.
Current treatments for chronic HBV include o-interferon, which increases the expression of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA class) on the surface of hepatocytes, thus facilitating their recognition by cytotoxic T lymphocytes. Additionally, nucleoside analogues, ganciclovir, famciclovir, and lamivudine, have also shown some efficacy in treating HBV infection in clinical trials. Additional treatments for HBV include pegylated α-interferon, adenfovir, entecavir, and telbivudine. Although passive immunity can be conferred through parental administration of serum anti-HBsAg antibodies, vaccination with inactivated or recombinant HBsAg also confers resistance to infection.
The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for hepatitis B infections for therapeutic advantage.
4) Hepatitis C virus
Infection with the hepatitis C virus (HC-V) can lead to a chronic form of hepatitis, resulting in cirrhosis. Although symptoms are similar to infections resulting from hepatitis B, in contrast to HB-V, infected hosts can be asymptomatic for 10 to 20 years. Treatment of
262
IMPI «πτήσή mmicanc,
OF THE rP.'if'EOAL · INDUSTRIAL HCV infection includes the administration of a combination of α-interferon and ribavirin. A promising potential therapy for HCV infection is the protease inhibitor Telaprevir (VX-960). Additional treatments include: anti-PD-1 antibody (MDX-1106,
Medarex), bavituximab (an antibody to the glycoprotein B2 glycoprotein phosphatidylserine-dependent anionic phospholipid, Pharmaceuticals), anti-HPV viral coat protein E2 antibody (s) (eg, ATL 6865 - Ab68 + Ab65, XTL Pharmaceuticals ) and Civacir® (polyclonal human anti-HCV immunoglobulin). The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with one or more of these treatments for hepatitis C infections for therapeutic advantage.
Protease, polymerase, and NS5A inhibitors that can be used in combination with the anti-PDL1 antibodies of the invention to specifically treat hepatitis C infection include the following identified in
Table B.
a way
Pilgrim
<img file="MX356367B_D0258.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0259.tif" />
263
Table B
Hepatitis C polymerase and protease inhibitors
<td>Kind of inhibitor</td><td>Inhibitor name</td><td>Manufacturer (s)</td>
<td>protease</td><td>R7227 / ITMN 191</td><td>Roche / InterMune</td>
<td></td><td>CTS-1027</td><td>Roche Biosciences</td>
<td></td><td>VX500, VX813, VX985</td><td>Vertex</td>
<td></td><td>Telaprevir (VX950)</td><td>Vertex / Tibotec</td>
<td></td><td>TMC435350 / TMC 435</td><td>Medívir / Tibotec</td>
<td></td><td>Boceprevir (SCH503034), Narlaprevir (SCH900518 / SP900518</td><td>Schering-Plow</td>
<td></td><td>B1201335, BILN 2061</td><td>Boehringer Ingelheim</td>
<td></td><td>MK7009</td><td>Merck</td>
<td></td><td>IDX-136, IDX-316</td><td>Idenix</td>
<td></td><td>BMS-790052, BMS-791325</td><td>Bristol Myers Squibb</td>
<td></td><td>PHX-1766</td><td>Phenomix</td>
<td></td><td>ACH-806</td><td>Achillion / Gilead</td>
<td></td><td>ACH-1625</td><td>Achillion</td>
<td></td><td>ABT-450</td><td>Abbott Labs</td>
<td></td><td>VBY 376</td><td>Virobay</td>
<td>Inhibitors polymerase</td><td>R1626</td><td>Roche</td>
<td></td><td>R7128</td><td>Roche / Pharmasset</td>
<td></td><td>NM28 3</td><td>Idenix</td>
264
<img file="MX356367B_D0260.tif" />
<td></td><td>HCV796</td><td>Wyeth</td>
<td></td><td>BILB 1941, BI-207127</td><td>Boehringer Ingelheim</td>
<td></td><td>GL60667, GS9190</td><td>Gilead</td>
<td></td><td>PF-00868554</td><td>Pfizer</td>
<td></td><td>VCH757-VCH916</td><td>Virochem</td>
<td></td><td>VX222, VX759</td><td>Vertex</td>
<td></td><td>MK-3281</td><td>Merck</td>
<td></td><td>ANA598</td><td>Anadys</td>
<td></td><td>IDX184, IDX375</td><td>Idenix</td>
<td></td><td>PSI-7851</td><td>Pharmaset</td>
<td></td><td>ABT-072, ABT-333</td><td>Abbott Labs</td>
<td></td><td>BMS650032</td><td>Bristol Myers Squibb</td>
<td>Inhibitors NS5A</td><td>BMS7900052, BMX824393</td><td>Bristol Myers Squibb</td>
<td></td><td>AZD 2836, AZD 7295</td><td>Arrow Therapeutics</td>
<td></td><td>GSK 625433</td><td>Glaxo Smith Kline</td>
5) Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)
HIV attacks CD4 + cells, including T lymphocytes, monocyte-macrophages, dendritic follicular cells, and Langerhan cells, and depletes CD4 + helper / inducer cells. As a result, the host acquires a severe defect in cell-mediated immunity. HIV infection results in AIDS in at least 50% of individuals and is transmitted through sexual contact, administration of infected blood or blood products, artificial insemination with semen
<img file="MX356367B_D0261.tif" />
265 infected, exposure to needles or syringes 'that ^' TíOñVtgYrSTr · blood and transmission from an infected mother to an infant during birth.
An HIV-infected host may be asymptomatic, or may develop an acute illness that resembles mononucleosis - fever, headache, sore throat, malaise, and rash. Symptoms can progress to progressive immune dysfunction, including persistent fever, night sweats, weight loss, unexplained diarrhea, eczema, psoriasis, seborrheic dermatitis, herpes zoster, oral yeast infection, and scalp oral leukoplakia. Opportunistic infections by a parasite host are common in patients whose infections develop in AIDS.
Treatments for HIV include antiviral therapies including nucleoside analogs, zidovudine (AST) either alone or in combination with didanosine or zalcitabine, dideoxyinosine, dideoxycytidine, lamidvudine, stavudine; reverse transcriptional inhibitors such as delavirdine, nevirapine, loviride, and proteinase inhibitors such as saquinavir, ritonavir, indinavir, and nelfinavir. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for HIV infections for therapeutic advantage.
6) Cytomegalovirus
<img file="MX356367B_D0262.tif" />
266
Cytomegalovirus (CMV) infection is frequently associated with persistent, latent, and recurrent infection. CMV infects and remains latent in monocytes and granulocyte-monocyte progenitor cells. Clinical symptoms of CMV include mononucleosis-like symptoms (ie, fever, swollen glands, malaise) and a tendency to develop allergic skin rashes to antibiotics. The virus spreads through direct contact. The virus is dispersed in urine, saliva, semen, and to a lesser degree in other body fluids. The transition can occur from a sick mother to her fetus or newborn and through blood transfusion and organ transplants. CMV infection results in general damage to cellular immunity, characterized by impaired blastogenic responses to nonspecific mitogens and specific CMV antigens, decreased cytotoxic capacity, and increased CD8 lymphocyte number of CD4 + lymphocytes.
Treatments for CMV infection include the antivirals ganciclovir, foscarnet, and cidovir, but these drugs are typically prescribed only in immunocompromised patients. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for cytomegalovirus infections for therapeutic advantage.
7) Epstein-Barr virus
The Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) can establish
<img file="MX356367B_D0263.tif" />
267 persistent and latent infections and primarily attacks B cells. EBV infection results in the clinical condition of infectious mononucleosis, including fever, sore throat, frequently with exudate, generalized lymphadenopathy, and splenomegaly. Hepatitis is also present, which can develop into jaundice.
Although typical treatments for EBV infections are palliative for symptoms, EBV is associated with the development of certain cancers such as Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeal cancer. Therefore, cleaning the viral infection before these complications result would be of great benefit. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for Epstein-Barr virus infections for therapeutic advantage.
8) herpes virus
Herpes simplex virus (HSV) is spread through direct contact with an infected host. A direct infection may be asymptomatic, but typically results in blisters containing infectious particles. The disease manifests as cycles of active periods of disease in which lesions appear and disappear as the virus latently infects the nerve ganglia for subsequent eruptions. Injuries can be to the face, genitals, eyes and / or hands
268
OF THE PRONEPAi; CV »INIXNTRIai
In some cases, the infection can also cause encephalitis.
Treatments for herpes infections are primarily aimed at resolving symptomatic rashes and include systemic antiviral medications such as: Acyclovir (eg, Zovirac®), valaciclovir, famciclovir, penciclovir, and topical medications such as docosanol (Abreva®), tromantadine, and zilactin. Cleaning latent herpes infections would be of great clinical benefit. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for herpes virus infections for therapeutic advantage.
9) HTLV
Human T-lymphotrophic virus (HTLV-1, HTLV-2) is transmitted through sexual contact, by breastfeeding, or by exposure to contaminated blood. The virus activates a subset of T cells<sub>H</sub> called Thl cells, resulting in their over-proliferation and over-production of Thl-related cytosines (eg, IFN-γ and TNF-α). This in turn results in the suppression of Th2 lymphocytes and reduced production of Th2 cytosine (eg, IL-4, IL-5, IL-10, and IL-13), causing a reduction in host capacity. infected to install an adequate immune response to invading organisms that require a Th2-dependent response for cleaning (eg, infections
<img file="MX356367B_D0264.tif" />
269 parasitic, production of mucous and humoral antibodies).
HTLV infections lead to opportunistic infections resulting in bronchiectasis, dermatitis, and super-infections with Staphylococcus spp., And death
HTLV infection
Strongyloides spp., Given as coming from polymicrobial sepsis, can also lead directly to adult T-cell leukemia / lymphoma and to a progressive demyelinating upper motor neuron disease known as HAM / TSP. Cleaning latent HTLV infections would be of great clinical benefit. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for HTLV infections for therapeutic advantage.
10) HPV
The human papilloma virus (HPV) mainly affects keratinocytes and comes in two forms: cutaneous and genital. Transmission is believed to occur through direct contact and / or sexual activity. Both cutaneous and genital HPV infection can result in latent warts and infections and sometimes recurrent infections that are controlled by the host's immunity which controls symptoms and blocks the appearance of warts, but leaves the host with the ability to transmit infection to others.
Infection with HPV can also lead to
270
α.Ρ J
- '' xsrmmj MExicANf w LA PROMEDai: IN'X'STPIai
<img file="MX356367B_D0265.tif" />
certain cancers, such as cervical, anal, ^ ~ de ~ - ^ xna4v-e ·, da. penis and orofarinial. There are no known cures for HPV infection, but the current treatment is the topical application of Imiquimod, which stimulates the immune system to attack the affected area. Cleaning latent HPV infections would be of great clinical benefit. The anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined with conventional treatments for HPV infections for therapeutic advantage.
c. Mushrooms
Fungal infections, or mycoses, can result in either a primary infection or an opportunistic colonization of hosts with immune systems compromised by endogenous flora. The immunity to mycosis is mainly cellular, involving neutrophils, macrophages, lymphocytes and probably natural destroying cells (NK). Mycoses are typically not susceptible to direct destruction by antibody and complement.
Systemic invasive mycoses resulting from primary infection include blastomycosis, coccidioidiomycosis, histoplasmosis, and paracoccidioidiomycosis. For chronic infections resulting from fungal infections, the anti-Pd-Ll antibodies of the invention can be administered prior to or concurrent with or subsequent to any of the conventionally known treatments for these mycoses.
<img file="MX356367B_D0266.tif" />
271
IMPI
INSMVTO MEJUCANi JE LA MOHEDAL ΙΝΓΜΚΤΚΙΆΙ
Blastomyocitis caused by Blastomyces dermatitis is acquired by inhalation and produces a primary lung infection or a hematogenically disseminated disease that predominantly involves the skin, bones, and the male genitourinary tract. The primary exposure may be asymptomatic, or it may produce an influenza-like syndrome. This disease can manifest itself in a chronic indolent form. The disease is also associated with immunocompromised such as in AIDS patients. Conventional therapy for B. dermatitis infection includes itraconazole, ketoconazole, or intravenous injection of amphotericin B.
Coccidioidiomycosis, caused by Coccidioides immitis, is acquired by inhalation and can cause primary lung infection, progressive lung disease, or hematogenically disseminated disease that predominantly involves the skin, subcutaneous tissues, bones, joints, and meninges. The primary exposure may be asymptomatic (60%) or associated with an influenza-like syndrome. Pneumonia, pleurisy, and lung cavitation may occur. Metastatic manifestations include skin lesions including nodules, ulcers, sinusoidal tracts from deeper locations, and warty granulomas, on bones, joints, tendon sheaths, and meninges, including meningitis. The illness
272
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0267.tif" />
it is also associated with compromised immunity such as in AIDS patients. Treatment for coccidioidiomycosis includes ketoconazole, intraconazole, and fluconazole, especially for long-term maintenance therapy of nonmeningeal disease. Meningeal forms are commonly treated with intrathecal administration of amphotericin B.
Histoplasmosis caused by Histoplasma capsulatum, is a disease acquired by inhalation of the reticuloendothelial system in which small yeasts reside in macrophages. This can cause primary lung infection, progressive lung disease, or hematogenically disseminated disease that predominantly involves the reticuloendothelial system, muscle surfaces, and adrenal glands. The reactivation of latent infections frequently occurs in patients with compromised immunity, such as in AIDS patients. Primary exposure may be asymptomatic or associated with a cold-like syndrome, including pneumonia, pleurisy, lung cavitation, and mediastinal lymphadenopathy. Metastatic sites include the reticuloendothelial system (hepatosplenomegaly, lymphadenopathy, anemia, leukopenia, and thrombocytopenia), the mucous membranes (oronasopharyngeal ulcerations), the intestinal tract (malabsorption), and adrenal insufficiency. Even if
<img file="MX356367B_D0268.tif" />
273 most primary infections' resolve * spontaneously, when associated with compromised immunity such as in AIDS patients, relapse continues and is frequently associated with hematogenous pneumonia, ARDS, disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC), hematogenically distributed papillopustules, and meningitis . Histoplasmosis is treated with amphotericin B (especially in acutely ill immunocompromised patients with hematogenous spread), intraconazoles, and ketoconazole.
Paracoccidioidiomycosis, caused by
Paracoccidioides brasiliensis is an inhaled mycosis that can cause primary lung infection or hematogenically disseminated disease, predominantly involving the skin, mucous membranes, reticuloendothelial system, and adrenals. The infection may be initially asymptomatic but latent and then revive. Treatment of this infection uses ketoconazole, intraconazole, and sulfonamides.
Systemic invasive mycoses resulting from opportunistic pathogens, occurring in immunocompromised hosts, include candidiasis, cryptococcosis, aspergillosis, mucomicosis, and pneumocystosis. By elevating the immune response in a compromised immune system, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention may also have
274
IMPI
ΙΝΠΤΓυΤ · MEXICAN)> • f THE INDUSTRY PROPERTY!
<img file="MX356367B_D0269.tif" />
Encephalitozoon
Pleistophora is of therapeutic value in the treatment of these conditions, 'especially when combined with conventional therapies.
Treatments for candidiasis (caused by Candida albicans, C. tropicalis, C. glabrata), cryptococcosis (caused by Criptococcus neoformans), aspergillosis (caused by Aspergillus flavus, A. fumigatus, A. tereus and A. niger) and mucormycosis (caused Rhizopus arrhizus, Rhizomuco, Ansidia, Cunninghamella, Mertierella, Saksenaea spp.) can be treated by one or more of the following, imidazole, ketoconazole, intraconazole, fluconazole, amphotericin B with and without flucytosine. Newly reclassified pneumocystitis (caused by pneumocystis carnii) from protozoa to fungi is treated with intravenous trimethoprim-sulfamethoxole (TMP-SMZ) and ispthioneate, TMP-dapsone, trimetrexate, clindamycin-primaquine, and atovane.
Microsporidiosis caused by Microsporidia parasites was recently reclassified from protozoa to fungi. These are single-celled organisms that have mitosomes instead of mictochondria. Organisms that can cause death in humans include: Enterocytozoon bieneusi, Encephalitozoon intestinalis, Encephalitozoon spp., Trachipleistophora hellem, cunculim hominis,
Trachipleistophora anthropophtera, Nosema connori, Nosema
275
IMP
XβΤΓΕΡΟ MLXICa.t as La MUHEttkE? μ-βιάτειαι
<img file="MX356367B_D0270.tif" />
ocularum, Brachiola vesicularum, Vittaforma ··· corneae-, Microsporidium ceylonensis, Microsporidium africanum, Brachiola algerae.
Infections are believed to be transmitted to humans by direct contact with animals, contaminated water, or another infected host. After infecting host cells, the sporoplasm grows, dividing, or forming a multinucleated plasmodium that can have complex life cycles that include both asexual and sexual reproduction. Autoinfection by successive generations and debilitating chronic diseases frequently characterize microsporidial infections.
The clinical manifestations of the disease can vary depending on the species and the immune status of the host and include conjunctivitis (eg
V.
corneae), chronic diarrhea, malabsorption and wasting (eg, E. bieneusi, E. intestinalis).
Treatments for ocular, intestinal, and disseminated microsporosis include the administration of albendazole. Topical application of fumagilin can also be used effectively to treat microsporidial keratoconjunctivitis. Other drugs include anthelmintics (eg, albendazole), antibiotics (eg, fumagilin), immunomodulators (eg, metronidazole).
thalidomide), antiprotozoa (eg,
<img file="MX356367B_D0271.tif" />
276 parasitic
d. Protozoa
Diseases such as those resulting from malaria, schistosomiasis, and leishmaniasis disorders are among the most prevalent and important health problems in developing countries. These diseases pose particular challenges in that they can evade host immunity through various means, including: 1) they live within host cells (eg, leishmania), 2) they rapidly change surface antigens (eg, trypanosomes) and 3) they disguise themselves as host cells by displaying host antigens (eg, schistosomiasis). The use of immunosuppressive drugs in the treatment of cancer and in conjunction with organ transplants, as well as the global prevalence of AIDS, may reactivate latent or sub-clinical infections of Plasmodium spp., Toxoplasma spp., Leishmania spp., Cryptosporidium spp. , Trypanosoma spp., And helminths.
For chronic infections resulting from infections with protozoal parasites, the antiPD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be combined by administration in combination with, prior to, or subsequent to standard anti-protozoal therapies.
Malaria, caused by parasites of the genus
Plasmodium (eg, P. ovale, P. malariae, P. falciparum, P.
vivax), the infectious cycle begins as a sporozite that
277
<img file="MX356367B_D0272.tif" />
"NSVlTÜTO MtglCANL üt La» k; iPi * · ».
INWIC '·' 'develops in the intestine of the annotating mosquito iiémBTa. When transmitted to humans, these sporozites invade and multiply within liver cells without inducing an inflammatory reaction. The progeny of these organisms, called merozoites, then invade the red blood cells and initiate the clinical phase of the disease, typically characterized by fever and chills. In areas of the world where the infection is endemic, almost all residents harbor chronic, low-level, low-to-moderate-pathogenic infections, with increasing levels of IgG antibodies that provide protection from entry of merozoites into erythrocytes.
Anti-malaria drugs currently available for both clinical disease treatment and prophylaxis include: artemether-lumefantrine (therapy, eg, Coartem® and Riamet®), artesunate-amodiaquine (therapy), artesunate-mefloquine (therapy), artesunates sulfadoxine / pyrimethamine (therapy), atovaquone-proguanil, (therapy and prophylaxis, eg, Malarone®) , quinine (therapy), chloroquine (therapy and prophylaxis), cotrifazid (therapy and prophylaxis), doxycycline (therapy and prophylaxis), mefloquine (therapy and prophylaxis, eg, Lariam®), primaquine (therapy in
P. vivax and P. ovale only; not for prophylaxis), proguanil (prophylaxis), sulfadoxine-primetamine (therapy and prophylaxis), hydroxychloroquine, (therapy and prophylaxis, eg, Plaquenil®).
<img file="MX356367B_D0273.tif" />
278
Through the reactivation of allergic cells, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be particularly therapeutic to aid in the clearance of malaria parasites.
Toxoplasmosis, caused by parasites of the genus Toxoplasma, is frequently asymptomatic, but a small fraction can develop clinical disease, which can vary from acute benign lymphadenopathy to fatal infections of the central nervous system. Sources of infection include cysts in raw or partially cooked pork or ram, or past oocytes in feces of infected cats. Infection commonly occurs in humans through the gastrointestinal tract, and protozoa can penetrate and proliferate (as tachyzoites) in virtually every cell in the body. These tachyzoites can produce slow-growing, ineffective tiny body-filled cysts (bradyzoites) that remain viable for long periods of time, resulting in latent chronic infection. Hosts with compromised immune systems, such as those taking immunosuppressive drugs or suffering from HIV, are particularly prone to toxoplasmosis.
Medications used to treat primary toxoplasmosis include the following: primetamine, with and without attached antibiotics (eg, sulfadiazine,
279
<img file="MX356367B_D0274.tif" />
clindamycin, spiramycin, and minocycline). Latent toxoplasmosis can be treated with antibiotics, atovaquone, with and without clindamycin.
Leishmaniasis, caused by parasites of the Leishmania genus, infects macrophages of the skin and viscera, and is transmitted in humans through sand flies. Since there is little or no specific antibody in serum, cell-mediated immunity through activated T cells appears to be a critical pathway through which the infection is cleared. Old World Leishmaniasis, also known as tropical disease, is caused by various Leishmania species: L. tropica, K. major and L. aethiopica. New World Leishmaniasis is caused by several subspecies of L. Mexicana and L. braziliensis. These parasites induce a strong cell-mediated immune response, but the result of clinical disease also results in part from the host response. If the host installs a suppressed or inadequate cell-mediated response, the result is diffuse chronic cutaneous leishmaniasis, with little hope of spontaneous cure (eg, L. aethiopica, L. Mexican). If the host installs an excessive cell-mediated response, the response is lupoid leishmaniasis or recurrence with the appearance of persistent non-nucleated lymphoid nodules at the edge of primary lesions (eg, L. tropica). Leishmaniasis
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0275.tif" />
280 Recurrence can appear 1 to 10 years after the initial injury. There are two forms of the disease, cutaneous and visceral, the cutaneous form manifesting cutaneous lesions with cell-mediated immunity critical to cleansing. In the visceral form, cell-mediated immunity is insufficient or non-existent and the disease manifests clinically as polyclonal B-cell hypergammaglobulinemia, leukopenia, splenomegaly, and elevated TNF-a production.
Miltefosine (eg, Impávido®) and paramyocin are currently available treatments for both cutaneous and visceral leishmaniasis.
Cryosporidiosis, caused by infections of protozoa of the Crytosporidia genus, results from direct human contact with fecal droppings from infected hosts. Infection of the intestinal mucous tissue can result in diarrhea. The disease typically manifests as an acute infection, but can become chronic,
<td>especially</td><td>in</td><td>individuals</td><td>immuno-compromised.</td><td></td><td>The</td>
<td>treatments</td><td>are</td><td>typically</td><td colspan="2">palliative, especially</td><td>of</td>
<td>hydration,</td><td>but</td><td>paromomycin,</td><td>azithromycin and Ig</td><td colspan="2">serum</td>
<td colspan="3">(eg, Lactobin-R®) have had</td><td>cleaning success</td><td>of</td><td>the</td>
infection.
Trypanosomiasis, caused by the parasite
Trypanosoma (eg, T. brucei, subsp., Gambiense, rhodesiense,
<img file="MX356367B_D0276.tif" />
281 It infects humans and livestock through bites from the Tsetse fly. The challenge is that this pathogen poses results of successive generations of populations deploying different surface antigens. Infections are characterized by high levels of non-specific and non-protective serum immunoglobulins.
Treatments for trypanosomiasis include intravenous administration of the following: pentamidine (for Tb gambiense), intravenous suramine (for Tb rhodesiense), eflornithine, melarsoprol with and without nifurtimox.
Helminthic infection, resulting from trematodes (eg, Schistosoma spp.), Cestodes, and nematodes shares common immune responses with the eosinophilic and reaginic antibody, responses that are dependent on T cells.
Schistosomiasis (aka bilhariza), caused by Shistosoma mansoni, S. japonicum, S. haematobium and S. mekongi, begins its life cycle as eggs in water, which is then incubated in miracidia, which penetrates snails and creates multiple generations of sporocysts. These in turn produce triple-tailed fences that can infect the blood stream of a human host like a schistosomula that initially migrates to the lungs, and then to the liver. These nails eventually form pairs, mate, and lay eggs in the mesenteric venules. Although many of these eggs travel to the intestines and are
282
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
IN!? STPI * | they excrete, some become trapped in the suh-mncosa, the portal venules of the liver and other organs of the body. The granulomatous inflammation associated with trapped eggs is the definitive symptom of chronic schistosomiasis.
Treatments for schistosomiasis include the administration of Praziquantel®, antimony, Oxamniquine (S. mansoni) and Mirazid®.
Cestode infections can be classified into two groups, one is the adult tapeworm that lives in the intestine such as Diphyllobothrium latum and Taenia saginara, which has a restricted non-humoral immune effect. The second group describes a larval solitary cyst in migratory tissue such as Hymenolepis nana, Echinococcus granulosus and Taenia solium, which induces strong host parenteral responses and protective antibodies in serum. The most serious human cestode infection is echinococcosis, which, when implanted in the liver, lungs, brain, kidneys, or other parts of the body, can result in the formation of hydatid cysts.
Treatments for echinococcosis include administration of metronidazole, albendazole, and surgical intervention, such as removal, aspiration, marsupialization, or omentopexy.
Nematodes are the most widely varied and widely distributed helminthics that infect humans,
283
<img file="MX356367B_D0277.tif" />
causing disorders such as trichinosis, ascariasis, filariosis and estrogilodiosis. Trichinosis, caused by Trichinella spiralis, can result from ingestion of the T. spiralis larva in raw or partially cooked meat such as pork. In humans, infections emit a strong humoral response with elevated IgM, followed by IgG production, followed by rapid expulsion of antibody-damaged worms by T lymphocytes.
The only known treatment to destroy adult worms in the intestine is thiabendazole, although there is no known treatment to kill larvae.
Ascaris, also known as a giant roundworm (Ascaris lumbricoides), is a common parasite in humans that results from ingesting fecally contaminated substances. Although patients can remain asymptomatic for very long periods of time, as the larval stages travel through the body, they can cause visceral damage, peritonitis and inflammation, an enlarged liver or spleen, toxicity, and pneumonia.
Treatments administration of pyrantel mebendazole pamoate (eg, albendazole, thiabendazole for ascariasis include (eg, Vermox®), piperazine,
Antiminth®, Pin-Rid®, Pin-X®), with or without piperazine, hexylresorcinol, santonin and Chenopodium oil.
The
284
IMPI
MUICANO INSTITUTE
DC LA pg r.lotiO hdustwmi
<img file="MX356367B_D0278.tif" />
Anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention can be administered in combination with, prior to or subsequent to, the administration of these therapies for the treatment of ascariasis.
Filariasis, caused by filiarid nematodes, is introduced into humans using insect vectors.
Onchocerca volvulus, which causes onchoceriasis or river blindness, is transmitted by blackfly bites. Infectious larvae anchor subcutaneously and develop in adults, induce a host fibrogenic response, and diffuse large numbers of microfilariates that disperse subcutaneously and throughout the eye, further inducing keratitis or retinitis which then causes the cornea to become opaque. . Lymphatic filariasis results from infection with Brugia spp. And Wuchereria spp. Over time, scarring of the lymphatic tissue, especially at the border, can prevent drainage, resulting in a disfiguring condition of elephantiasis.
The primary treatment for filariasis is the administration of the antibiotic ivermectin, albendazole, and diethylcarbamazine citrate (DEC, Hetrazan®) with or without ivermectin or albendazole. Other treatment prospects include doxycycline, which destroys a symbiotic bacteria, Wolbochia.
Strongyloidosis, caused by parasites of the
<img file="MX356367B_D0279.tif" />
<img file="MX356367B_D0280.tif" />
285 Strongyloides genus (eg, S. stercoralis, S. fulleborni), is a disease that passes to humans through fecally contaminated soil. These can exist both in a free life cycle (rhabditiform larvae maturing in adult worms) as well as in a parasitic cycle (filariform larvae maturing in adult worms) that penetrates the skin, travels to the lungs, then to the pharynx and finally resides in the intestine. Self-infection with Strongyloides is also known to occur, which is essentially repeated infection by successive generations of filariform larvae.
Infections can be asymptomatic or can be characterized by pain and diarrhea in the gastrointestinal tract, Loffler's syndrome in the lungs (ie, eosinophilia), and urticaria. Blood eosinophilia may also be present. Since persistent Strongyloides infection can mimic peptic ulcer, misdiagnosis of gall bladder disease and Crohn's disease is common. This is a particular problem in immunocompromised hosts.
The known treatments for Strongyloidosis are ivermectin, albendazole, or thiabendazole, but since this medication only destroys adult worms, repeated administration is necessary.
and. Vaccination
<img file="MX356367B_D0281.tif" />
286
ΙΜΡΐ
ÍNSTi niT · MetICANü LA MOMLUAD INlMISTK.Wl
Vaccination or the administration of antigenic material to induce immunity to disease is routinely used to prevent or lessen the effects of infection by a pathogen. Enhancement of host immunity can be used in unwanted antigens found not only in infectious pathogens, but also in diseased host tissue (eg, cancerous). Traditionally, vaccines are derived from whole, weakened or killed pathogens, but they can also be peptides representing epitopes in the intact pathogen that are specifically recognized by class I or class II major human histocompatibility complex (MHC) molecules. Peptide antigens of particular interest are those that are specifically recognized by T cells.
It has recently been shown that the combination of a therapeutic vaccination with the administration of blocking PD-Ll in depleted CD8 + T cells resulted in improved viral function and control in a mouse model of chronic infection. Ha et al., J. Exp. Med., 205 (3): 543-555 (2008). As a result, the anti-PD-Ll antibodies described herein can also be combined with antigen vaccination (eg, administered before, simultaneously, or subsequently) to treat infection (eg, acute and chronic) that results from a viral, bacterial invasion. , by fungi or protozoa as well as tumor immunity.
287
IMPI
IKTTTUTO MEXICAN »OE LA PküPIÍDAlL» INU'.IJ-TRIAl
Mn • NOW
G. Pharmaceutical Dosages: - The desired doses and drug concentration of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may vary depending on the particular use contemplated. Determination of the appropriate dose or route of administration is within the skill of the skilled technician. Animal experiments provide a reliable guide for determining effective doses for therapy in humans. Inter-species scaling of effective doses can be done following the principles established by Mordenti, J. and Chappell W., The Use of Interspecies Scaling in Toxicokinetics, in Toxicokinetics and New Drug Development (Toxicokinetics and development of new drugs), Yacobi et al., Eds., Pergamon Press, New York 1989, pp. 42-46.
When in vivo administration of the polypeptides or antibodies described herein is used, normal dose amounts may range from about 10 ng / kg to about 100 mg / kg of mammalian body weight or more per day, preferably from about 1 mg / kg / day to 10 mg / kg / day, depending on the route of administration. Guidance regarding particular dosages and delivery methods is provided in the literature: see, eg, US Patents. US 4,657,760; 5,206,344; or
<img file="MX356367B_D0282.tif" />
288
ΙΜΡΙ
INSTITUT · MiJUCAN ·
SAY THE INNOllsTRlAI PROPERTY
5,225,212. It is within the scope of the invention that different formulations will be effective for different treatments and different disorders and that administration intended to treat a specific organ or tissue may need to be supplied in a different way than for another organ or tissue. Furthermore, the doses can be administered by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion. For repeated administrations for several days or more, depending on the condition, treatment is sustained until suppression of symptoms of the desired disease occurs. However, other dosage regimens may be helpful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and tests.
H. Formulation Administration
The formulation of the present invention, including but not limited to, reconstituted and liquid formulations, is administered to a mammal in need of treatment with the anti-PD-Ll antibody, preferably a human, according to known methods, such as intravenous administration as a rapid injection or by continuous infusion over a period of time, by intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, intra-articular, intrasynovial, intrathecal, oral routes, topical or inhalation.
289
ΙΜΡΐ
ΙΛΪΤΓΓΊΤΟ MEXICAN
Say LA ÍROPrcOAÍ) <«5 INDUSTRY!
<img file="MX356367B_D0283.tif" />
In preferred embodiments, the formulations are administered to the mammal by subcutaneous (ie, under the skin) administration.
For such purposes, the formulation can be injected using a syringe. However, other devices are available for administration of the formulation such as injection devices (eg, devices
INJECT-EASE<sup>T</sup>
GENJECT ™); injection pens (such as GENPEN ™); auto-injector devices, needleless devices (eg, MEDIJECTOR ™ and BIOJECTOR ™); and subcutaneous patch delivery systems.
In a specific embodiment, the present invention is directed to kits for a single dose delivery unit. Such kits comprise a container of an aqueous formulation of protein or therapeutic antibody, including both single and multiple chamber pre-filled syringes. Exemplary pre-filled syringes are available from Vetter GmbH, Ravensburg, Germany.
The appropriate dose (therapeutically effective amount) of the protein will depend, for example, on the condition to be treated, the severity and course of the condition, whether the protein is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, on previous therapy, the patient's medical history and the response to the anti-PD-Ll antibody, the format of the formulation used and the
<img file="MX356367B_D0284.tif" />
290
ΪΜΡϊ iNsmvro m »ican <_. .- _
OF THE MONEDAD 'Λ. INWSnhAI ^> 7
The progress of such through techniques discretion of the attending physician. The anti-PD-Ll antibody is suitably administered to the patient at one time or during a series of treatments and can be administered to the patient at any time from diagnosis onwards. The anti-PD-Ll antibody can be administered as the sole treatment or in conjunction with other drugs or therapies useful to treat the condition in question.
For anti-PD-Ll antibodies, the initial candidate dose can range from about 0.1 to 20 mg / kg for administration to the patient, which can take the form of one or more separate administrations. However, other dosage regimens may be helpful.
Therapy is easily monitored conventionally.
I. Articles and Manufacture
In another embodiment of the invention, an article of manufacture is provided which contains the formulation and preferably provides instructions for its use. The article of manufacture comprises a container. Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials (eg, double chamber vials), syringes (such as single or double chamber syringes), and test tubes. The container can be formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic. The container contains the formulation. The label, which is on or associated with the container may indicate
291
ÍMPíés © iwsrmrro mejücawi
HYGIENE / YES. - To iNnusT »!»! '-xSr-Ls.
instructions for reconstitution and / or use. ' The label may further indicate that the formulation is useful or intended for subcutaneous administration and / or for the treatment of a dysfunctional T-cell disorder. The container containing the formulation may be a multipurpose vial that allows repeated administrations (eg, 2 to 6 administrations) of the reconstituted formulation. The article of manufacture may further comprise a second container comprising a suitable diluent (eg, BWFI). When mixing the diluent and the lyophilized formulation, the final protein concentration in the reconstituted formulation will generally be at least 50 mg / ml. The article of manufacture may further include other commercially and user-desirable materials, including other buffers, diluents, filters, needles, syringes, and packaging inserts with instructions for use.
The invention will be more fully understood by reference to the following examples. However, these should not be construed as limiting the scope of the invention. All citations throughout the description are expressly incorporated herein by reference.
In another embodiment, the invention provides an article of manufacture comprising the formulation described herein for administration in an auto292 device.
IMPI • ΙΠΠΊΙΤΟ MEXICANO OE '.A FROREDAR industrial
<img file="MX356367B_D0285.tif" />
injector. An auto-injector can describe'T? 3 * é ”4 '<sup>-</sup>Ct) Trrc— * urr injection device that upon activation, will supply its contents without any additional action necessary for the patient or the provider. These are particularly suitable for self-medication of therapeutic formulations when the supply rate must be constant and the delivery time is longer than some moments.
EXAMPLE 1
Identification of Anti-PD-Ll Antibodies in Libraries of
Phage
Classification and Selection of Libraries to Identify Anti-PD-Ll Antibodies
Human (R&D Systems, cat # 156-B7) and murine (R&D Systems, cat # 1019-B7) PD-L1 Fe fusions were used as antigens for alternate library sorting. Specifically, phage libraries were ranked first against human antigen, followed by murine, human, and murine antigen in the subsequent three rounds. Maxisorp® 96-well Nunc immunoplates were coated overnight at 4 ° C with the target antigen (10 pg / ml) and blocked for 1 hour at room temperature with PBST phage blocking buffer (phosphate buffered saline ( PBS) and bovine serum albumin (BSA) at 1% (weight / volume) and Tween-20 at 0.05% (volume / volume)). VH antibody phage libraries
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0286.tif" />
293
WSTffUT · MIXICANO WIAFROPIÍDAD
INDUSTRY! '«ΝΓΒχΤ? (See, eg, Lee et al., J. Immunol. Meth., 2 8 4: 1Ϊ9 * · 1 * 3 2τ —- 2Ό-Ο49 ——— and VH / VL (see Liang et al. , J. Mol. Biol., 366: 815-829, 2007) were added to the plates with antigen separately and incubated overnight at room temperature. The next day, the antigen-coated plates were washed ten times with PBT (PBS with 0.05% Tween-20) and the bound phage was eluted with 50mM HCI and 500mM NaCI for 30 minutes and neutralized with one volume equal to 1M Tris base (pH 7.5). The recovered phages were amplified in E. coli Blue XL-1 cells. During subsequent rounds of selection, incubation of the antibody phage with the antigen-coated plates was reduced to 2 to 3 hours, and the stringency of plate washing was gradually increased.
After 4 rounds of panning, significant enrichment was observed. 96 clones were taken from each VH and VH / VL library classification to determine if they specifically bound to both human and murine PD-Ll-Fc. The variable regions of these clones were sequenced by PCR to identify single sequence clones.
The original clones of interest were reformatted into IgGs by cloning the V regions<sub>L</sub> and V<sub>H</sub> of individual clones in the vector LPG3 and LPG4 (Lee et al., supra), respectively, transiently expressing themselves in
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0287.tif" />
294 mammalian CHO cells and purified with a protein A column. All 13 phage antibodies were evaluated for their ability to block the interaction between soluble PD-l-Fc fusion protein and human or mouse PD-Ll expressed in 293 cells (IC 50 values are designated in Table 1 - upper half). YW243.55, the antibody with the IC<sub>5</sub>or lower to block binding of human PD-Ll to PD-1 was selected for subsequent affinity maturation to improve its affinity for both human and mouse PD-Ll. (Table 1). An antibody with comparable cross-reactivity against both primate and murine species (as well as human affinity retention) would provide an improved therapeutic value, since the same antibody that has been characterized in experimental models can be used in human clinical trials. This avoids the uncertainty resulting from the use of a specific model surrogate.
Construction of Libraries for Affinity Improvement of Clones Derived from Library V<sub>H</sub>.
Phagemid pW0703 (derived from phagemid pV0350-2b (Lee et al., J. Mol. Biol., 340: 1073-1093 (2004)), which contains the stop codon (TAA) at all CDR-L3 positions and which displays monovalent Fab on the surface of bacteriophage M13, served as the library template for grafting heavy chain variable domains (V<sub>H</sub>) of the
295
<img file="MX356367B_D0288.tif" />
clones of interest from library V<sub>H</sub> for affinity maturation. Both hard and soft randomization strategies were used for affinity maturation. For hard randomization, a light chain library with selected positions of the three light chain CDRs was randomized using amino acids designed to mimic natural human antibodies, and degeneracy of the designed DNA was described in Lee et al., (J. Mol Biol., 340, 1073-1093 (2004)). For soft randomization, residues at positions 91 to 94 and 96 of CDR-13, 28 to 31 and 34 to 35 of CDR-H1, 50, 52 and 53 to 58 of CDR-H2, 95 to 99 and 100A of CDR-H3 were objective; and two different combinations of CDR circuits, L3 / H1 / H2 and L3 / H3, were selected for randomization. To achieve the soft randomization conditions, which introduced the mutation rate of approximately 50% at the selected positions, the mutagenic DNA was synthesized with base mixtures of 70-10-10-10 favoring wild-type nucleotides (Gallop et al., Journal of Medicinal Chemistry 37: 1233: 1251 (1994)).
Phage Classification to Generate Affinity Improvement
Previously identified phage clones were plated for the first round, followed by five or six rounds of solution classification.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0289.tif" />
296
Libraries were classified against murine and human PD-Ll-Fc separately (R&D Systems, cat # 156.B7, cat # 1019B7, respectively). For the human PD-Ll-Fc target, in the first round of plaque classification, three libraries were classified against the target coated plate (NUNC Maxisorp® plate) separately with phage introduction of approximately 3 OD / ml in BSA at 1 % and Tween 20 at 0.05% for 2 hours at room temperature. After the first round of plate classification, a solution classification was carried out to increase the rigor of the selection. For solution classification, 1 OD / ml of phage propagated from the first round of plaque classification were incubated with 20 nM of biotinylated target protein (concentration based on IC value).<sub>50</sub> of the original clone) in 100 μΐ of buffer containing 1% Superblock (Pierce Biotechnology) and 0.05% Tween-20 for 30 minutes at room temperature. The mixture was further diluted 10X with 1% Superblock and 100 µΐ / ροζο was applied to the neutravidin-coated wells (5 µ / ml) for 15 min at room temperature with gentle agitation so that the biotinylated target bound to the phage. The wells were washed 10X with 0.05% PBS-ween-20. To determine the background binding, the control wells containing the phage with targets that were not biotinylated were captured on plates coated with neutravidin. The
297
<img file="MX356367B_D0290.tif" />
Bound phage was eluted with 0.1 N HCI for ~ 2Ό * ñíTi 1U L us ·, n 1/10 volumes of 1 M Tris, pH 11, neutralized, titrated and propagated for the next round. Then, five more rounds of solution classification were carried out along with two methods to increase the rigor of the selection. Of these the first is for rate selection by decreasing the concentration of the biotinylated target protein from 4 nM to 0.5 nM, and of these the second is for out-of-rate selection by adding excessive amounts of the non-biotinylated target protein (100 to 2,000 times more) for weaker linkers to compete at either room temperature or 37 ° C. Also, phage introduction decreased (0.1 ~ 0.5 OD / ml) to decrease phage binding. For the murine PD-Ll-Fc target, the phage classification method is similar to that described above for the human PD-Ll-Fc antigen, with some modifications. Specifically, 100 nM of biotinylated murine PD-Ll-Fc was used for solution panning immediately after the first round of plate panning. In the subsequent four rounds of solution panning, the biotinylated target was reduced from 10 nM to 1 nM and a 200 to 500-fold excess of the non-biotinylated target was added at room temperature.
The affinity matured clones were then further selected with the Screening procedure.
High Performance Affinity ELISA described in the following
<img file="MX356367B_D0291.tif" />
298
IMPI é
Χίτπυτ ·
Of U SHOULD * example.
High Performance Affinity Selection ELISA (Single Point Competition)
Colonies were collected from the seventh and sixth round selections for the human and murine PD-Ll target, respectively. Colonies were grown overnight at 37 ° C in 150 µΐ / ροζο 2YT medium with 50 pg / ml carbenicillin and ΙΕΙΟ / ml KO7 in a 96-well plate (Falcon). From the same plate, a colony of source phages infected with XL-1 was taken as a control. Nunc Maxisorp® 96-well plates were coated with 100 µΐ / ροζο of human and murine PD-Ll-Fc protein (2 µ / ml) separately in PBS at 4 ° C overnight or at room temperature for 2 hours. The plates were blocked with 65 µΐ of 1% BSA for 30 minutes and 40 µΐ of 1% Tween 20 for another 30 minutes.
<td>The</td><td>supernatant of</td><td>phage</td><td>diluted to</td><td> 1:10</td><td>in</td>
<td>shock absorber</td><td>(PBS with BSA at</td><td> 0.5%,</td><td>Tween 20 to</td><td> 0.05%)</td><td>of</td>
<td colspan="2">ELISA (immunosorbent assay</td><td colspan="2">bound to enzymes)</td><td>with or</td><td>without</td>
<td>10 nM of the</td><td>target protein</td><td>in 100</td><td colspan="3">μΐ of the total volume and</td>
it was incubated for at least 1 hour at room temperature on an F plate (NUNC). 75 µΐ of the mixture with or without the target protein were transferred side by side onto the plates coated with the target protein. The plate was gently shaken for 15 minutes to allow capture of the unbound phage in
299
IMPI
IMTITUT® MUIÍAJO ü £ ΙΑ PUCPIBJAD industrial
<img file="MX356367B_D0292.tif" />
the plate coated with the target protein The plate was "washed at least five times with PBS-0.05% Tween 20. binding was quantified by adding horseradish peroxidase (HRP) conjugated anti-M13 antibody in ELISA buffer (1: 5000) and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature. The plates were washed with PBS-0.05% Tween 20 at least five times. Next, 100 μΐ / ροζο of a 1: 1 ratio of 3.3 'peroxidase substrate, 5.5'-tetramethylbenzidine (TMB) and peroxidase solution B (H2O2) (Kirkegaard-Perry Laboratories ( Gaithersburg, MD)) and incubated for 5 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was stopped by adding 100 μΐ of 1 M phosphoric acid (H<sub>3</sub>PO<sub>4</sub>) to each well and allowed to incubate for 5 minutes at room temperature. The OD (optical density) of the yellow color in each well was determined using a standard ELISA plate reader a The reduction in OD (%) was calculated by that of the wells with
fifty nm.
following equation.
OD reduction<sub>450</sub>nm (%) = [(OD<sub>450n</sub>m competitor) / (OD<sub>4</sub>5<sub>0nm</sub> well without competitor)] x 100
Compared to OD reduction<sub>45</sub>or<sub>n</sub>m (%) of the original phage well (100%), the clones that had the OD reduction<sub>45</sub>or<sub>n</sub>m (%) less than 50% for both human and murine target were taken for sequence analysis. Unique clones were selected for preparation of the
<img file="MX356367B_D0293.tif" />
300
IMPI «πτητο MftKANO rj
W LA ΡΚΟΠίΒΑβ INPST »l« l phage to determine binding affinity (IC<sub>5</sub>or phage) against both human and murine PD-Ll-Fc by comparison with the source clones.
Materials hPD-l-Fc, hPD-Ll-Fc, hB7.1-Fc, mPD-Ll-Fc and mB7.1 were purchased from R & D Systems. hPD-Ll expressing 293 cells was generated at Genentech using standard techniques. Carba anti-human IgG Fe F (ab ')<sub>2</sub> was acquired from
Jackson ImmunoResearch Laboratories.
Protein Conjugation
The PD-1-Fc and B7.1-Fc proteins were biotinylated with EZ sulfo-NHS-LC-LC-biotin linker (Pierce) for 30 minutes at room temperature as described by the manufacturer. Excess unreacted biotin was removed with high capacity Quick Spin columns, G50-Sephadex (Roche) as described by the manufacturer.
Goat anti-human IgG Fe F (ab ')<sub>2</sub> Ruthenium was labeled with MSD sulfo-label NHS-ester (Meso Scale Discovery) as described by the manufacturer and excess unreacted sulfo-label was removed with a high capacity Quick Spin column, G50-Sephadex.
ECL cell binding assay to test for phage antibodies
The resulting antibody concentrations in
50% inhibition (IC<sub>50</sub>) of the link from hPD-l-Fc to hPd-Ll which
301
<img file="MX356367B_D0294.tif" />
expresses 293 cells, were measured by the electrochemistryiniscence cell binding assay (ECL). 293 hPD-Ll expression cells were washed with phosphate buffered saline (PBS) and seeded at 25,000 cells per well in 25 µl PBS in a 96-well herd-binding plate (Meso Scale Discovery). The plate was incubated at room temperature to allow the cells to bind to the carbon surface of the plate. 25 µΐ of 30% FBS was added to each well and the plate was incubated for 30 minutes with gentle shaking to block non-specific binding sites. The plate was washed three times with PBS in an ELISA microplate washer (EL x 405 Select, Bio-Tek Instruments) under mild delivery and aspiration conditions. Excess PBS was removed in the wells by wiping the plate with paper towels. 12.5 µΐ of 2 x the concentration of the antibodies were added to each well in 3% FBS in PBS (assay buffer) and followed by 12.5 µΐ of 4 pg / ml (2 X the concentration) of hPD-l-biotin in assay buffer and the plate was incubated for one hour with gentle shaking. The plate was washed 3X with PBS in a microplate washer and the plate was cleaned on paper towels. 25 µΐ of 2 pg / ml streptavidin-ruthenium (Meso Scale Discovery) was added and incubated in assay buffer at room temperature for 30 minutes with gentle shaking. It was washed 3X with PBS in the microplate washer and the plate was cleaned on
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0295.tif" />
302 paper. 150 μΐ of 1 X of surfactant-free MSD reading buffer (Meso Scale Discovery) were added. The luminescence light emitted at 620 nm was read on a Sector Imager 6000 reader (Meso Scale Discovery). ECL values were analyzed with the concentrations of the test antibodies used in the assay, using a four-parameter nonlinear least squares adjustment, to obtain the IC50 values for each competitor in the assay. Results and Discussion:
Fifteen unique phage antibodies derived from YW243.55 that bound to both human and murine PD-L1 were selected and reformatted to full-length IgGl antibodies for further evaluation. The light and heavy chain variable region sequences of these antibodies are reported in Figures 11<sup>to</sup> and B.
All fifteen reformatted antibodies were tested for their ability to block PD-1 binding to 293 cells expressing either human or mouse PD-L1 through an electrochemiluminescent cell binding (ECL) assay. (Table 1 - bottom half: Table 1 Format describes the binding of human soluble PD-l-Fc to cells
293 transected with human PD-L1; Format 2 describes the binding of murine PD-l-Fc to 293 cells transfected with
Murine PD-L1 and Format 3 describe the binding of human PD-1 to 293 cells transfected with murine PD-L1. Even if
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0296.tif" />
303 All fifteen affinity enhanced antibodies had acquired significant cross-reactivity to mouse PD-L1, YW243.55S70 was selected as the primary candidate to follow based on its ability to block both human and mouse PD-Ll binding to PD-1 (Table 1: IC values<sub>5</sub>or 49 pM and 22 pM, respectively).
Table 1
<td rowspan="2">Clone</td><td>Format 1</td><td>Format 2</td><td>Format 3</td>
<td>hPDl-Fcbiotin / hPDLl293 IC50 in nM</td><td>mPDl-Fcbiotin / mPDLl293 IC50 in nM</td><td>hPDl-Fc- biotin / mPDLl- 293 IC50 at nM</td>
<td>YW251.il</td><td> 8 . 6</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>YW243.1</td><td> 0.234</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>YW243.55</td><td> 0.099</td><td></td><td> >100</td>
<td>YW254.1</td><td> >100</td><td> 0.795</td><td></td>
<td>YW254.2</td><td> >100</td><td> 3.76</td><td></td>
<td>YW254.3</td><td> >100</td><td> >100</td><td></td>
<td>YW254.4</td><td> 1.73</td><td> 15.6</td><td></td>
<td>YW254.9</td><td> >100</td><td> 0.224</td><td></td>
<td>YW254.33</td><td> 2.2</td><td> >100</td><td></td>
<td>YW262.4</td><td> 50</td><td> 1.42</td><td></td>
<td>YW2 62.5</td><td> 90</td><td> 25</td><td></td>
<td>YW262.16</td><td> 7.5</td><td> 0.626</td><td></td>
<td>YW262.64</td><td> 0.256</td><td> 100</td><td></td>
<td>YW243.55.5</td><td> 0.104</td><td></td><td> 0.141</td>
<td>YW243.55.8</td><td> 0.061</td><td></td><td> 0.063</td>
<td>YW243.55.30</td><td> 0.108</td><td></td><td> 0.100</td>
<td>YW243.55.34</td><td> 0.084</td><td></td><td> 0.049</td>
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0297.tif" />
304
<td>YW243.55.49</td><td> 0.08</td><td></td><td> 0.032</td>
<td>YW243.55.51</td><td> 0.078</td><td></td><td> 0.031</td>
<td>YW243.55.62</td><td> 0.096</td><td></td><td> 0.066</td>
<td>YW243.55.84</td><td> 0.124</td><td></td><td> 0.051</td>
<td>YW243.55.89</td><td> 0.066</td><td></td><td> 0.13</td>
<td>YW243.55.H12</td><td> 0.103</td><td></td><td> 0.156</td>
<td>YW243.55.H37</td><td> 0.109</td><td></td><td> 0.163</td>
<td>YW243.55.H70</td><td> 0.084</td><td></td><td> 0.042</td>
<td>YW243.55.S1</td><td> 0.114</td><td></td><td> 0.074</td>
<td>YW243.55.S37</td><td> 0.100</td><td></td><td> 0.024</td>
<td>YW243.55.S70</td><td> 0.049</td><td></td><td> 0.022</td>
EXAMPLE 2
Characterization of Anti-PD-Ll Antibodies (BIAcore)
The binding affinities of the anti-PD-Ll phage antibodies YW243.55 and YW243.55S70 against recombinant human and mouse PD-L1 were measured by surface plasmon resonance (SRP) using a BIAcore ™ instrument. Recombinant Human PD-Ll-Fc (R&D Systems, cat # 156-B7) and Recombinant Mouse PD-Ll-Fc (R&D
Systems, cat # 1019-B7) were coated directly onto CM5 biosensors chips to achieve approximately 500 response units (RU). For kinetic measurements, two-fold serial dilutions (3.9 nm to 500 nm) were injected into PBT buffer (PBS with 0.05% Tween 20) at 25 ° C with a flow rate of 30 µ 30 / minute. Association rates (k<sub>on</sub>) and the dissociation rate (k<sub>off</sub>) were calculated using a
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0298.tif" />
305 Simple one-to-one Languir link model (BIAcore
Evaluation Software version 3.2)
The equilibrium dissociation constant (kD) was calculated as the ratio k<sub>OR</sub>ff / k on
The binding affinities of the anti-PD-Ll phage antibody YW243.55 and YW243.55.S70 clones measured are reported below in Table 2.
Table 2
BIAcore Link Affinities
<td rowspan="2">clone</td><td colspan="3">rhPD-Ll Fe immobilized</td><td colspan="3">rmPD-Ll Fe immobilized</td>
<td>k<sub>0</sub>„/ (L / Ms)</td><td>WL S)</td><td>kD (M)</td><td>k<sub>on</sub>/ (l / Ms)</td><td>kon / (l / s)</td><td>kD (M)</td>
<td>YW243.55 (Fab)</td><td>5.80 x 10<sup>5</sup></td><td>7.30 x 10 '<sup>3</sup></td><td>1.26 x 10 '<sup>8</sup></td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td>> 1 x IO '<sup>6</sup></td>
<td>YW243.55 (IgG)</td><td>2.70 x 10<sup>5</sup></td><td>2.60 x 10 '<sup>4</sup></td><td>9.63 x IO '<sup>10</sup></td><td>5.80 x 10<sup>4</sup></td><td>9.20 x 10 '<sup>3</sup></td><td>1.59 x 10 '<sup>7</sup></td>
<td>YW243.55.S70 (Fab)</td><td>5.30 x 10<sup>5</sup></td><td>1.00 x 10 '<sup>4</sup></td><td>1.89 x IO '<sup>10</sup></td><td>4.80 x 10<sup>5</sup></td><td>1.40 x 10 '<sup>3</sup></td><td>2.92 x 19 '<sup>9</sup></td>
<td>YW243.55.S70 (IgG)</td><td>3.90 x 10<sup>5</sup></td><td>6.30 x 10 '<sup>5</sup></td><td>1.62 x IO '<sup>10</sup></td><td>2.80 x 10<sup>5</sup></td><td>1.80 x IO '<sup>4</sup></td><td>6.43 x IO '<sup>10</sup></td>
EXAMPLE 3A
Specificity of anti-PD-Ll antibodies for human PD-Ll,
Rhesus and mouse - FACS and radioligand cell binding assay
This example shows the specificity for the
306
IMPI mexican riwmvTo
OF INDUSTRIAL MURITY
<img file="MX356367B_D0299.tif" />
ηΦ.
Anti-PD-Ll Antibody of the Invention for Rhesus HumaneT PD-Ll and Mouse. Furthermore, it shows the affinity of the antibody for mouse and human PD-Ll expressed in the cell membrane of transfected 293 cells.
Human and mouse PD-Ll was stably transfected into 293 cells. Cells were harvested and plated at 150,000 cells per well in a 96-well plate for binding studies.
Rhesus' blood was obtained from the Southwest Foundation for Biomedical Research (San Antonio, Texas). The blood was diluted with an equal volume of PBS and placed in 96% Ficoll-Paque (GE Healthcare) for separation of mononuclear cells. Mononuclear cells were used from red blood cell cells using erythrocyte lysis buffer (Qiagen) and grown overnight at 1.5 x 10<sup>6</sup> cells / ml with 5 ng / ml PMA plus 1 µΜ ionomycin in 6-well plates. The culture medium was RPMI 1640 with 10% fetal bovine serum, 20 µΜ HEPES and 1: 100 dilutions of the following Gibco supplements: Gluta-MAX, sodium pyruvate, penicillin / streptomycin and non-essential amino acids. Cells were harvested the following day and aliquoted to a 96-well plate for binding studies (approximately 120,000 cells per well).
PD-Ll YW243.55.S70 Antibody or Antibody
307
Lít LA PWJf ttWAIJ INDUSTIUAL control Herceptin® were titrated starting at 10 pg / ml, in serial dilutions of three times and bound to cells in 50 µΐ volumes for 25 minutes on ice. Cells were washed and then ligated with anti-human IgG PE (Caltag) at 20 pg / ml for 25 min on ice. Rhesus cells were also co-stained with FITC CD3 and APC CD4 (BD Biosciences) to distinguish CD4 + T cells.
All samples were run on a FACSCalibur Beckman Dickinson and the mean fluorescence intensity of the PD-L1 binding data was analyzed as a function of anti-PD-Ll antibody concentration using Tree Star, Inc., FlowJo software ®; EC50 values (concentration of the antibody associated with the maximum average bond) were calculated using Kaleidagraph. In addition, equilibrium binding studies were performed to define the precise affinities (Kds) for binding of YW24355S70 to human and mouse PD-L1 expressed in 293 cells (Example 3B). These values are summarized below in Table 3:
Table 3
EC50 Summary
<td>Species</td><td>EC<sub>50</sub> (nm) FACS</td><td>Kd (nM) link radioligando of balance</td>
<td>human</td><td> 0.4</td><td> 0.4</td>
<td>Rhesus</td><td> 0.3</td><td></td>
<td>mouse</td><td> 0.3</td><td> 0.13</td>
<td>rat</td><td> 0.8</td><td></td>
308
<img file="MX356367B_D0300.tif" />
EXAMPLE 3B
Affinity Measurement of Anti-PD-Ll Antibodies to Human and Mouse PD-L1 - Equilibrium Radioligand Cell Binding Assay
293 cells transected with human and mouse PD-L1 were grown in growth medium, consisting of RPMI 1640 medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 2 mM L-glutamine, 1 X penicillin-streptomycin at 37 degrees X in 5% CO2. Cells were washed with binding buffer (50:50 DMEM / F12 with 2% FBS ai and 50 mM Hepes, pH 7.2) and plated in 96 well plates at approximately 230,000 cells in 0.2 ml binding buffer. The anti-PD-Ll antibody, YW243.55.S70.hlgG, was iodinated using the Iodogen method. Radiolabelled anti-Pd-Ll antibodies were purified from<sup>125</sup>Free I-NA by gel filtration using a NAP-5 column; the purified antibody had a specific activity of 17.41 pCi / pg. Competition reaction mixtures of 50 µΐ volumes containing a final concentration of iodinated antibody and decreased concentrations of serially diluted unlabelled antibody were placed in 96-well plates. Stable transected 293 cell lines expressing human PD-L1 and murine PD-L1 were grown in growth medium, consisting of 50:50 DMEM / F12 medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 2 mM L-
<img file="MX356367B_D0301.tif" />
309
<img file="MX356367B_D0302.tif" />
l> fi! .A INDI ISTRIAL PROPERTY glutamine, 1 X penicillin-streptomycin, at 3 / 't elT<sup>-</sup>C02 ai5%. Cells were washed with binding buffer, (50:50 DMEM / F12 with 2% FBS, 50mM HEPES, pH 7.2, and 2mM sodium azide) and added at a density of approximately 200,000 cells at 0.2 ml of binding buffer to 50 μΐ of competition reaction mixtures. The final concentration of the iodinated antibody in each cell competition reaction 'was ~ 50 pM (~ 120,000 cpms per 0.25 ml) and the final concentration of the unlabeled antibody in the cell competition reaction varied, starting at 500 nM and then decreasing by 2 times for 10 concentrations. The competition reactions with cells were incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. The competition reaction with cells for each concentration of unlabeled antibody was analyzed in triplicate. After 2 hours incubation, the competition reactions were transferred to a Millipore Multiscreen filter plate and washed 4X with buffer
<td>link</td><td>for</td><td>pull apart</td><td>the</td><td>antibody</td><td>iodine bound in</td><td>shape</td>
<td>free.</td><td>The</td><td>filters</td><td>I know</td><td>they counted in</td><td>a gamma counter</td><td>Wallac</td>
<td>Wizard</td><td> 1470</td><td>(Perkin</td><td colspan="2">Elmer Life and</td><td>Analytical Sciences</td><td>Inc.,</td>
Wellesley, MA). Binding data was evaluated using NewLigand software (Genentech), which uses the Munson and Robard fitting algorithm to determine the binding affinity of the antibody. Musson et al., Anal. Biochem., 107:
310
220-39 (1980).
IMPI
INÍTmiT »eiXICANO PE LA PROCItOMb IIWUSTWMl
The values
Scatchard corroborate anti-PD-Ll antibody shown in Table 3.
Kd as determined by analysis EC50 values of mouse and human PD-L1 binding as shown
EXAMPLE 4
Selectivity and Affinity of Anti-PD-Ll Antibodies (IC<sub>50</sub>)
This example shows the binding affinity and selectivity test (as IC<sub>50</sub>) used to evaluate the full length anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the present invention for their ability to block PD-L1 binding to both PD-1 and B7.1.
Methods:
Binding of hB7.1-Fc-biotin and hPD-l-Fc-biotin to
ELISA hPD-Ll-Fc (Format 4):
A 384-well Nunc Maxisorp plate was coated with 25 µΐ of 250 ng / ml hPD-Ll-Fc in PBS overnight.
Cells were washed three times with 0.05% Tween in PBS (wash buffer) in a microplate washer and wells were blocked with 0.5% BSA in PBS. Added
12.5 μΐ of 2 x the concentration of the antibodies to each well in 0.05% Tween, 0.5% BSA in PBS (assay diluent) and followed by 12.5 μ of 250 ng / ml (2 X the concentration) of hB7.1 -Fc-biotin in test diluent and the plate was incubated for an hour and a half with shaking.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0303.tif" />
311
Wells were washed six times with wash buffer and 25 µΐ streptavidin-HRP (1: 40,000 in test diluent, GE Healthcare) was added. The plate was incubated for 30 minutes with shaking and the wells were washed six times with wash buffer. 25 µΐ of TMB substrate (Kirkegaard and Perry Laboratories) was added for one hour and the reaction was stopped with 25 µΐ of 1 M phosphoric acid. Absorbance at 450 nm was read and IC values were analyzed<sub>5</sub>or as described under the ECL cell binding assay in Example 1.
Formats 5, 6, 7:
For the binding of hPD-l-Fc-biotin to hPD-Ll-Fc (Format 5), the format is similar to the previous assay except that hPD-l-Fc-biotin was used instead of hB7.1-Fc-biotin for the link. The reaction time of the TMB substrate was 17 minutes.
For the binding of mB7.1-Fc-biotin to mPD-Ll-Fc (Format 6), the format is similar to Format 5, except that mPD-Ll-Fc was used to coat the plate instead of hPDLl-Fc and mB7.1-Fc-biotin was used for binding instead of hB7.1-Fc-biotin. The reaction time of the TMB substrate was 7 minutes.
For binding of mPD-l-Fc-biotin to mPD-Ll-Fc (Format 7), the format is similar to the mouse ELISA mentioned above except that mPD-l-Fc312 was used
IMPI
ICAνΤΌ MKICAJO Jl> LA FROFIEOAB in »ustwim X ^ iigy >> ^ biotin for the link instead of mB7.1-Fc-biotin. "Ti - TMB substrate reaction time was 5 minutes.
Results:
IC assessment<sub>50</sub> of the affinity matured phage anti-PD-Ll 5 antibody YW243.55.S70 to block interactions between designated binding pairs is reported in Table 4. YW243.55.S70 was able to block binding of PD-Ll human to hB7.1 Fc with a maximum mean inhibitory concentration of 38 pM, a relatively 10 concentration comparable to its IC50 value for blocking the PD-L1 / PD-1 interaction (42 pM). Biacore studies measuring YW243.55S70's ability to block interactions of
PD-Ll with both PD-1 and B7.1 were consistent with these ELISA results (data not shown).
Table 4
<td>Antibody</td><td>Format 4 hB7.1- biotin / hPDL1 IC50 in pM</td><td>Format 5 hPD-1- biotin / hPDL1 IC50 in pM</td><td>Format 6 mB7.1 - Biotin / mPDL1 IC<sub>50</sub> in pM</td><td>Format 7 mPD-1- biotin / mPDL1 IC50 in pM</td>
<td>YW243.55.S70</td><td> 38</td><td> 42</td><td> 29</td><td> 48</td>
EXAMPLE 5
Improvement of Cd4 + and CD8 + T cell activity in vitro by in vitro anti-PD-Ll antibody assay
YW243.55.S70 PMEL / B16
This example shows the effect of the anti-PD-Ll antibodies of the invention on the activation of CD8 + T cells.
ΪΜΡΙ □ ΙΟ INSTTCVTO MEXICANA!
° <sup>3</sup> ut the komeoad induitmaí transgenic T cell receptor PMEL, measured by improving the production of IFN-γ in response to the gplOO melanocyte peptide. In this procedure, CD8 + T cells are obtained from transgenic TCR PMEL mice whose CD8 + T cells express a TCR specific for the gplOO peptide. After purification of CD8 + T cells, multiple rounds of stimulation are performed to generate and expand activated CD8 + T cells, which then in turn up-regulate PD-1 expression. In parallel, B16 melanoma cells are treated with IFN-γ to upregulate their PD-Ll expression. The cells are then co-cultured in the presence of the anti-PD-Ll antibody and the effect on IFN-γ production is evaluated. B16 cells were selected for tertiary stimulation because they endogenously express low levels of the gplOO peptide (as opposed to endogenous application of the peptide). Furthermore, since these cells do not express PD-L2, B7.1 or B7.2, the effect of additional signaling unrelated to PD-Ll (eg, signaling via CD28 or CTLA-4 induced signaling or PD-L2 through PD-1) is minimized.
PMEL test:
As shown in Figure 3, anti-PD-Ll antibodies improve both the percentage of PMEL CD8 + T cells that produce IFN-γ and the average levels of IFN-γ produced in response to designated amounts of
<img file="MX356367B_D0304.tif" />
314
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Γ> 6 LA PkOHEUAD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0305.tif" />
gplOO peptide.
D.001.10 In Vitro Assay:
A similar assay using Ova-specific CD4 + Tg TCR cells shows enhanced proliferation of T cells in the presence of the anti-PD-Ll antibody after stimulation with Ova peptide to induce PD-1 expression (Figure 4). In the final stimulation, irradiated Β A20 cells expressing PD-Ll were used to present the designated concentrations of the Ova peptide for Y DO.11.10 cells. Notably, the contribution of the PD-1 / PD-L1 axis is more pronounced at lower degrees of antigen receptor stimulation, levels that more closely reflect the magnitude of stimulation that is physiologically relevant.
Materials and methods:
PMEL test
Primary stimulation (day 0 to 4)
The spleen and mesenteric lymph nodes were harvested from transgenic PMEL T cell receptor mice. Organs were ground into single-cell suspensions and lysed from red blood cell cells. CD8 + T cells were isolated using the CD8 + T cell isolation kit and AutoMACS cell separator (Miltenyi Biotec) according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The spleen was isolated from a sexed non-transgenic mouse
315
IMPI
INJTITWTO MMicxnn • w prqSJSS
<img file="MX356367B_D0306.tif" />
and triturated in a single cell suspension and lcTS were lysed<sup></sup>red blood cell cells. Cells were boosted with 0.1 pg / ml gplOO peptide for two hours at 37 ° C and washed.
Cells were co-cultured in a 96 well flat bottom plate with 200,000 CD8 + PMEL T cells and 75,000 gplOO driven splenocytes for 4 days. The culture medium was Dulcocco's modified Iscove medium + 10% fetal bovine serum + 20 μΜ HEPES and 1: 100 dilutions of the following Gibco supplements: Gluta-MAX, sodium pyruvate, penicillin / streptomycin and amino acids non-essential
Secondary stimulation (day 4 to 7)
The PMEL cultures were spun and the medium was aspirated using a multi-channel pipette. Fresh medium was added and mixed to wash cells, followed by another turn. Most of the medium was removed and antibodies (Herceptin®, YW243.55.S70 or none) were added for a final concentration of 10 pg / ml. The conditions were placed in duplicate wells in such a way that the average production of IFN-y could be evaluated in the evaluation criterion.
DC-1 cells were boosted with 0.1 pg / ml of the gplOO peptide for 2 hours at 37 ° C and washed. GplOO driven DC-1 cells were added to the washed PMEL cultures at 40,000 cells / well. PMEL and the antibody
316
IMPI INSTITUlr MEXICANO DE LA EMOPIEL.AD INDIISTUIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0307.tif" />
DC-1 were co-cultured for 3 days.
Third stimulation (day 7 to 8)
One day before the third stimulation on day 6, melanoma B16 cells were incubated with 20 ng / ml mouse IFN-γ (R&D Systems) overnight to upregulate their PD-L1 expression.
On day 7, the PMEL cultures were spun and the medium was aspirated using a multi-channel pipette. Fresh medium was added and mixed followed by another turn. Most of the medium was removed and the antibodies were added for a final concentration of 10 pg / ml.
After after stimulation overnight with IFN-y, B16 cells were washed and divided into three groups for a two-hour incubation either without gplOO, with gplOO at 1 ng / ml (low gplOO) and with gplOO at 10 ng / ml (high gplOO). Cells were washed and then added to the washed PMEL + antibody cultures at 40,000 cells per well and incubated together overnight.
Day 8 intracellular staining with IFN-y
Golgi-Plug (BD Biosciences) was added during the last 5 manufacturers, using culture hours according to the instructions of the Intracellular staining with IFN-and the Cytofix / Cytoperm fixation / permeabilization kit was performed.
BD
Biosciences according to the manufacturer's instructions and all antibodies
IMPI
317 πχϊτπντο kuhcano pe u mqjtfpAP INDfcTÜAl.
spotted were also from BD Biosciences. Cells were surface stained with CD8a PE and intracellular FITC Thyl.l were stained with IFN-γ APC at saturation concentrations.
All samples were run on a FACSCalibur Beckman Dickinson and the data was analyzed using FLOWJO ™ software from Tree Star, Inc.
D011.10 In Vitro Assay
Spleen and mesenteric lymph nodes were harvested from DO11.10 transgenic mice, ground into single cell suspensions, and lysed from red blood cell cells. Cells were cultured for 72 hours at a density of 1 χ 10<sup>6</sup> cells by me in 6-well plates with 0.3 μ pé Ova peptide. The culture medium was RPMI 1640 t 10% fetal bovine serum + 20 µΜ HEPES and 1: 100 dilutions of the following Gibco supplements: Gluta-MAX, sodium pyruvate, penicillin / streptomycin and non-essential amino acids.
After primary stimulation, the cells were harvested and purified for CD4 + T cells using a mouse CD4 T cell purification kit according to the manufacturer's instructions (Miltenyi Biotec). Purified CD4 + T cells were allowed to stand overnight.
The following day, cells were harvested, washed, and co-cultured with irradiated A20 cells (10,000
<img file="MX356367B_D0308.tif" />
318
IMPI Mexican INSTmnv PROPERTY • »NIXKT») íaI
<img file="MX356367B_D0309.tif" />
rads). The co-culture was plated in 9-well U-bottom plates in triplicate wells, with 50,000 CD4 + T cells to 40,000 A20 cells with titrated Ova peptide and antibody at a final concentration of 20 pg / ml. After 48 hours, the cultures were boosted overnight with 1 µΟί / ροζο of 3H-thymidine and frozen the following day. The plates were later thawed, harvested in a cell harvester, and read on a beta counter.
EXAMPLE 6
Enhanced proliferation of human CD8 + T cells in a
Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction using anti-PD-Ll
Figure 5 demonstrates the ability of anti-PD-Ll (eg, YW243.55.S1) to enhance proliferation of human CD8 T cells in response to cells from an unpaired MHC donor. Responding CD8 + T cells were enriched for the whole blood of Donor A by first using RosetteSep® CD8 + T cells (StemCell Technologies) according to the manufacturer's instructions. The cells were then diluted with an equal volume of phosphate buffered saline (PBS) and separated by gradient centrifugation placing them on Ficoll-Paque Plus (GE Healthcare). After separation, cells were stained with APC CD8 (BD Biosciences) and found to be 78% CD8 + T cells. Cells were fluorescently labeled with 2.5 μΜ of CFSE Tracer Dye (Molecular
<img file="MX356367B_D0310.tif" />
319
IMPI nwnyro ΜβΚΛΝΟ
You try).
To serve as antigen presenting allogeneic cells (APCs), mononuclear cells were first isolated from Donor B whole blood and then depleted of CD3 + T cells. The blood was diluted with an equal volume of PBS and the mononuclear cells were isolated after gradient centrifugation on Ficoll. Cells were stained with FITC CD3 (BD Biosciences), washed, and then incubated with anti-FITC microgranules (Miltenyi Biotec). The FITC CD3 positive cells were then depleted in the AutoMACS cell separator (Miltenyi Biotec). The cells were then irradiated at 2,500 rads in a cesium irradiator.
Cells were co-cultured in a 96-well flat bottom plate with 150,000 CD8 + T cells and 150,000 APCs for 5 days with antibodies at 10 pg / ml. The culture medium was RPMI 1640 + 10% fetal bovine serum + 20 µΜ HEPES and 1: 100 dilutions of the following Gibco supplements: Gluta-MAX, sodium pyruvate, penicillin / streptomycin and non-essential amino acids.
On day 5, cells were harvested, washed, and stained with CD8-biotin followed by streptavidinPerCp (BD Biosciences). Samples were run on a FACSCalibur Beckman Dickinson and data were analyzed using FlowJo software from Tree Star, Inc.
320
IMPI
XSTTTVT · MEXICAN DE LA MOFIEDAD JNW'STWLA »
<img file="MX356367B_D0311.tif" />
An improvement of aproklWádáftíeñfé 4b% was observed in the proliferation of CD8 T cells that respond to donor cells without pairing with MHC in the presence of anti-PDL1.
EXAMPLE 7
Effects of PD-Ll Blocking on an In Vivo LCMV Model
T cells under chronic stimulation conditions have been shown to upregulate and sustain PD-1 inhibitory receptor expression. Ligation of PD-1 by either of its two ligands PD-L2 and PD-L2 contributes to the refractory state of the chronically activated T cell, attenuating its response to its cognate antigen. In mice persistently infected with choriomeningitis lymphocytic virus (LCMV), blocking PD-1 or its PD-Ll ligand is sufficient to revitalize chronically refractory T cells, improving the magnitude and functional quality of the T cell response anti-viral. Similarly, humans chronically infected with HIV or HCV exhibit stimulation-refractory T cells whose activity can be enhanced in vitro by blocking PDL1 or PD-L2. Consequently, PDL1 blocking activity in the LCMV model suggests a therapeutic potential to enhance anti-viral or anti-tumor immunity.
For the in vivo LCMV experiments in the mouse, we have reformatted the humanized anti-PD-Ll antibody <sub>321</sub> ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY (YW243.55S70), cloning upstream phage-derived heavy and light chain vyTl'abl'é 35 phage sequences from the mouse IgG2a heavy chain and light chain constant domains of mouse. To avoid antibody-mediated cytotoxicity of cells expressing PD-Ll by inhibiting Fcy receptor binding, positions 265 (aspartic acid) and 297 (asparagine) were changed to alanine (DANA). Shields RL et al., J. Biol. Chem., 2001 276 (9): 6591-6604. To test the ability of the anti-PD-Ll antibody to enhance anti-viral immunity in chronic infection, mice were infected on day 0 with 2 x 10<sup>s</sup> LCMV plaque forming units (pfu) of clone 14 or the Armstrong strain of LCMV as a reference control. The schematic of the experimental design appears in Figure 6. Infection with clone 13 results in a chronic infection characterized by T cells that expand but are unable to effectively clear the virus, while the LCMV Armstrong clears within 8 10 days after infection. On day 14, mice started treatment with either anti-PD-Ll or control mlgG delivered at a dose of 10 mg / kg 3 times / week. On days 21 and 28, analysis of CD8 T cell function and viral titrations in blood and tissues was carried out.
Consistent with the data published by Barber et
<img file="MX356367B_D0312.tif" />
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0313.tif" />
al., Nature 439: 682-7 (2006), this example shows the ability of the anti-PD-Ll antibody to improve response
<td>cytotoxic</td><td>of the</td><td>lymphocyte</td><td>to</td><td>LCMV after</td><td>of a regimen</td>
<td>treatment</td><td>of</td><td>2 weeks</td><td>in</td><td>an infection</td><td>chronic by LCMV.</td>
<td>The figure</td><td>7A</td><td>shows the</td><td>or, or</td><td>T cell</td><td>CD8 expressing</td>
CD107a on its cell surface in response to the LCMV gp33-specific peptide. The plasma membrane expression of CD107a, normally expressed intracellularly, accompanies the degranulation process and consequently serves as a surrogate marker for degranulation. Regarding the response of cells to acute LCMV Armstrong infection, cells from animals infected with the chronic strain, clone 13, are damaged in degranulation (Ig control group), while PD-blockade L1 was able to restore CD8 + degranulation to levels comparable to those seen in the Armstrong infection. Similarly, 7B demonstrated an increased% of CD8 T cells producing IFN-γ in response to LCMV gp33 in the group treated with anti-PD-Ll relative to control Ig.
Next, the impact of the antiPD-L1 antibody on the reduction or eradication of the LCMV virus in blood and tissues was tested. In Figure 8A, the graphs show log virus titers in the indicated control Ig tissue and in animals treated with PD-Ll on day 21 and 28
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0314.tif" />
323 after infection with LCMV of clone 13. Antibody treatment was started on day 14 post infection. PD-Ll blockade resulted in a highly significant reduction in viral titers in blood, liver, brain, lungs, and kidney. Unexpectedly, in 3 out of 5 mice, the α-PD-L antibody reduced blood LCMV titers to levels below detection (<1 x IO<sup>-5</sup>). In a subsequent experiment of comparable design, virus eradication in the blood and liver was observed in 5/5 mice treated for 2 weeks with anti-PD-Ll in either 10 mg / kg or 2 mg / kg 3-fold doses. / week (data not shown). The lower graph shows the kinetics of reduction of viral titrations in the blood and shows an average reduction of 96.8% in the group treated with anti-PD-Ll on day 28 in relation to the control. The data support the importance of the PD-1 / PD-L1 pathway in inhibiting T cell responses in chronic infections and are consistent with the effects of PD-Ll blocking in vitro on T cells obtained from humans with chronic infections such as hepatitis C and HIV.
Materials and methods:
% Determination of IFN-gamma production by CD8 T cells in response to LCMV gp33 peptide
The spleens of infected mice were isolated and
<img file="MX356367B_D0315.tif" />
324 generated a tritnrandn Iqf ή-rganng_aa single cell suspension.
complete medium: IMD; (Invitrogen, Inc., Carlsbad, CA) containing 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum, 2 mM L-glutamine, 10 U / ml penicillin / streptomycin and 10 mM 2-mercaptoethanol. Red blood cell cells were used using ACK lysis buffer (0.15 M NH<sub>4</sub>C1, 10mM KHCO<sub>3</sub>0.1mM EDTA). To measure antigen-specific CD8 T cell responses, splenocytes were washed in complete medium and re-stimulated in vitro for 4 hours with the LCMV gp33 peptide (KAVYNFATC, Prolmmunr Inc., Bradenton, FL.). 1 x 10 were grown<sup>6</sup> splenocytes in 96-well flat-bottom plates with
100 ng / ml of the gp33 peptide in the presence of 100 units / ml (1: 1000 dilution) of monesin (BD Pharmingen) and FITC antiCDl07a (clone ID4B, BD Biosciences, San José, CA). After incubation, the cells were washed once in PBS containing 2% fetal bovine serum and the cell surface markers were stained using fluorophore-conjugated antibodies: APC anti-CD8 (clone 53.67, BD Biosciences, San Jose, CA) PerCp-Cy5.5 anti-CD4 (clone RM4-5, BD Biosciences, San José, CA) and PE anri-PD-1 (clone J43, BD Biosciences, San José, CA). Staining for intracellular IFN-γ was performed using the Cytofix Cytoperm Plus kit (BD Biosciences, San José, CA) according to the manufacturer's instructions using PE-Cy7 anti-IFN-γ
325
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX356367B_D0316.tif" />
(Clone XMG1.2, eBioscience Inc. San Diego, CA). To detect the number of gp33-specific CD8 T cells, fresh splenocytes were stained with gp33 pentamers (H2Db linked to APC, Prolmmune Inc. Bradenton, FL) according to the manufacturer's instructions. Data was collected using a BD FACSAria (BD Biosciences, San Jose, CA) and analyzed with FlowJo software (Tree Star Inc., Ashland OR).
LCMV viral titers determinations:
Fibrosarcoma MC57 cells are infected with 10-fold serial dilutions of blood or tissue containing homogeneous LCMV in complete IMDM. The reaction is then incubated for 2 to 6 hours in a tissue culture incubator at 37 ° C, then covered with DMEM containing 1% methyl cellulose. This is followed by incubation for 3 to 5 days, then the methyl cellulose layer is removed by aspiration. Cells are fixed with PBS / 4% paraformaldehyde, then permeabilized with 0.5% Triton-x for 20 minutes, washed with PBS, then blocked with 10% FCS for 1 hour with gentle oscillation. Staining for LCMV is done with VL4 antibody (1 hour), washed 2 times, then developed with anti-rat HRP (1: 400) in blocking buffer. This is followed by a 3 x wash, then ophenylenediamine substrate (SIGMA P8806-50TAB 3 mg / tablet) is added to the wells
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0317.tif" />
326 for development.
EXAMPLE 8
PD-Ll blockade in cancer
It is now apparent that many tumors exploit PD-1 ligand expression as a means of attenuating anti-tumor T-cell responses. Several cancers have been characterized by expressing high levels of PD-Ll in both tumors and tumor-infiltrating leukocytes, and this high expression of PD-Ll is frequently associated with poorer prognosis. Mouse tumor models demonstrate similar increases in PD-Ll expression within tumors and demonstrate a role for the PD-1 / PD-L1 pathway in inhibiting tumor immunity.
Here we present an experiment demonstrating the impact of PD-Ll blockade on orthotopic tumor growth of murine colorectal carcinoma cells MC38.Ova in syngeneic C57B6 mice (Figure 9A). These cells express ovalbumin by retroviral transduction and express PD-Ll, but not PD-L2 on their cell surface as assessed by flow cytometry (histogram - Figure 10A). Mice were inoculated subcutaneously with 0.5 million MC38 cells. Ova on day 0. Mice were treated on day 1 or day 14 (when the tumors had reached an average size of
250 mm<sup>3</sup>) 10 mice / group, with 10 mg / kg anti-PD-Ll
327
<img file="MX356367B_D0318.tif" />
(YW243.55S70 mouse IgG2a-DANA), control Ig ^ 'or anti-CTLA4 blocking antibody, (UC10-4F10-11) 3 times / week for the duration of the study. Blocking PDL1 in either early or late intervention is highly effective as a single agent therapy in preventing tumor growth. In contrast, blocking of CTLA4, another inhibitor molecule expressed in T cells, showed no evidence of inhibiting tumor growth. These results demonstrate the unique role of the PD-1 / PD-L1 axis on CTLA4 / B7 in suppressing the anti-tumor immune response and support the potential for treating human cancers with antibodies that block PD-L1's interaction with PD-1 and B7.1 .
Syngeneic tumor model MC38.Ova: Methods. On day 0, 70 animals were inoculated subcutaneously with 0.5 million MC38.Ova cells in 100 microliters of HBSS + matrigel. Starting on day 20, mice were recruited into one of 2 treatment groups (see below: group 1 or group 2). Tumors were grown in the remaining 40 mice until day 14. Of these 40, 30 mice with tumors of similar size were recruited into one of 3 treatment groups (Groups 3 to 5). Tumors were measured and mice weighed 2 times / week. Mice not recruited in the following treatment groups were euthanized due to dissimilar tumor volume:
<img file="MX356367B_D0319.tif" />
328
IMPI Mexican wrrmiTo OF THE PROPERTY JNDUSTRIAJL
<td>μΐ.</td><td>Group 1: DI, 3x / week</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-gpl20,</td><td> 10</td><td>mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td>μΐ.</td><td>Group 2: DI, 3x / week</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-PD-Ll,</td><td> 10</td><td>mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td>μΐ.</td><td>Group number 3: D14, 3x / week</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-gpl20,</td><td> 10</td><td>mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td>μΐ.</td><td>Group 4: D14, 3x / week</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-PD-Ll,</td><td> 10</td><td>mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td>μΐχ</td><td>Team 5: D14, 3x / week</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-CTLA-4,</td><td> 10</td><td>mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td> * * *</td><td>Groups 1 and</td><td>2 started</td><td colspan="2">the dosage</td><td>at</td><td>GAVE;</td><td>the</td>
Groups 3, 4 and 5 in D14.
EXAMPLE 9
Combinations of anti-PD-Ll with other agents to provide an anti-tumor effect or immune enhancement therapy - model MC38.Ova
<td>In</td><td>the</td><td>day</td><td>0, inoculated</td><td colspan="2">150 animals so</td>
<td>subcutaneous</td><td>with</td><td> 0.5</td><td>millions of</td><td>MC38.Ova cells in</td><td> 100</td>
<td>microliters</td><td>of</td><td>HBSS</td><td>+ matrigel.</td><td>They were allowed to grow</td><td>the</td>
tumors in mice. Mice were weighed and measured 2x / week until day 11 (when tumor volume is between 100 to 200 mm<sup>3</sup>). On day 11, after tumor measurement, mice were recruited into 1 of the following twelve treatment groups. Mice not recruited in the following treatment groups were euthanized due to
<img file="MX356367B_D0320.tif" />
dissimilar tumor volume. Gemcitabine treatment (Group 4) begins on day 12, while treatment for the remaining antibody groups begins on day 14. All volumes are 100 µΐ in inert vehicle, with additional details as reported below:
<td></td><td>Group</td><td>1: antibody</td><td>anti-gpl20,</td><td>10 mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td>μΐ,</td><td>3x / week x</td><td>5, n = 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td>2: antibody</td><td>anti-PD-Ll,</td><td>10 mg / kg</td><td>IP,</td><td> 100</td>
<td>μΐ,</td><td>3x / week x</td><td>5, n = 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td>3: antibody</td><td>anti-VEGF, 5</td><td>j mg / kg IP,</td><td> 100</td><td>μΐ,</td>
<td colspan="2">2x / week x 5, n</td><td> . = 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td>4: gemcitabine</td><td>, 40 mg / kg</td><td>IP, 100 μ,</td><td>Day</td><td> 12,</td>
<td> 16,</td><td>20, n = 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td>5: antibody</td><td>anti-PD-Ll</td><td colspan="3">p anti-antibody</td>
gp! 20, n = 10
<td></td><td>Group</td><td> 6.</td><td>Antibody</td><td>anti-PD-Ll</td><td> +</td><td colspan="2">anti-antibody</td>
<td>VEGF, n =</td><td> 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td> 7 :</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-PD-Ll</td><td> +</td><td>gemcitabine,</td><td>n =</td>
<td> 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td> 8 :</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-gpl20</td><td> +</td><td>gemcitabine,</td><td>n =</td>
<td> 10</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Group</td><td> 9:</td><td>antibody</td><td>anti-gpl20 +</td><td colspan="2">anti-VEGF, n =</td><td> = 10</td>
<td>Day</td><td> 12:</td><td>The</td><td>mice i</td><td>of the group</td><td> 1</td><td>they bleed</td><td> (10</td>
microliters) retro-orbitally under anesthesia for analysis
CBC
330
IM F
NTTWTO MEXICANO AO
OF THE INDUSTRIAL PRCPIEDAU
<img file="MX356367B_D0321.tif" />
Day 14 and day 22: Group 4 mice are bled (TÓO * microlitres) retro-orbitally under anesthesia for analysis
CBC.
Day 19: All mice, except group 4, are bled (100 microliters) retro-orbitally under anesthesia for CBC analysis.
Day 26: All mice, except group 4, are bled (100 microliters) retro-orbitally under anesthesia for PK analysis.
Tumors are measured and mice are weighed 2X / week. Animals exhibiting> 15% weight loss will be weighed daily and euthanized if they lose> 20% body weight. Mice will be euthanized when tumor volumes exceed 3,000 mm<sup>3</sup>, or after 3 months if no tumors form.
This study demonstrates (Figure 10) that PD-L1 blockade was more effective than α-VEGF and an inductive regimen of gemcitabine alone.
EXAMPLE 10
Expression of anti-PD-Ll antibody in mammalian cells
This example illustrates the preparation of potentially glycosylated forms of anti-PD-Ll antibody by recombinant expression in mammalian cells.
The vector, pRK5 (see EP 307,247, published March 1989), is used as the expression vector.
<sub>331</sub> IMPI ^
JJ-L IWSTITUTO MEXICANO Yu-aSierar
Dt THE industrial RRONEDAD
Optionally, DNA encoding the antibody's heavy y7o ~ ** light chain is ligated into pRK5 with selected restriction enzymes to allow insertion of such DNA using ligation methods such as those described in Sambrook et al., Supra.
In one embodiment, the selected host cells may be 293 cells. Human 293 cells (ATCC CCL 1573) are grown to converge on tissue culture plates in a medium such as DMEM supplemented with fetal calf serum and optionally, nutritional components and / or antibiotics. Approximately 10 pg of DNA encoding the pRK5 antibody is mixed with approximately 1 pg of DNA encoding the VA RNA gene [Thimmappaya et al., Cell, 31: 543 (1982)] and dissolved in 500 µl of 1 mM of
Tris-HCl, 0.1 mM EDTA, 0.227 M CaCl2 · 500 µl of 50 mM HEPES (pH 7.35), 280 mM NaCl, 1.5 mM NaPO are added dropwise to this mixture<sub>4</sub> and a precipitate is allowed to form for 10 minutes at 25 ° C. The precipitate is suspended and added to 293 cells and allowed to stand for approximately four hours at 37 ° C. The culture medium is aspirated and 2 ml of 20% glycerol in PBS is added over 30 seconds. The 293 cells are then washed with serum-free medium, fresh medium is added, and the cells are incubated for approximately 5 days.
Approximately 24 hours after
<img file="MX356367B_D0322.tif" />
332 transfections, the culture medium is removed and replaced with culture medium (alone) or culture medium containing 200 pCi / ml of <sup>35</sup>S-cysteine and 200 pCi / ml of <sup>35</sup>S-methionine. After a 12 hour incubation, the conditioned medium is collected, concentrated on a rotary filter and loaded onto a 15% SDS gel. The processed gel can be dried and exposed to the film for a selected period of time to reveal the presence of the antibody. Cultures containing transfected cells can undergo additional incubation (in serum free medium) and the medium is tested in selected bioassays.
In an alternative technique, the antibody can be introduced into 293 cells transiently using the dextran sulfate method described by Somparyrac et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci., 12: 7575 (1981). 293 cells are grown at maximum density in a spinner flask and 700 pg of the DNA encoding the pRK5 antibody is added. Cells are first concentrated from the spinner flask by centrifugation and washed with PBS. The DNA-dextran precipitate is incubated in the cell granule for four hours. Cells are treated with 20% glycerol for 90 seconds, washed with tissue culture medium and reintroduced into the spinner flask containing tissue culture medium, 5 pg / ml bovine insulin and 0.1 pg / ml bovine transferrin . After about
<img file="MX356367B_D0323.tif" />
333
<img file="MX356367B_D0324.tif" />
CELA PROPERTY MEXICAN INSTITUTE
IN3US rRIAL four days, the conditioned medium is centrifuged 'γ' 5é``TiITr'á 'to remove cells and dust. The sample containing the expressed antibody can then be concentrated and purified by any selected method, such as dialysis and / or column chromatography.
In another embodiment, the antibody can be expressed in CHO cells. DNA encoding the bound antibody in pRK5 can be transferred into CHO cells using reagents such as CaPO<sub>4</sub> or DEAE-dextran. As described above. Cell cultures can be incubated and the medium replaced with culture medium (alone) or with a medium containing a radio tag such as<sup>35</sup>Smethionine. After determining the presence of the antibody, the culture medium can be replaced with serum-free medium. Preferably, the cultures are incubated for approximately 6 days and then the conditioned medium is harvested. The medium containing the expressed antibody can then be concentrated and purified by any selected method.
Epitope variants of the antibody can also be expressed in host CHO cells. DNA encoding the bound antibody in pRK5 can be subcloned out of the pRK5 vector. The subclone insert can undergo PCR for in-frame fusion with a selected epitope tag such as a poly-his tag in a
<img file="MX356367B_D0325.tif" />
334 baculovirus expression vector. Poly-his tagged DNA encoding the antibody insert can be subcloned into an SV40 activated vector containing a selection marker such as DHFR for selection of stable clones. Finally, CHO cells can be transected (as described above) with the SV40 activated vector. Labeling can be carried out, as described above, to verify expression. The culture medium containing the expressed poly-His tagged antibody can then be concentrated and purified by any selected method, such as Ni chelate affinity chromatography<sup>2+</sup>.
The antibody can also be expressed in CHO and / or COS cells by a transient expression procedure or in CHO cells by another stable expression procedure.
Stable expression in CHO cells is carried out using the following procedure. Proteins are expressed as an IgG (immunoadhesin) construct, in which the coding sequences for the soluble forms (eg, the extracellular domains) of the respective proteins are fused to an IgGl constant region sequence containing the joint, the CH2 and CH2 domains and / or a poly-His tagged form.
After PCR amplification, the DNAs
335
IMPI
INSTITl rro MEXICANO Di LA PROPIEDA »INDI l.'TPIAl
<img file="MX356367B_D0326.tif" />
Respective are subcloned into a CHO expression vector using standard techniques as described in Ausubel et al., Current Protocols of Molecular Biology., Unit 3.16, John Wiley and Sons (1997). CHO expression vectors are constructed to have 5 = compatible restriction sites
<td>and 3</td><td>= of DNA</td><td>of</td><td>interest</td><td>to allow</td><td>a</td><td>annealing</td><td>convenient</td>
<td>of</td><td>CDNA = s.</td><td>The</td><td>vector</td><td>used in</td><td>the</td><td>expression</td><td>cell</td>
<td>CHO</td><td>it is like</td><td>I know</td><td colspan="2">described in Lucas et</td><td>to the</td><td>., Nucí.</td><td>Acids Res.,</td>
24: 9 (1774-1779 (1996) and uses the SV40 primary promoter / enhancer to activate expression of the cDNA of interest and dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR). Expression of DHFR allows selection for stable maintenance of the plasmid after transfection.
Twelve micrograms of the desired plasmid DNA are introduced into approximately 10 million CHO cells using commercially available transfection reagents (Quiagen), DOSPER®, or FUGENE®
The cells are cultured as is, supra. Approximately 3 x 10 '<sup>7</sup> Cells are frozen in an ampule for growth and further production as described below.
The ampoules containing the plasmid DNA are thawed by placement in a water bath and mixed by spinning. The contents are pipetted into a centrifuge tube containing 10 ml of medium and centrifuged into available SUPERFECT® (Boehringer Mannheim).
described in Lúea et al.
IMPI
<img file="MX356367B_D0327.tif" />
336
1000 rpm for 5 minutes. The supernatant is aspirated and the cells are re-suspended in 10 ml of selective medium (0.2 cbm of filtered PS20 with 5% 0.2 cbm of diafiltered fetal bovine serum). The cells are then aliquoted into a 100 ml spin mixer containing 90 ml of selective medium. After 1 to 2 days, cells are transferred to a 250 ml spin mixer filled with 150 ml of selective growth medium and incubated at 37 ° C. After another 2 to 3 days, 250 ml, 500 ml and 2000 ml spin mixers are seeded with 3 x 10<sup>5</sup> cells / ml. The cell medium is exchanged with fresh medium by centrifugation and resuspension in the production medium. Although any suitable CHO medium can be employed, a production medium described in US Patent No. 5,122,469, issued June 16, 1992 can actually be used. A 3 liter production spin mixer is seeded at 1.2 x 10<sup>6</sup> cells / ml. On day 0 the number of cells and pH are determined. On day 1, the spin mixer is sampled and spraying with filtered air begins. On day 2, the spin mixer is sampled, the temperature is changed to 33 ° C and 30 ml of 500 g / 1 glucose and 0.6 ml of 10% antifoam are taken (eg, 35% polydimethylsiloxane emulsion, Dow Corning Medical Grade Emulsion 365). Throughout all production, the pH is adjusted as needed to keep it around 7.2. After 10 days, or until viability falls by
IMPIáp *
337 if ^ rruroΜίίβΑϋο
OWNED · industry!
below 70%, the cell culture is harvested by centrifugation and filtered through a 0.22 dm filter.
The filtrate was either stored at 4 ° C or immediately loaded onto columns for purification.
For poly-His tagged constructs, proteins are purified using a Ni-NTA column (Quiagen). Before purification, imidazole is added to the conditioned medium at a concentration of 5 mM. The conditioned medium is pumped onto a 6 ml Ni-NTA column equilibrated at 4 ° C in 20 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.4, containing 0.3 M NaCl and 5 mM imidazole at a flow rate of 4 to 5 ml / minute. After loading, the column is washed with additional equilibration buffer and the protein is eluted with equilibration buffer containing 0.25 M imidazole. The highly purified protein is subsequently desalted in a storage buffer containing 10 mM HEPES, 0.14 M NaCl and 4% mannitol, pH 6.8, with a 25 ml G25 Superfine column (Pharmacia) and stored at -80 ° C .
The immunoadhesin constructs (containing Fe) are purified from the conditioned medium as follows.
The conditioned medium is pumped onto a 5 ml Protein A column (Pharmacia) which has been equilibrated in 20 mM Na phosphate buffer, pH 6.8. After loading, the column is extensively washed with
IMPÍ
<img file="MX356367B_D0328.tif" />
338 balanced before elution with 100 mM citric acid, pH 3.5. the eluted protein is immediately neutralized by collecting 1 ml fractions in tubes containing 275 cbl of 1 M Tris buffer, pH 9. The highly purified protein is subsequently desalted in storage buffer as described above for the poly-His tagged proteins. Homogeneity is assessed by SDS polyacrylamide gels and by N-terminal amino acid sequencing by Edman degradation.
EXAMPLE 11
Expression of anti-PD-Ll antibody in E. coli
This example illustrates the preparation of a non-glycosylated form of the anti-PD-Ll antibody by recombinant expression in E. coli.
The DNA sequence encoding the anti-PD-Ll antibody is initially amplified using select PCR primers. Primers must contain restriction enzyme sites that correspond to the restriction enzyme sites in the selected expression vector. A variety of expression vectors can be used. An example of a suitable vector is pBR322 (derived from E. coli; see Bolívar et al., Gene, 2:95 (1977)) that contains genes for ampicillin and tetracycline resistance. The vector is digested with restriction enzyme and dephosphorylated. The PCR amplified sequences are then ligated into the
<img file="MX356367B_D0329.tif" />
339
ΪΜΡΙ
INSTITUTO NtXICAN · OS U PR'WI »A» INOU <TWiM.
vector. The vector will preferably include sequences encoding an antibiotic resistance gene, a trp promoter, a poly-his guide (including the first six STII codons, the polyhis sequence and the enterokinase cleavage site), the coding region of NPOR, the lambda transcriptional terminator, and an argU gene.
<td></td><td>Mix</td><td>of</td><td>ligation is used</td><td>so</td><td>for</td>
<td colspan="2">transform a strain</td><td>of</td><td>E. coli selected</td><td>using</td><td>the</td>
<td>methods</td><td>described</td><td>in</td><td>Sambrook et al.,</td><td>supra.</td><td>The</td>
Transformers are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates and then antibiotic resistant colonies are selected. Plasmid DNA can be isolated and confirmed by restriction analysis and DNA sequencing.
Selected clones can be grown overnight in liquid culture medium such as LB broth supplemented with antibiotics. The overnight culture can subsequently be used to inoculate a larger scale culture. The cells are then grown to a desired optical density, during which the expression promoter is activated.
After culturing the cells for several more hours, the cells can be harvested by centrifugation. centrifugation
The cell granule obtained by means of can be solubilized using various <sub>340</sub> JMPI.íg ^
MUI UTO HMMCANO bi la ΜιΧΊΕϋΑ »CVm-.UjLJv /
INDUSTRY!.
Agents known in the art, and the sorubiTTzádó antibody can then be purified using a metal chelating column under conditions that allow for close binding of the antibody.
The anti-PD-Ll antibody can also be expressed in E. coli in a poly-His tagged form, using the following procedure. DNA encoding the antibody is initially amplified using selected PCR primers. The primer contains restriction enzyme sites that correspond to the restriction enzyme sites in the selected expression vector and other useful sequences that provide efficient and reliable translation initiation, rapid purification on a metal chelate column, and proteolytic removal with enterokinase. The PCR-amplified poly-His tagged sequences are then ligated into an expression vector, which is used to transform an E. coli host based on strain 52 (W3110 fuhA (tonA) galR rpoHts ion (htpRtd) clpP ( lacIq) Transformers are first grown in LB containing 50 mg / ml carbenicillin at 30 ° C with shaking until reaching an OD of 600 from 3 to 5. The cultures are then diluted 50 to 100 times in CRAP medium (prepared by mixing 3.57 g (NH<sub>4</sub>)<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub>0.71 g of sodium citrate A2H<sub>2</sub>=, 1.07 g of KC1, 5.36 g of yeast extract
Different, 5.36 g of hicasa SF Sheffield in 500 ml of water, like this * - ~ r341
IiCTÍT 'ΓΓΟ MEXICMfc) Cl ÍA FaopiíFMD • ^ f'USlRIAL
<img file="MX356367B_D0330.tif" />
as 110 mM MPOS, pH 7.3, 0.55% (w / v) glucose and 7 mM MgSC> 4) and grown for approximately 20-30 hours at 30 ° C with shaking. Samples are removed to verify expression by SDS-PAGE analysis and the volume culture is centrifuged to granulate the cells. The cell granules are frozen until purified and refolded.
The E. coli paste from 0.5 to 1 liter fermentations (6 to 10 g granules) is resuspended in 10 volumes (w / v) in 7M guanidine, 20mM Tris, buffer pH 8. Add Solid sodium sulfite and sodium tetrathionate to produce final concentrations of 0.1 M and 0.02 M respectively, and the solution is stirred overnight at 4 ° C. This step results in a denatured protein with all cysteine residues blocked by sulfitolization. The solution is centrifuged at 40,000 rpm in a Beckman ultracentrifuge for 30 minutes. The supernatant is diluted with 3 to 5 volumes of metal chelate column buffer (6M guanidine, 20mM Tris, pH 7.4) and filtered through 0.22 micron filters to clarify. Depending on the condition, the clarified extract is loaded onto a 5 ml Ni-NTA Quiagen metal chelate column balanced on the metal chelate column buffer. The column is washed with an additional buffer containing 50 mM imidazole
342
IMPifg
WWTWTOMJBCICANO pl 14 WjflMEDAD
INDUSTRIAL (Calbiochem, Utrol grade), pH 7.4. Protein is eluted with buffer containing 250 mM imidazole. Fractions containing the desired protein were deposited and stored at 4 ° C. Protein concentration is estimated by its absorbance at 280 nm using the extinction coefficient calculated based on its amino acid sequence.
Proteins are refolded by slowly diluting the sample in freshly prepared refolding buffer consisting of: 20mM Tris, pH 8.6, 0.3M NaCl, 2.5M Urea, 5mM Cysteine, 20mM Glycine and 1mM EDTA . Refolding volumes are selected such that the protein concentration is between 50 and 100 micrograms / ml. The refolded solution is gently stirred at 4 ° C for 12 to 36 hours. The refolding reaction is quenched by the addition of TFA to a final concentration of 0.4% (pH of about 3). Before protein purification, the solution is filtered through a 0.22 micron filter and acetonitrile is added to a final concentration of 2 to 10%. The refolded protein is chromatographed on a Poros Rl / H reverse phase column using a 0.1% TFA mobile buffer with elution with a 10 to 80% acetonitrile gradient. Aliquots of fractions with absorbency
A280 are analyzed on SDS polyacrylamide gels and the fractions containing homogeneous refolded protein are
IMPI mcxigah institute »DB LABROPIEUAD INDUSTRIAL appropriately eluted at those oue those
343 deposit. Generally, the refolded species of most proteins with lower concentrations of acetonitrile species are more compact with their hydrophobic interiors 5 protected from interaction with the reverse phase resin. Aggregated species commonly elute at higher acetonitrile concentrations. In addition to dissolving unfolded forms of protein from the desired shape, the reverse phase step also removes endotoxin from the samples.
Fractions containing the desired folded anti-PD-Ll antibodies are deposited and the acetonitrile is removed using a gentle stream of nitrogen directed at the solution ·. Proteins are formulated in 20 mM HEPES, pH 6.8, with 0.14 M sodium chloride and mannitol at
4% by dialysis or by gel filtration using G25 Superfine resins (Pharmacia) balanced in the formulation buffer and sterile filtered.
IMPÍ
<img file="MX356367B_D0331.tif" />
344 mSTITUT · MEFCaMS
I> E PROPERTY
INDU.s-TF.tAl -Vsu framento de
Contents190
363 sheets
Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 3 Sheet 4 Sheet 5 Sheet 6 Sheet 7 Sheet 8 Sheet 9 Sheet 10 Sheet 11 Sheet 12 Sheet 13 Sheet 14 Sheet 15 Sheet 16 Sheet 17 Sheet 18 Sheet 19 Sheet 20 Sheet 21 Sheet 22 Sheet 23 Sheet 24 Sheet 25 Sheet 26 Sheet 27 Sheet 28 Sheet 29 Sheet 30 Sheet 31 Sheet 32 Sheet 33 Sheet 34 Sheet 35 Sheet 36 Sheet 37 Sheet 38 Sheet 39 Sheet 40 Sheet 41 Sheet 42 Sheet 43 Sheet 44 Sheet 45 Sheet 46 Sheet 47 Sheet 48 Sheet 49 Sheet 50 Sheet 51 Sheet 52 Sheet 53 Sheet 54 Sheet 55 Sheet 56 Sheet 57 Sheet 58 Sheet 59 Sheet 60 Sheet 61 Sheet 62 Sheet 63 Sheet 64 Sheet 65 Sheet 66 Sheet 67 Sheet 68 Sheet 69 Sheet 70 Sheet 71 Sheet 72 Sheet 73 Sheet 74 Sheet 75 Sheet 76 Sheet 77 Sheet 78 Sheet 79 Sheet 80 Sheet 81 Sheet 82 Sheet 83 Sheet 84 Sheet 85 Sheet 86 Sheet 87 Sheet 88 Sheet 89 Sheet 90 Sheet 91 Sheet 92 Sheet 93 Sheet 94 Sheet 95 Sheet 96 Sheet 97 Sheet 98 Sheet 99 Sheet 100 Sheet 101 Sheet 102 Sheet 103 Sheet 104 Sheet 105 Sheet 106 Sheet 107 Sheet 108 Sheet 109 Sheet 110 Sheet 111 Sheet 112 Sheet 113 Sheet 114 Sheet 115 Sheet 116 Sheet 117 Sheet 118 Sheet 119 Sheet 120 Sheet 121 Sheet 122 Sheet 123 Sheet 124 Sheet 125 Sheet 126 Sheet 127 Sheet 128 Sheet 129 Sheet 130 Sheet 131 Sheet 132 Sheet 133 Sheet 134 Sheet 135 Sheet 136 Sheet 137 Sheet 138 Sheet 139 Sheet 140 Sheet 141 Sheet 142 Sheet 143 Sheet 144 Sheet 145 Sheet 146 Sheet 147 Sheet 148 Sheet 149 Sheet 150 Sheet 151 Sheet 152 Sheet 153 Sheet 154 Sheet 155 Sheet 156 Sheet 157 Sheet 158 Sheet 159 Sheet 160 Sheet 161 Sheet 162 Sheet 163 Sheet 164 Sheet 165 Sheet 166 Sheet 167 Sheet 168 Sheet 169 Sheet 170 Sheet 171 Sheet 172 Sheet 173 Sheet 174 Sheet 175 Sheet 176 Sheet 177 Sheet 178 Sheet 179 Sheet 180 Sheet 181 Sheet 182 Sheet 183 Sheet 184 Sheet 185 Sheet 186 Sheet 187 Sheet 188 Sheet 189 Sheet 190 Sheet 191 Sheet 192 Sheet 193 Sheet 194 Sheet 195 Sheet 196 Sheet 197 Sheet 198 Sheet 199 Sheet 200 Sheet 201 Sheet 202 Sheet 203 Sheet 204 Sheet 205 Sheet 206 Sheet 207 Sheet 208 Sheet 209 Sheet 210 Sheet 211 Sheet 212 Sheet 213 Sheet 214 Sheet 215 Sheet 216 Sheet 217 Sheet 218 Sheet 219 Sheet 220 Sheet 221 Sheet 222 Sheet 223 Sheet 224 Sheet 225 Sheet 226 Sheet 227 Sheet 228 Sheet 229 Sheet 230 Sheet 231 Sheet 232 Sheet 233 Sheet 234 Sheet 235 Sheet 236 Sheet 237 Sheet 238 Sheet 239 Sheet 240 Sheet 241 Sheet 242 Sheet 243 Sheet 244 Sheet 245 Sheet 246 Sheet 247 Sheet 248 Sheet 249 Sheet 250 Sheet 251 Sheet 252 Sheet 253 Sheet 254 Sheet 255 Sheet 256 Sheet 257 Sheet 258 Sheet 259 Sheet 260 Sheet 261 Sheet 262 Sheet 263 Sheet 264 Sheet 265 Sheet 266 Sheet 267 Sheet 268 Sheet 269 Sheet 270 Sheet 271 Sheet 272 Sheet 273 Sheet 274 Sheet 275 Sheet 276 Sheet 277 Sheet 278 Sheet 279 Sheet 280 Sheet 281 Sheet 282 Sheet 283 Sheet 284 Sheet 285 Sheet 286 Sheet 287 Sheet 288 Sheet 289 Sheet 290 Sheet 291 Sheet 292 Sheet 293 Sheet 294 Sheet 295 Sheet 296 Sheet 297 Sheet 298 Sheet 299 Sheet 300 Sheet 301 Sheet 302 Sheet 303 Sheet 304 Sheet 305 Sheet 306 Sheet 307 Sheet 308 Sheet 309 Sheet 310 Sheet 311 Sheet 312 Sheet 313 Sheet 314 Sheet 315 Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 319 Sheet 320 Sheet 321 Sheet 322 Sheet 323 Sheet 324 Sheet 325 Sheet 326 Sheet 327 Sheet 328 Sheet 329 Sheet 330 Sheet 331 Sheet 332 Sheet 333 Sheet 334 Sheet 335 Sheet 336 Sheet 337 Sheet 338 Sheet 339 Sheet 340 Sheet 341 Sheet 342 Sheet 343 Sheet 344 Sheet 345 Sheet 346 Sheet 347 Sheet 348 Sheet 349 Sheet 350 Sheet 351 Sheet 352 Sheet 353 Sheet 354 Sheet 355 Sheet 356 Sheet 357 Sheet 358 Sheet 359 Sheet 360 Sheet 361 Sheet 362 Sheet 363
185 members in 41 offices
Members185
| Document | Office | Kind | |
|---|---|---|---|
| AU2009333580A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| CA2740806A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA3120172A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| WO2010077634A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| US2010203056A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| TW201032822A | Taiwan Province of China | A | |
| AR074563A1 | Argentina | A1 | |
| CR20110316A | Costa Rica | A | |
| SG172059A1 | Singapore | A1 | |
| ECSP11011115A | Ecuador | A | |
| IL213353A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL213353D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| MX2011005853A | Mexico | A | |
| KR20110092300A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| EP2376535A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| CN102245640A | China | A | |
| MA32948B1 | Morocco | B1 | |
| CL2011001382A1 | Chile | A1 | |
| CO6390023A2 | Colombia | A2 | |
| PE20120341A1 | Peru | A1 | |
| JP2012511329A | Japan | A | |
| US8217149B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| HK1163130A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1163130A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| RU2011128399A | Russian Federation | A | |
| US2013045200A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2013045201A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2013045202A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| ZA201102417B | South Africa | B | |
| NZ592119A | New Zealand | A | |
| TWI419705B | Taiwan Province of China | B | |
| SG196798A1 | Singapore | A1 | |
| US2014065135A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| TW201417828A | Taiwan Province of China | A | |
| PE20141722A1 | Peru | A1 | |
| CN102245640B | China | B | |
| JP5681638B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| CN104479018A | China | A | |
| JP2015091260A | Japan | A | |
| UA109108C2 | Ukraine | C2 | |
| US2015322153A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| BRPI0917592A2 | Brazil | A2 | |
| HK1207387A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1207387A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| AU2016203867A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| AU2009333580B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| US2016222117A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| MX342591B | Mexico | B | |
| CR20160570A | Costa Rica | A | |
| IL249127A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL249127D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| TW201712034A | Taiwan Province of China | A | |
| EP2376535B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 | |
| US2017107287A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| IL213353A | Israel | A | |
| DK2376535T3 | Denmark | T3 | |
| PT2376535T | Portugal | T | |
| LT2376535T | Lithuania | T | |
| SMT201700311T1 | San Marino | T1 | |
| SI2376535T1 | Slovenia | T1 | |
| ES2628095T3 | Spain | T3 | |
| JP6178349B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| JP2017136085A | Japan | A | |
| EP2376535B9 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B9 | |
| HRP20170908T1 | Croatia | T1 | |
| KR101782570B1 | Republic of Korea | B1 | |
| PL2376535T3 | Poland | T3 | |
| KR20170113681A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| NZ717213A | New Zealand | A | |
| RU2636023C2 | Russian Federation | C2 | |
| TWI605828B | Taiwan Province of China | B | |
| LUC00051I1 | Luxembourg | I1 | |
| EP3255060A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| HUS1700049I1 | Hungary | I1 | |
| SG10201708690SA | Singapore | A | |
| CY1118943T1 | Cyprus | T1 | |
| LTPA2017041I1 | Lithuania | I1 | |
| FR17C1050I1 | France | I1 | |
| NL300914I2 | Netherlands (Kingdom of the) | I2 | |
| NO2018006I1 | Norway | I1 | |
| AU2016203867B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| LUC00051I2 | Luxembourg | I2 | |
| US9920123B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| CY2017043I1 | Cyprus | I1 | |
| CY2017043I2 | Cyprus | I2 | |
| MX356367BThis record | Mexico | B | |
| AU2018203226A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| KR20180089573A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CN104479018B | China | B | |
| HK1247621A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1247621A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| CN108997498A | China | A | |
| FR17C1050I2 | France | I2 | |
| US2019016807A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| IL263931D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| RU2017132160A | Russian Federation | A | |
| EP3447073A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| IL249127A | Israel | A | |
| IL249127B | Israel | B | |
| JP6509935B2 | Japan | B2 |
Numbers
- Publication
- 356367
- Application
- 2016009486
Titles2
- Spanish
- ANTICUERPOS ANTI-PD-L1 Y SU USO PARA MEJORAR LA FUNCION DE CELULAS T.
- English
- ANTI-PD-L1 ANTIBODIES AND THEIR USE TO ENHANCE T-CELL FUNCTION.
Classification
- CPC, 37
- C07K16/2827
- A61K39/3955
- A61K2039/505
- A61K2039/507
- C07K16/22
- C07K2317/56
- C07K2317/565
- C07K2317/567
- C07K2317/71
- C07K2317/92
- C07K2317/73
- C07K2317/74
- C07K2317/76
- A61P31/00
- A61P31/04
- A61P31/10
- A61P31/12
- A61P33/00
- A61P33/02
- A61P35/00
- A61P37/00
- A61P37/02
- A61P37/04
- A61P43/00
- Y02A50/30
- A61K39/00
- C07K16/1145
- C07K16/28
- A61K39/39558
- C07K16/3046
- C07K2317/14
- C07K2317/52
- C07K2317/24
- C07K16/30
- A61K45/06
- A61K2300/00
- A61K31/7068
- IPC, 7
- A61K39 395
- A61K31 7068
- A61K45 06
- C07K16 10
- C07K16 22
- C07K16 28
- C07K16 30